NETGEAR M5300 Series, M6100 Series, M7100 Series User Manual

M6100, M5300, and M7100 Series

Managed Switches

User Manual

Version 11.0.0

April 2015

202-11528-01

350 East Plumeria Drive

San Jose, CA 95134

USA

M6100, M5300, and M7100 Series Managed Switches

Support

Thank you for selecting NETGEAR products.

After installing your device, locate the serial number on the label of your product and use it to register your product at https://my.netgear.com

. You must register your product before you can use NETGEAR telephone support. NETGEAR recommends registering your product through the NETGEAR website. For product updates and web support, visit http://support.netgear.com

.

Phone (US & Canada only): 1-888-NETGEAR.

Phone (Other Countries): Check the list of phone numbers at http://support.netgear.com/general/contact/default.aspx

.

Contact your Internet service provider for technical support.

Compliance

For regulatory compliance information, visit http://www.netgear.com/about/regulatory .

See the regulatory compliance document before connecting the power supply.

Trademarks

NETGEAR, the NETGEAR logo, and Connect with Innovation are trademarks and/or registered trademarks of NETGEAR, Inc. and/or its subsidiaries in the United States and/or other countries. Information is subject to change without notice.

© NETGEAR, Inc. All rights reserved.

Revision History

Publication Part Number Publish Date

202-11528-01 April 2015

Comments

First publication

2

Contents

Chapter 1 Getting Started

Available Publications and Online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Register Your Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Understanding the User Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Web Management Interface Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Software Requirements to Use the Web Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Use a Web Browser to Access the Switch and Log In. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Web Interface Buttons and User-Defined Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Interface Naming Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Online Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Web Management Interface Device View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Using SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 2 Configure System Information

Initial Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Configure a Management VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Configure the Initial Service Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

View or Define System Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

View Backplane Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

View the Temperature Sensor Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

View the Fan Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

View the Device Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

View the System CPU Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Configure the CPU Thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

View Switch Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

View USB Device Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

View Slot Information (M5300 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Configure a Loopback Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

View the IPv6 Network Interface Neighbor Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Configure the IPv4 Service Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Configure the IPv6 Service Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

IPv4 Management VLAN Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Configure an IPv4 Management VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Configure an IPv6 Management VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Configure an IPv6 VLAN Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Configure the Time Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Configure the SNTP Global Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

View SNTP Global Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

3


Configure an SNTP Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Configure Daylight Saving Time Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

View the DayLight Saving Time Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Configure DNS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Configure Global DNS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Add a Static Entry to the Local DNS Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Configure the Switch Database Management Template Preference. . . . . . . 72

Configure Green Ethernet Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Configure Green Ethernet Interface Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Configure Green Ethernet Local and Remote Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Configure Green Ethernet Remote Device Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

View the Green Ethernet Statistics Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Configure the Green Ethernet EEE LPI History. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Licenses (M5300 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

View License Keys for M5300 Series Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

View License Features for M5300 Series Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Configure DHCP Server Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Configure DHCP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Configure the DHCP Pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Configure DHCP Pool Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

View DHCP Server Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

View DHCP Bindings Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

View DHCP Conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Configure the DHCP Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

DHCP L2 Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Configure Global DHCP L2 Relay Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Configure a DHCP L2 Relay Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

View DHCP L2 Relay Interface Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Configure UDP Relay Global Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Configure UDP Relay Interface Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Enable or Disable DHCPv6 Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Configure the DHCPv6 Pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Configure the DHCPv6 Prefix Delegation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Configure DHCPv6 Interface Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

View DHCPv6 Bindings Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

View DHCPv6 Server Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Configure DHCPv6 Relay for an Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Configure Basic PoE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Congure PoE Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Configure PoE Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Configure SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Configure the SNMP V1/V2 Community . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Configure SNMP V1/V2 Trap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Configure SNMP V1/V2 Trap Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

View the Supported MIBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Configure SNMP V3 Users. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

LLDP Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Configure LLDP Global Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

4


Configure the LLDP Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

View LLDP Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

View LLDP Local Device Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

View LLDP Remote Device Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

View LLDP Remote Device Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Configure LLDP-MED Global Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Configure LLDP-MED Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

View LLDP-MED Local Device Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

View LLDP-MED Remote Device Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

View LLDP-MED Remote Device Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Configure ISDP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Configure ISDP Basic Global Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Configure ISDP Global Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Configure an ISDP Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

View an ISDP Neighbor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

View ISDP Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Timer Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Configure the Global Timer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Configure the Timer Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Chapter 3 Chassis and Stacking

M6100 Series Switch Chassis Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Configure Basic Chassis Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

View the Chassis Protocol Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

View Chassis Backplane-Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

View the Chassis Backplane-Port Packet-Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Configure the Chassis Power Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Configure the System Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Configure the Power Auto-Rebalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

View Blade Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

View Power Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

View the Power Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

View EPS Power Modules and EPS Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

View the Power Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Rebalance the Chassis Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Configure Chassis Firmware Synchronization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

View NSF Summary Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

View NSF Checkpoint Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

M5300 Series Switch Stacking Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Firmware Synchronization and Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Stack Configuration Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Stack Master Election. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Stack Factory Defaults Reset Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Stack NSF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Stack Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Select a New Stack Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Specify the Stack Sample Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Configure a Stack Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

5


View the Stack Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Configure the mode of the Stack Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Run Stack Port Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Configure Stack Firmware Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Chapter 4 Configure Switching Information

Configure VLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Configure Basic VLAN Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Configure an Advanced VLAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Configure an Internal VLAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Configure VLAN Trunking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Configure VLAN Membership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

View VLAN Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Configure Port PVID Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Configure a MAC-Based VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Configure Protocol-Based VLAN Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Configure Protocol-Based VLAN Group Membership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Configure an IP Subnet-Based VLAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Configure a Port DVLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Configure a Voice VLAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Configure GARP Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Configure GARP Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Auto-VoIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Configure Protocol-Based Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Configure Auto-VoIP OUI-Based Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

OUI-Based Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Configure the OUI Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

View the Auto-VoIP Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 iSCSI Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Configure Global iSCSI Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

View iSCSI Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Control iSCSI Target Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

View iSCSI Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

View iSCSI Session Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Spanning Tree Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Configure Basic STP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Configure Advanced STP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Configure CST Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Configure CST Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

View CST Port Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Configure MST Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

View the Spanning Tree MST Port Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

View STP Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Configure PVST VLAN Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Configure the PVST Interface Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

View PVST Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Multicast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

6


View the MFDB Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

View the MFDB Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

IGMP Snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Configure IGMP Snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Configure IGMP Snooping for Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Configure IGMP Snooping for VLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Configure a Multicast Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Configure a Multicast Router VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

IGMP Snooping Querier Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Configure IGMP Snooping Querier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Configure IGMP Snooping Querier for VLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Configure MLD Snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Configure a MLD Snooping Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Configure MLD VLAN Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

Enable or Disable a Multicast Router on an Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Configure Multicast Router VLAN Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Configure MLD Snooping Querier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Configure MLD Snooping Querier VLAN Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Configure MVR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Configure Basic MVR Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Configure Advanced MVR Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Configure an MVR Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Configure an MVR Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Configure MVR Group Membership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

View MVR Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

MAC Address Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Configure the MAC Address Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Set the Dynamic Address Aging Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Configure a Static MAC Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Configure Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Configure Port Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

View Port Transceiver Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Link Aggregation Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Configure LAG Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Configure LAG Membership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

Configure the Virtual Port-Channel Global Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

Configure the Keep-Alive Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

View the VPC Peer Link Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

Configure the Peer Link Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

Configure the Peer Detection Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

Configure the Virtual Port Channel Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

View Virtual Port Channel Interface Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

View Virtual Port Channel Interface Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

View Virtual Port Channel Keep-Alive Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

View Virtual Port Channel Peer Link Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

Multiple Registration Protocol Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Configure Global MRP Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

7


Configure MRP Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

View MMRP Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

View MVRP Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Chapter 5 Routing

Manage Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

Configure a Basic Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

Configure Advanced Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

Specify Route Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Configure the Router IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

View Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

Configure Routing Parameters for the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

View IP Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

Configure the IP Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

Configure the Secondary IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

IPv6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

Configure IPv6 Global Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

View the IPv6 Route Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

Configure IPv6 Interface Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

IPv6 Prefix Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

View IPv6 Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

View the IPv6 Neighbor Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

IPv6 Static Route Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

Configure the IPv6 Route Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

IPv6 Route Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

Configure IPv6 Tunnels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

VLAN Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

Use the VLAN Static Routing Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

Configure VLAN Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

Address Resolution Protocol Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

Configure Basic ARP Cache . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

Add an Entry to the ARP Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

View or Configure the ARP Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

Configure RIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

Enable RIP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

Configure RIP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

Configure Advanced RIP Interface Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

Route Redistribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

Configure Router Discovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

Configure Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

Configure Global VRRP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

Configure Advanced VRRP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

Configure an Advanced VRRP Secondary IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

Configure an Advanced VRRP Tracking Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

View Advanced VRRP Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

8


Chapter 6 OSPF and OSPFv3

OSPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

Configure Basic OSPF Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

Configure the OSPF Default Route Advertise Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

Configure OSPF Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

Configure the OSPF Common Area ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394

Configure the OSPF Stub Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395

Configure the OSPF NSSA Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

Configure the OSPF Area Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

Configure the OSPF Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

View OSPF Statistics for an Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

View the OSPF Neighbor Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408

View the OSPF Link State Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

Configure the OSPF Virtual Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414

Configure the OSPF Route Redistribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418

View the NSF OSPF Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420

OSPFv3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

Configure Basic OSPFv3 Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

Configure OSPFv3 Default Route Advertise Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

Configure the Advanced OSPFv3 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424

Configure the OSPFv3 Common Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427

Configure an OSPFv3 Stub Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428

Configure the OSPFv3 NSSA Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430

Configure the OSPFv3 Area Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

Configure the OSPFv3 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434

View OSPFv3 Interface Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437

View the OSPFv3 Neighbor Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440

View the OSPFv3 Link State Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442

Configure the OSPFv3 Virtual Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445

Configure OSPFv3 Route Redistribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448

View the NSF OSPFv3 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

Chapter 7 Multicast Routing

Multicast Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453

View the Multicast Mroute Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453

Configure Global Multicast Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454

Configure the Multicast Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456

Configure Global Multicast DVMRP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457

Configure the DVMRP Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458

View the DVMRP Neighbor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459

View the DVMRP Next Hop Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461

View the Multicast DVMRP Prune . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462

View the DVMRP Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463

Configure Multicast IGMP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464

Configure IGMP Global Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464

Configure the IGMP Routing Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465

View IGMP Routing Interface Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467

9


View the IGMP Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468

View the IGMP Membership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470

Configure the IGMP Proxy Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471

View the IGMP Proxy Interface Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473

View the IGMP Proxy Membership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474

Configure PIM Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475

Configure the Multicast PIM Global Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476

Configure PIM SSM Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476

Configure PIM Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

View the PIM Neighbor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479

View the PIM Candidate Rendezvous Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480

View the PIM Neighbor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481

Configure the PIM Candidate Rendezvous Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482

Configure the PIM Bootstrap Router Candidate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483

Configure the PIM Static Rendezvous Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485

Configure Multicast Static Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486

Configure the Multicast Admin Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487

Configure IPv6 Multicast Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488

View the IPv6 Multicast Mroute Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488

Configure the IPv6 PIM Global Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489

Configure IPv6 PIM SSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490

Configure the IPv6 PIM Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491

View the IPv6 PIM Neighbor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493

Configure the IPv6 PIM Candidate Rendezvous Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494

Configure the IPv6 PIM Bootstrap Router Candidate Settings . . . . . . . . . . 495

Configure the IPv6 PIM Static Rendezvous Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496

Configure IPv6 MLD Global Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497

Configure the IPv6 MLD Routing Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498

View IPv6 MLD Routing Interface Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500

View the IPv6 MLD Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501

View IPv6 MLD Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503

Configure the IPv6 MLD Proxy Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504

View IPv6 MLD Proxy Interface Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506

View the IPv6 MLD Proxy Membership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507

Configure IPv6 Multicast Static Routes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508

Chapter 8 Configure Quality of Service

QoS Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511

Class of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511

Configure Global CoS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512

Map 802.1p Priorities to Queues. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513

Map DSCP Values to Queues. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514

Configure CoS Interface Settings for an Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515

Configure CoS Queue Settings for an Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517

Configure CoS Drop Precedence Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518

Differentiated Services Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520

DiffServ Wizard Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520

10


Use the DiffServ Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521

Configure Basic DiffServ Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522

Configure the Global DiffServ Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524

Configure a DiffServ Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526

Configure DiffServ IPv6 Class Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530

Configure DiffServ Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533

Configure the DiffServ Service Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536

View DiffServ Service Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537

Chapter 9 Manage Device Security

Management Security Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541

Configure Users. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541

Configure a User Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542

Enable Password Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544

Configure a Line Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544

RADIUS Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545

Configure Global RADIUS Server Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546

Configure a RADIUS Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548

Configure RADIUS Accounting Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550

TACACS Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552

Configure Global TACACS Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553

Configure TACACS Server Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554

Configure a Login Authentication List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555

Configure an Enable Authentication List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556

Configure the Dot1x Authentication List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558

Configure an HTTP Authentication List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559

Configure an HTTPS Authentication List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560

View Login Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561

Configure Management Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562

Configure HTTP Server Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562

HTTPS Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564

Manage Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566

Download Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567

Configure SSH Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568

Manage Host Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571

Download Host Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572

Configure Telnet Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574

Configure the Telnet Authentication List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574

Configure the Console Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577

Configure Denial of Service Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578

Configure an Access Control Profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581

Configure Access Rule Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582

Port Authentication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584

Configure Global 802.1X Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584

Configure 802.1X Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586

Configure Port Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587

View the Port Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590

View the Client Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593

11


Traffic Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594

Configure MAC Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594

MAC Filter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596

Port Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597

Configure the Global Port Security Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597

Configure a Port Security Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598

Convert Learned MAC Addresses to Static Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600

Configure a Static MAC Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601

Configure a Private Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602

Configure Private Group Membership. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603

Configure Protected Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604

Configure a Private VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605

Configure Private VLAN Association Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606

Configure the Private VLAN Port Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607

Configure a Private VLAN Host Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608

Configure a Private VLAN Promiscuous Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610

Storm Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611

Configure Global Storm Control Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611

Configure a Storm Control Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612

DHCP Snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614

Configure DHCP Snooping Global Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614

Configure a DHCP Snooping Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615

Configure DHCP Snooping Binding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616

Configure Snooping Persistent Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618

View DHCP Snooping Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619

Configure an IP Source Guard Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620

Configure IP Source Guard Binding Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621

Configure IPv6 Source Guard Interface Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623

Configure IPv6 Source Guard Binding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624

Configure Dynamic ARP Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625

Configure a DAI VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626

Configure the DAI Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628

Configure a DAI ACL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629

Configure a DAI ACL Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630

View DAI Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631

Captive Portal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632

Configure Captive Portal Global Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632

Add a Captive Portal Instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635

Configure CP Binding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638

View the Captive Portal Binding Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639

Configure a Captive Portal Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640

Configure Captive Portal User Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641

Configure the Captive Portal Trap Flag Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643

View the Captive Portal Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644

Configure Access Control Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645

Use the ACL Wizard to Create a Simple ACL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645

Configure an ACL Based on Destination MAC Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647

Use the ACL Wizard to Complete the Destination MAC ACL . . . . . . . . . . . . 649

12


Configure a Basic MAC ACL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649

Configure MAC ACL Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651

Configure MAC Binding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654

View or Delete MAC ACL Bindings in the MAC Binding Table . . . . . . . . . . . 655

Configure an IP ACL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656

Configure Rules for an IP ACL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658

Configure Rules for an Extended IP ACL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660

Configure IPv6 ACL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665

Configure IPv6 Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667

Configure IP ACL Interface Bindings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671

View or Delete IP ACL Bindings in the IP ACL Binding Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673

View or Delete VLAN ACL Bindings in the VLAN Binding Table . . . . . . . . . . 674

Chapter 10 Monitor the System

View Port Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677

View Detailed Port Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678

View EAP Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685

Perform a Cable Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687

Manage Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688

View Buffered Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688

Configure Buffered Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689

Message Log Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690

Enable or Disable the Command Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690

Enable or Disable Console Logging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691

Configure Syslog Host Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692

View the Trap Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694

View the Event Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695

Configure Persistent Logs (M5300 and M7100 only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697

Format of the Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698

Configure Multiple Port Mirroring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699

Configure RSPAN VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701

Configure an RSPAN Source Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702

Configure the RSPAN Destination Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704

Configure sFlow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 705

Configure Basic sFlow Agent Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 705

Configure sFlow Agent Advanced Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707

Configure an sFlow Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708

Configure the sFlow Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710

Chapter 11 Maintenance

Save the Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713

Configure Auto Save Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713

Reboot the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714

Power Cycle the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715

Reset the Switch to Its Factory Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716

Reset All User Passwords to Their Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717

Upload a File from the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718

13


Upload a File to the TFTP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718

HTTP File Upload. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720

Upload a File from the Switch to a USB Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721

Download a File to the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722

Download a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723

Download a File to the Switch Using HTTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725

Download a File from a USB Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727

File Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728

Copy an Image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 729

Configure Dual Image Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 729

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 731

Ping IPv4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 731

Ping IPv6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733

Traceroute IPv4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 734

Traceroute IPv6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737

Perform a Full Memory Dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739

Appendix A Default Settings

Appendix B Configuration Examples

Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745

VLAN Configuration Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746

Access Control Lists (ACLs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 747

MAC ACL Sample Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 747

Standard IP ACL Sample Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 748

Differentiated Services (DiffServ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 749

Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750

DiffServ Traffic Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750

Creating Policies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751

DiffServ Example Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 752

802.1X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753

802.1X Example Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755

MSTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756

MSTP Example Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758

Appendix C Acronyms and Abbreviations

14

1.

Getting Started

This chapter provides an overview of starting your NETGEAR M6100/M7100/M5300 and accessing the user interface. This chapter contains the following sections:

•

Available Publications and Online Help

•

Register Your Product

•

Understanding the User Interfaces

•

Web Management Interface Overview

•

Use a Web Browser to Access the Switch and Log In

•

Using SNMP

Note: For more information about the topics covered in this manual, visit the support website at

support.netgear.com

.

1

Note: Firmware updates with new features and bug fixes are made available from time to time at

downloadcenter.netgear.com

. Some products can regularly check the site and download new firmware, or you can check for and download new firmware manually. If the features or behavior of your product does not match what is described in this guide, you might need to update your firmware.

15


Available Publications and Online Help

A number of publications are available for your managed switch at

downloadcenter.netgear.com

, including the following publications:

•

M6100/M7100/M5300 Chassis Hardware Installation Guide.

•

M6100/M7100/M5300 Switch Module Installation Guide.

•

M6100/M7100/M5300 Software Setup Manual.

•

M6100/M7100/M5300 User Manual

(this document). You can also access this document online when you are logged in to the switch. Select Help  Online Help > User Guide .

•

M6100/M7100/M5300 Command Line Interface Manual.

Refer to the

M6100/M7100/M5300 Command Line Interface Manual

for information about the command structure. This provides information about the CLI commands used to configure the switch. It provides CLI descriptions, syntax, and default values.

•

M6100/M7100/M5300 Software Administration Manual.

When you log into the web management interface, online help is available. See

Online Help

on page 19.

Register Your Product

The first time you log in to the switch, you are given the option of registering with NETGEAR.

Registration confirms that your email alerts work, lowers technical support resolution time, and ensures that your shipping address accuracy. NETGEARE would also like to incorporate your feedback into future product development. NETGEAR never sells or rents your email address and you can opt out of communications at any time.

To register with NETGEAR when you are prompted, click the REGISTER NOW button.

Understanding the User Interfaces

The managed switch software includes a set of comprehensive management functions for configuring and monitoring the system by using one of the following methods:

• Web user interface

• Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)

• Command-line interface (CLI)

Each of the standards-based management methods allows you to configure and monitor the components of the managed switch software. The method you use to manage the system depends on your network size and requirements, and on your preference.

The

M6100, M5300, and M7100 Series Managed Switch User Manual

(this book) describes how to use the web-based interface to manage and monitor the system.

Getting Started

16


Web Management Interface Overview

Your managed switch contains an embedded web server and management software for managing and monitoring switch functions. The managed switch functions as a simple switch without the management software. However, you can use the management software to configure more advanced features that can improve switch efficiency and overall network performance.

Web-based management lets you monitor, configure, and control your switch remotely using a standard web browser instead of using expensive and complicated SNMP software products. From your web browser, you can monitor the performance of your switch and optimize its configuration for your network. You can configure all switch features, such as

VLANs, QoS, and ACLs, by using the web-based management interface.

Software Requirements to Use the Web Interface

To access the switch by using a web browser, the browser must meet the following software requirements:

• HTML version 4.0, or later

•

HTTP version 1.1, or later

• Java Runtime Environment 1.6 or later

Use a Web Browser to Access the Switch and Log In

You can use a web browser to access the switch and log in. You must be able to ping the IP address of the managed switch management interface from your administrative system for web access to be available.

 To use browser-based access to log in to the switch:

1. Prepare your computer with a static IP address in the 169.254.100.0 subnet, for example, 169.254.100.201.

2.

Connect an Ethernet cable from an Ethernet port on your computer to an Ethernet port on the switch.

3. Launch a web browser.

4.

Enter the IP address of the switch in the web browser address field.

The default IP address of the switch is 169.254.100.100.

The Login screen displays.

5. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin

and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.

6. Click the Login button.

Getting Started

17


The web management interface menu displays.

Web Interface Buttons and User-Defined Fields

The following table shows the command buttons that are used throughout the screens in the web interface:

Table 1. Web interface command buttons

Button

Add

Apply

Cancel

Delete

Update

Logout

Function

Clicking the

Add

button adds the new item configured in the heading row of a table.

Clicking the

Apply button sends the updated configuration to the switch. Configuration changes take effect immediately.

Clicking the Cancel button cancels the configuration on the screen and resets the data on the screen to the previous values of the switch.

Clicking the

Delete button removes the selected item.

Clicking the

Update

button refreshes the screen with the latest information from the device.

Clicking the Logout button ends the session.

User-defined fields can contain 1 to 159 characters, unless otherwise noted on the configuration web screen. All characters can be used except for the following (unless specifically noted in for that feature):

*

?

/

\

User-Defined Field Invalid Characters

|

<

>

Interface Naming Conventions

The managed switch supports physical and logical interfaces. Interfaces are identified by their type and the interface number. The physical ports are gigabit interfaces and are numbered on the front panel. You configure the logical interfaces by using the software.

Getting Started

18


The following table describes the naming convention for all interfaces available on the switch.

Table 2. Naming conventions for interfaces

Interface

Physical

Link aggregation group (LAG)

CPU management interface

Routing VLAN interfaces

Description Example

The physical ports are Gigabit

Ethernet interfaces and are numbered sequentially starting from one.

LAG interfaces are logical interfaces that are used only for bridging functions.

0/1, 0/2, 0/3, and so on

LAG 1, LAG 2, lAG 3, and so on

This is the internal switch interface responsible for the switch base

MAC address. This interface is not configurable and is always listed in the MAC Address Table.

5/1

This is an interface used for routing functionality.

VLAN 1, VLAN 2, VLAN 3, and so on

Online Help

When you log in to the switch, every screen contains a link to the online help that contains information to assist in configuring and managing the switch. The online help screens are context sensitive. For example, if the IP Addressing screen is open, the help topic for that screen displays if you click the Help button.

You can connect to the online support site at netgear.com when you are logged in to the switch.

 To access the online support link:


2.



4.









Getting Started

19


7. Select Help  Online Help > Support .

To connect to the NETGEAR support site for managed switch, click the APPLY button.

Web Management Interface Device View

The Device View is a Java

®

applet that displays the ports on the switch. This graphic provides an alternate way to navigate to configuration and monitoring options. The graphic also provides information about device ports, current configuration and status, tables, and feature components.

 To use Device View:


2. Connect an Ethernet cable from an Ethernet port on your computer to an Ethernet port on the switch.


4. Enter the IP address of the switch in the web browser address field.




The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.



7. Select System  Device View .

The port coloring indicates whether a port is currently active. Green indicates that the port is enabled; red indicates that an error occurred on the port, or that the link is disabled.

Getting Started

20


8. Click a port to see a menu that displays statistics and configuration options.

You can click a menu option to access the screen that contains the configuration or monitoring options.

If you click the graphic, but do not click a specific port, the main menu displays. This menu contains the same options as the navigation tabs at the top of the screen.

Using SNMP

The managed switch software supports the configuration of SNMP groups and users that can manage traps that the SNMP agent generates.

The managed switch use both standard public MIBs for standard functionality and private

MIBs that support additional switch functionality. All private MIBs begin with a “-” prefix. The main object for interface configuration is in -SWITCHING-MIB, which is a private MIB. Some interface configurations also involve objects in the public MIB, IF-MIB.

SNMP is enabled by default. The System Information screen, which is the screen that displays when you log in, displays the information that you need to configure an SNMP manager to access the switch.

Any user can connect to the switch using the SNMP v3 protocol, but for authentication and encryption, the switch supports only one user, which is admin ; therefore, only one profile can be created or modified.

 To configure authentication and encryption settings for the SNMP v3 admin profile:







Getting Started

21






7. Select System  SNMP  SNMP v3  User Configuration .

The User Configuration screen displays.

8. To enable authentication, select an Authentication Protocol option, which is either MD5 or

SHA .

9. To enable encryption, select the DES option in the Encryption Protocol list Then enter an encryption code of eight or more alphanumeric characters in the Encryption Key field.

10. Click the APPLY button.

Your settings are saved.

To access configuration information for SNMP V1 or SNMP V2, select System  SNMP 

SNMPv1/v2 and select the screen that contains the information to configure.

Getting Started

22

2.

Configure System Information

This chapter covers the following topics:

•

Initial Setup

•

Licenses (M5300 only)

•

Configure DHCP Server Settings

•

Configure Basic PoE

•

Configure SNMP

•

LLDP Overview

•

Configure ISDP

•

Timer Schedule

2

23


Initial Setup

When you log in to a switch that has its factory settings, the Initial Setup screen displays.

 To do the initial system configuration:











7. Select System > Management > Initial Setup .

8. Enter the new password for the Admin account in the Admin Password field.

The new password does not display as you type it; only dots are shown to hide the entry.

The password is from 8 to 64 alphanumeric characters in length and is case-sensitive.

9. In the Enable Password field, enter the new password for the enable mode in the command-line interface.

The new password does not display as you type it; only dots are shown to hide the entry.

The password is from 8 to 64 alphanumeric characters in length and is case-sensitive.


24


10. In the System Name field, type the name to identify this switch.

You can use a name up to 255 characters in length. The factory default is blank.

11.

In the

System Location

field, type the location of the switch.

You can use a location up to 255 characters in length. The factory default is blank.

12. Enter the System Contact , the name of the contact person for this switch.

You can use a contact name up to 255 characters in length. The factory default is blank.

13.

In the

SNTP mode

field, select

Enable

or

Disable

.

This specifies the state of the SNTP client. The default value is Disable, and the local clock is used to get the time value.

14.

Specify the address of the

SNTP Server

.

Enter a text string of up to 64 characters containing the host name of an SNTP server.

The server address can be IPv4, IPv6, or a host name. The host name resolves into an IP address each time an SNTP request is sent to it.

15. In the Designated Source Interface list, select Management VLAN or Service Port .

This is the source interface that is used for SNMP trap, syslog, DNS, TACACS+,

RADIUS, sflow, and SNTP applications. By default, Management VLAN is used as the source interface.

Note:

If you select Management VLAN as the source interface, the routing mode for the selected VLAN must be enabled.

16. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect immediately.

Configure a Management VLAN

 To do the initial Management VLAN configuration:

1.

Prepare your computer with a static IP address in the 169.254.100.0 subnet, for example, 169.254.100.201.


3.

Launch a web browser.




5.

Enter the user name and password.


25





7. Select System > Management > Initial Setup .

The Initial Setup screen displays

8. Scroll down to display the Management VLAN Configuration section.

9. Specify the Management VLAN ID of the switch.

The management VLAN is used for management of the switch. The VLAN ID can be any value from 1 to 4093.

10. Select the Routing Mode Enable or Disable radio button.

The default is Enable.

11.

Select the IPv4 Address Assignment

DHCP

or

Static

radio button.

This specifies the method for getting IPv4 network parameters (IPv4 address and network mask) for the configured management VLAN interface. The default value for VLAN1 is

Static.

12. In the IP Address field, specify the IP address of the management VLAN interface. The factory default value is 169.254.100.100.

13.

In the

Subnet Mask

field, specify the IP subnet mask for the management VLAN interface.

This is also referred to as the subnet/network mask and defines the portion of the interface’s IP address that is used to identify the attached network. The factory default value is 255.255.0.0.

14. In the Gateway field, specify the default gateway for the management VLAN interface.

The default value is 0.0.0.0.

15.

Select an

IPv6 Address Assignment radio button.

This specifies the method for getting IPv6 network parameters (IPv6 prefix and prefix length) for the configured management VLAN interface. The possible options are

DHCPv6 , Auto Config , or Static . The default value for VLAN1 is Auto Config.

16. In the IPv6 Prefix and Prefix Length field, specify the prefix length for the management

VLAN interface.


26


When Auto Config is selected, the appropriate IPv6 prefix and prefix length is displayed in this field.

17.

In the IPv6

Gateway field, specify the default IPv6 gateway for the management VLAN interface.



Configure the Initial Service Port Settings

 To do the initial service port configuration:

1.



3.





5.



6.

Click the

Login

button.


7. Click System > Management > Initial Setup .

The Initial Setup screen displays.

8.

Scroll down to the bottom of the screen to display the Service Port Configuration section.

9.

Select an

IPv4 Address Assignment radio button.

This specifies the method for getting IPv4 network parameters (IPv4 address and network mask) for the service port. Possible options are

DHCP, BootP, or

Static

. The default value is Static.

10. Specify the IP Address for the service port.


27


The factory default value is 169.254.101.100.

11. Specify the Subnet Mask for the service port.

This is also referred to as the subnet/network mask and defines the portion of the interface’s IP address that is used to identify the attached network. The factory default value is 255.255.255.0.

12. Specify the default Gateway for the service port.


13. In the IPv6 Address Assignment field, select the method for getting IPv6 network parameters (IPv6 prefix and prefix length) for the configured service port.

Possible options are DHCPv6 , Auto Config , or Static . The default value is Auto Config.

14. Specify the IPv6 Prefix and Prefix Length for the service port.

When Auto Config is selected, the appropriate IPv6 prefix and prefix length are displayed in this field.

15. Specify the default IPv6 Gateway for the service port.



View or Define System Information

When you log in, the System Information screen displays. You can configure and view general device information.

 To view or define system information:












28


7. Select System > Management > System Information .

8. Define the following fields:

• System Name . Enter the name to identify this switch. You can use up to 255 alphanumeric characters. The factory default is blank.

• System Location . Enter the location of this switch. You can use up to 255 alphanumeric characters. The factory default is blank.

• System Contact . Enter the contact person for this switch. You can use up to 255 alphanumeric characters. The factory default is blank.

• Login Timeout. Specify how many minutes of inactivity can occur on a serial port connection before the switch closes the connection. Enter a number between 0 and

160 minutes. The factory default is 5. Entering 0 disables the time-out.

• Management Interface . Select the management interface that is used as source interface for SNMP trap, syslog, DNS, TACACS+, RADIUS, sflow, and SNTP applications. Possible values are as follows:

Routing Interface

Routing VLAN

Routing Loopback Interface

Service Port

Different . For some application from the list, the source interface is configured separately. They display in the list only if this is the case.


29


By default VLAN 1 is used as the source interface.


The updated configuration is sent to the switch and takes effect immediately. These changes are not retained across a power cycle unless a save is performed.

The following table describes the status information the System Information screen displays.

Table 3. System Information

Field

Product Name

Description

The product name of this switch.

IPv4 Management VLAN Interface The IPv4 address and mask assigned to the management VLAN interface.

IPv6 Management VLAN Interface The IPv6 prefix and prefix length assigned to the management VLAN interface.

Management VLAN ID The management VLAN ID of the switch. Click the displayed

Management VLAN ID value to jump to the configuration screen.

The IPv4 address and mask assigned to the service port interface.

IPv4 Service Port Network

Interface

IPv6 Service Port Network

Interface

The IPv6 prefix and prefix length assigned to the service port interface.

IPv4 Loopback Interface

IPv6 Loopback Interface

System Date

System Up time

The IPv4 address and mask assigned to the loopback interface.

The IPv6 prefix and prefix length assigned to the loopback interface.

The current date.

The time in days, hours, and minutes since the last switch reboot.

Current SNTP Sync Status

System SNMP OID

System Mac Address

Service Port MAC Address

L2 MAC Address

The current SNTP sync status.

The base object ID for the switch's enterprise MIB.

Universally assigned network address.

The MAC address used for out-of-band connectivity.

L3 MAC Address

The MAC address used for communications on the Layer 2 network segment.

The MAC address used for communications on the Layer 3 network segment.

Supported Java Plugin Version The supported version of Java plug-in.

Current SNTP Synchronized Time The SNTP synchronized time.


30


View Backplane Information

 To view backplane information:


2.



4.









7.

Select

System

>

Management > System Information > Backplane Information

.

The following table describes the information displayed.

Table 4. Backplane Information

Field

Model Identifier

FPGA Version

Serial Number

Description

The model identifier

The FPGA version

The serial number


31


View the Temperature Sensor Information

You can view the current temperature of the temperature sensors. The temperature is instant and can be updated with the latest information on the switch when the Update button is clicked. The maximum temperature of the temperature sensors depends on the actual hardware.

 To view temperature information:











7. Select System > Management > System Information > Temperature Sensors .

To refresh the screen, click the Update button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable Temperature Status information.

Table 5. Temperature Status information

Field

Unit ID

Temp (C)

State

Shutdown Temp (C)

Description

The unit number in the chassis.

The temperature of the specified unit in degrees Centigrade.

The unit temperature state.

The shutdown temperature value. Once the blade exceeds this limit, the chassis shuts down the the power for this blade.


32


View the Fan Status

This screen shows the status of the fans in all units. These fans remove the heat generated by the power, CP,U and other chipsets, and allow the chipsets work normally.

 To view the fan status:


2.



4.









7.

Select

Management > System Information > Fan Status

.

Fan status has three possible values:

OK

,

Failure

, and

Not Present

.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable Fan Status information.

To refresh the screen, click the

Update

button.

Table 6. Fan Status

Field

Fan

Type

Speed

Duty Level

State

Description

The fan index used to identify the fan for the given chassis member.

Specifies whether the fan module is fixed or removable.

The fan speed.

The duty level of the fan.

Specifies whether the fan is running or stopped.


33


View the Device Status

 To view the device status:











7. Select Management > System Information > Device Status .


The following table describes the nonconfigurable Device Status information.

Table 7. Device Status

Field

Unit ID

Firmware Version

Description

The unit number in the chassis.

The release.version.maintenance number of the code currently running on the switch. For example, if the release was 1, the version was 2, and the maintenance number was 4, the format would be 1.2.4.


34


Table 7. Device Status (continued)

Field

Boot Version

CPLD Version

Serial Number

Internal AC-1, Internal AC-2, and so on

EPS Power Modules

PoE Version

MAX PoE

Description

The version of the boot code that is in the flash memory to load the firmware into the memory.

The version of the software for CPLD.

The serial number of this switch.

Indicates the status of the appropriate power module in each unit.

Status can be any of the following:

• Operational . Power module is present and functioning properly.

• Powering

. Main power is failed or disconnected but RPS provides power to the switch.

• Not Present

. Power module is not present in the slot.

• Not powered . Power module is present but not connected to the power source.

• Not powering . Power module is present and connected but the switch uses another power source.

• Incompatible . Power module is present but incompatible.

• Failed

. Power module is present, but power cable is not plugged in or a bad cable is plugged in.

Indicates the status of the appropriate power module in each unit.

Status can be any of the following:

• Operational . Power module is present and functioning properly.

• Powering

. Main power is failed or disconnected but RPS provides power to the switch.

• Not Present

. Power module is not present in the slot.

• Not powered . Power module is present but not connected to the power source.

• Not powering . Power module is present and connected but the switch uses another power source.

• Incompatible . Power module is present but incompatible.

• Failed

. Power module is present, but power cable is not plugged in or a bad cable is plugged in.

Version of the PoE controller FW image.

N/A

indicates that the Poe is not supported by the unit.

Indicates the status of maximum PoE power available on the switch as follows:

• ON

. Indicates less than 10W of PoE power available for another device.

• OFF

. Indicates at least 10W of PoE power available for another device.

• N/A

. Indicates that PoE is not supported by the unit.


35


Table 7. Device Status (continued)

Field

PoE D-Card Type

Description

Indicates the type of the PoE daughter card plugged in. Possible values are as follows:

• XCM89P . PoE card supporting 802.3at standard (backward compatible with 802.3af).

• XCM89UP . PoE card supporting UPOE pre-standard (backward compatible with 802.3af/802.3at).

• Not Installed . PoE card is not plugged in.

View the System CPU Status

 To view the system CPU status:











7. Select System > Management > System CPU Status .


36


8. You can view the CPU Utilization information, which contains the memory information, task-related information, and percentage of CPU utilization per task.

• Select the Unit No.

to display the CPU Utilization information.

• Select All to display the CPU Utilization information for all units in a chassis.

The following table describes CPU Memory Status information.

Table 8. CPU Memory Status information

Field

Total System Memory

Available Memory

Description

The total memory of the switch in KBytes.

The available memory space for the switch in KBytes.

Configure the CPU Thresholds

The CPU Utilization Threshold notification feature allows you to configure thresholds that, when crossed, trigger a notification. The notification is done through SNMP trap and syslog messages.

 To configure the CPU thresholds:





37









7. Select System > Management > System CPU Status > CPU Threshold .

8. Configure the Rising Threshold value.

Notification is generated when the total CPU utilization exceeds this threshold value over the configured time period. The range is 1 to 100.

9. Configure the Rising Interval value.

This utilization monitoring time period can be configured from 5 to 86400 seconds in multiples of 5 seconds.

10. Configure the Falling Threshold .

Notification is triggered when the total CPU utilization falls below this level for a configured period of time.

The falling utilization threshold must be equal to or less than the rising threshold value.

The falling utilization threshold notification is made only if a rising threshold notification was done previously. Configuring the falling utilization threshold and time period is optional. If the Falling CPU utilization parameters are not configured, then it takes the same value as Rising CPU utilization parameters. The range is 1 to 100.

11. Configure the Falling Interval .

The utilization monitoring time period can be configured from 5 seconds to 86400 seconds in multiples of 5 seconds.

12. Configure the CPU Free Memory Threshold value in KB.



38


View Switch Statistics

 To view the switch statistics:


2.



4.









7.

Select

System > Management > Switch Statistics

.


39


To clear all the counters, resetting all switch summary and detailed statistics to default values, click the Clear button. The discarded packets count cannot be cleared.

The following table describes Switch Statistics information.

Table 9. Switch Statistics information

Field ifIndex

Octets Received

Packets Received Without Errors

Unicast Packets Received

Multicast Packets Received

Broadcast Packets Received

Receive Packets Discarded

Octets Transmitted

Packets Transmitted Without Errors

Unicast Packets Transmitted

Multicast Packets Transmitted

Broadcast Packets Transmitted

Transmit Packets Discarded

Most Address Entries Ever Used

Description

The ifIndex of the interface table entry associated with the processor of this switch.

The total number of octets of data received by the processor (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).

The total number of packets (including broadcast packets and multicast packets) received by the processor.

The number of subnetwork-unicast packets delivered to a higher-layer protocol.

The total number of packets received that were directed to a multicast address. This number does not include packets directed to the broadcast address.

The total number of packets received that were directed to the broadcast address. This does not include multicast packets.

The number of inbound packets that were discarded even though no errors were detected to prevent their being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol. A possible reason for discarding a packet could be to free up buffer space.

The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including framing characters.

The total number of packets transmitted out of the interface.

The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested that are transmitted to a subnetwork-unicast address, including those that were discarded or not sent.

The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested that are transmitted to a multicast address, including those that were discarded or not sent.

The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested that are transmitted to the broadcast address, including those that were discarded or not sent.

The number of outbound packets that were discarded even though no errors were detected to prevent their being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol. A possible reason for discarding a packet could be to free up buffer space.

The highest number of Forwarding Database Address Table entries learned by this switch since the most recent reboot.


40


Table 9. Switch Statistics information (continued)

Field

Address Entries in Use

Maximum VLAN Entries

Most VLAN Entries Ever Used

Static VLAN Entries

Dynamic VLAN Entries

VLAN Deletes

Time Since Counters Last Cleared

Description

The number of learned and static entries in the Forwarding Database

Address Table for this switch.

The maximum number of virtual LANs (VLANs) allowed on this switch.

The largest number of VLANs that were active on this switch since the last reboot.

The number of presently active VLAN entries on this switch that were created statically.

The number of presently active VLAN entries on this switch that were created by GVRP registration.

The number of VLANs on this switch that were created and then deleted since the last reboot.

The elapsed time, in days, hours, minutes, and seconds, since the statistics for this switch were last cleared.

View USB Device Information

 To display the USB device information:


2.



4.










41


7. Select System > Management > USB Device Information .

The Device Status field displays the current status of the device. The status is one of the following:

• Active

. The device is USB plugged in and recognized by the switch.

• Inactive . The device is not mounted.

• Invalid

. The device is not present or an invalid device is plugged in.


Update

button.

The following table describes the USB Memory Statistics information.

Table 10. USB Memory Statistics information

Field

Total Size

Bytes Used

Bytes Free

Description

The USB flash device storage size in bytes.

The size of memory used on the USB flash device.

The size of memory free on the USB flash device.

The following table describes the USB Directory Details information.

Table 11. USB Directory Details information

Field

File Name

File Size

Modification Time

Description

The name of the file stored in the USB flash drive.

The size of the file stored in the USB flash drive in bytes

The last modification time of the file stored in the USB flash drive.


42


View Slot Information (M5300 only)

You can view information about the cards installed in the switch’s slots. This screen also provides information about the cards and switches that are compatible with the device.

 To view slot information:


2.



4.









7.

Select

System

>

Management

>

Slot Information

.


43


The following table describes information in the Slot Summary table.

Table 12. Slot Summary table

Field

Slot

Status

Administrative State

Power State

Configured Card Model ID

Configured Card Description

Inserted Card Model ID

Inserted Card Description

Card Power Down

Card Pluggable

Description

The slot number.

Indicates whether the slot is empty or full.

Indicates whether the slot is administratively enabled or disabled.

Indicates whether the device is providing power to the slot.

The model ID of the card configured for the slot.

The description of the card configured for the slot

The model ID of the card plugged into the slot.

The description of the card plugged into the slot.

If the value is True, the power state can be administratively enabled or disabled. If the value is False, the power state cannot be configured.

If the value is True, the card can be administratively enabled or disabled. If the value is False, the administrative state cannot be configured.

The following table describes information in the Supported Card table.

Table 13. Supported Card table

Field

Card Model

Card Index

Card Type

Card Descriptor

Description

The model ID of the supported card.

The index assigned to the card type.

The hardware type of the supported card, which is assigned by the manufacturer.

Description of the supported card, which includes the manufacturer's product number and information about number and speed of the supported interfaces.

The following table describes information in the Supported Switch table. When preconfiguring a new stack member, the switch index identifies the type of switch that is being added to the stack.


44


Table 14. Supported Switch

Field

Switch Model ID

Switch Index

Management Preference

Description

The model number of the supported switch.

The index assigned to the supported switch.

The management preference of the supported switch.

Configure a Loopback Interface

You can create, configure, and remove loopback interfaces.

 To configure a loopback interface:


2.



4.









7.

Select

System

>

Management

>

Loopback Interface

.

8. Use the Loopback Interface Type list to select IPv4 or IPv6 loopback interface.


45


9. In the Loopback ID list, select a list of currently configured loopback interfaces.

10. In the Primary Address field, enter the primary address for this interface in dotted-decimal notation.

This option is visible when IPv4 loopback is selected.

11. In the Primary Mask field, enter the primary IPv4 subnet mask in dotted-decimal notation.


12. In the Secondary IP Address field, enter the secondary IP address in dotted-decimal notation.

This input field is visible only when Add Secondary is selected. This option is visible when IPv4 loopback is selected.

13. In the Secondary Subnet Mask field, enter the secondary subnet mask for this interface in dotted-decimal notation.

This input field is visible only when Add Secondary is selected. This option is visible when IPv4 loopback is selected.

14. In the IPv6 mode field, enable IPv6 on this interface using the IPv6 address.

This option is configurable before you specify an explicit IPv6 address. This option is visible when IPv6 loopback is selected.

15. Use the IPv6 Address field to enter the IPv6 address in the format prefix/length.


16. Use the EUI64 field to optionally specify the 64-bit extended unique identifier (EUI-64).


View the IPv6 Network Interface Neighbor Table

 To view the IPv6 Network Neighbor Table:











46



7. Select System > Management > Management Interfaces > IPv6 Network Interface

Neighbor Table .

The following table displays IPv6 Network Interface Neighbor Table information.

Table 15. IPv6 Network Interface Neighbor Table information

Field

IPv6 address

MAC address

IsRtr

Neighbor State

Last Updated

Description

The IPv6 address of a neighbor switch visible to the network interface.

The MAC address of a neighbor switch.

true (1) if the neighbor machine is a router, false (2) otherwise.

The state of the neighboring switch:

• reachable (1)

. The neighbor is reachable by this switch.

• stale (2) . Information about the neighbor is scheduled for deletion.

• delay (3)

. No information was received from neighbor during delay period.

• probe (4)

. The switch is attempting to probe for this neighbor.

• unknown (6) . Unknown status.

The last sysUpTime that this neighbor was updated.

Configure the IPv4 Service Port

You can configure network information on the IPv4 service port. The service port is a dedicated Ethernet port for out-of-band management of the device. Traffic on this port is segregated from operational network traffic on the switch ports and cannot be switched or routed to the operational network.

 To configure the IPv4 service port:








47






7. Select System > Management > Management Interfaces > IPv4 Service Port

Configuration .

8. Select a Service Port Configuration Protocol radio button:

• BootP . During the next boot cycle, the BootP client on the device broadcasts a BootP request in an attempt to acquire information from a BootP server on the network.

• DHCP . During the next boot cycle, the DHCP client on the device broadcasts a DHCP request in an attempt to acquire information from a DHCP server on the network.

• None . The device does not attempt to acquire network information dynamically.

• This specifies how the device acquires network information on the service port.

9. In the IP Address field, specify the IP address of the interface.

• If the service port configuration protocol is None , you can manually configure a static

IP address.

• If the service port configuration protocol is BootP or DHCP , this field displays the IP address that was dynamically acquired (if any).

10. In the Subnet Mask field, specify the IP subnet mask for the interface:

• If the service port configuration protocol is None , you can manually configure a static subnet mask.

• If the service port configuration protocol is BootP or DHCP , this field displays the subnet mask that was dynamically acquired (if any).

11. In the Default Gateway field, specify the default gateway for the IP interface:

• If the Service Port Configuration Protocol is None , you can manually configure the IP address of the default gateway.


48


• If the Service Port Configuration Protocol is BootP or DHCP , this field displays the default gateway address that was dynamically acquired (if any).

12.

Click the

Apply

button.



Update

button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields on the Service Port Configuration screen.

Table 16. IPv4 Service Port Configuration

Field

Burned-in MAC Address

Interface Status

DHCP Client Identifier

Description

The burned-in MAC address used for out-of-band connectivity.

Indicates whether the link status is up or down.

The identification code assigned to the client on a network. The DHCP server uses this code to identify this device.

Configure the IPv6 Service Port

You can configure IPv6 network information on the service port. The service port is a dedicated Ethernet port for out-of-band management of the device. Traffic on this port is segregated from operational network traffic on the switch ports and cannot be switched or routed to the operational network.

 To configure the IPv6 service port:


2.



4.









7.

Select

System > Management > Management Interfaces > IPv6 Service Port

Configuration

.


49


8. Select the IPv6 mode Enable or Disable radio button.

This specifies the IPv6 administrative mode on the service port.

9. Select the Service Port Configuration Protocol None or DHCP radio button.

This specifies whether the device acquires network information from a DHCPv6 server.

Selecting None disables the DHCPv6 client on the service port.

10. Select the IPv6 Stateless Address AutoConfig mode Enable or Disable radio button:

• Enable . The service port can acquire an IPv6 address through IPv6 Neighbor

Discovery Protocol (NDP) and through the use of router advertisement messages.

• Disable . The service port does not use the native IPv6 address autoconfiguration feature to acquire an IPv6 address.

This sets the IPv6 stateless address autoconfiguration mode on the service port.

11. The DHCPv6 Client DUID field displays the client identifier used by the DHCPv6 client (if enabled) when sending messages to the DHCPv6 server.

12. To configure the IPv6 gateway, select the Change IPv6 Gateway check box.

The IPv6 gateway is the default gateway for the IPv6 service port interface.

13. Use the IPv6 Gateway field to specify the default gateway for the IPv6 service port interface.

The Add/Delete IPv6 Address table lists the manually configured static IPv6 addresses on the service port interface.

14. Specify the following: a.

In the IPv6 Address field, specify the IPv6 address to add or remove from the service port interface.


50

M6100, M5300, and M7100 Series Managed Switches b. Select the EUI Flag option to enable the Extended Universal Identifier (EUI) flag for

IPv6 address, or clear the option to omit the flag.

15.

Click the

Add

button.

The IPv6 address is added to the service port interface,

16. To delete the selected IPv6 address, click the Delete button.

17.

Click the

Apply

button.



Update

button.

IPv4 Management VLAN Overview

For you to manage the device by using the web-based configuration utility, the device management IP address must be defined and known. A management VLAN interface is created by default and it gets an IP address if a DHCP server is present. If it fails to get an IP address, a fallback address 169.254.100.100/255.255.0.0 is assigned to it. Management

VLAN is used as the default source interface for syslog, message log, and SNMP client, and so on The network interface is disabled by default.

The management VLAN is the logical interface used for in-band connectivity with the switch through any of the switch’s front panel ports. The configuration parameters associated with the switch’s management VLAN do not affect the configuration of the front panel ports through which traffic is switched or routed.

To access the switch over a network, you must first configure it with IP information (IP address, subnet mask). You can configure the IP information using any of the following:

•

DHCP

• Terminal interface through the EIA-232 port

After you establish in-band connectivity, you can change the IP information using any of the following:

•

Terminal interface through the EIA-232 port

• Terminal interface through Telnet

•

SNMP-based management

• Web-based management

Configure an IPv4 Management VLAN

 To configure an IPv4 Management VLAN:

1.



51











7. Select System > Management > Management Interfaces > IPv4 Management VLAN

Configuration .

8. From the VLAN ID list, select the VLAN.

This list displays all IDs of VLANs configured on this switch.

9. Select the Routing mode Enable or Disable radio button.

This specifies global routing on the device.

10. Select the Configuration Method DHCP or Manual radio button:

• DHCP . Transmit a DHCP request.

• Manual . Do nothing.

This specifies what the switch does on start-up.

11. Specify the IP Address of the interface.


52



12. Specify the IP Subnet Mask for the interface.


13.

Specify the

Management VLAN ID

of the switch.

The management VLAN is used for management of the switch. It can be configured to any value in the range of 1–4093.

14.

Click the

Apply

button.


The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields on the IPv4 Management VLAN

Configuration screen.

Table 17. IPv4 Management VLAN Configuration

Field

MAC Address

Routing Interface Status

Description

The MAC address assigned to the VLAN routing interface.


Configure an IPv6 Management VLAN

 To configure an IPv6 management VLAN:

1.



3.





5.



6.

Click the

Login

button.


7. Select System > Management > Management Interfaces > IPv6 Management VLAN

Configuration .


53


8. Select the Admin mode Disable or Enable radio button.

This enables or disables the administration mode for the management VLAN IPv6 interface on the switch.

9. Select the IPv6 Enable mode Enable or Disable radio button.

This specifies the IPv6 mode on the management VLAN.

10. Select the Address Autoconfigure mode Enable or Disable radio button.

Note: The Address Autoconfigure mode option is available only if unicast routing is globally disabled.

11. Select the Address DHCP mode Enable or Disable radio button.



The VLAN IP Interface Status field indicates whether the link is up or down.

Configure an IPv6 VLAN Interface

 To configure an IPv6 VLAN interface:




54



4.









7.

Select

System > Management > Management Interfaces > IPv6 Management VLAN

Configuration

.

8. In the IPv6 Prefix/Prefix Length field, specify the IPv6 address to add or remove from the management VLAN interface.

9. Select the EUI46 option to True (enabled) for the Extended Universal Identifier (EUI) flag for an IPv6 address.

10. Click the Add button.

The IPv6 address is added to the management VLAN,

11. To delete a selected IPv6 address, click the Delete button.




55


The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields on the IPv6 Management VLAN

Interface Configuration screen.

Table 18. IPv4 Management VLAN Configuration

Field

State

Description

The interface address state. Possible values are as follows:

•

Auto

• DHCP

•

TENT (tentative)

Time

M6100/M7100/M5300 software supports the Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP). As its name suggests, it is a less complicated version of Network Time Protocol, which is a system for synchronizing the clocks of networked computer systems, primarily when data transfer is handled through the Internet.

Configure the Time Setting

 To configure the time setting:











7. Select System > Management > Time > Time Configuration .


56


8. Select the Clock Source Local or SNTP radio button.

The default is SNTP. The local clock can be set to SNTP only if the following two conditions are met:

• The SNTP server is configured.

• The SNTP last attempt status is successful.

9. In the Date field, specify the current date in months, days, and years.

10. In the Time field, specify the current time in hours, minutes, and seconds.




Configure the SNTP Global Settings

 To configure the SNTP global settings:











7. Select System > Management > Time > Time Configuration > SNTP Global

Configuration .

When you select the SNTP option as the Clock Source , the SNTP Global Configuration section is displayed below the Time Configuration section of the screen.


57


8. Select a Client mode radio button to specify the mode of operation of the SNTP client:

• Disable . SNTP is not operational. No SNTP requests are sent from the client and no received SNTP messages are processed.

• Unicast . SNTP operates in a point-to-point fashion. A unicast client sends a request to a designated server at its unicast address and expects a reply from which it can determine the time and, optionally, the round-trip delay and local clock offset relative to the server.

• Broadcast . SNTP operates in the same manner as multicast mode but uses a local broadcast address instead of a multicast address. The broadcast address has a single subnet scope while a multicast address has Internet wide scope.

The default value is Unicast.

9. In the Port field, specify the local UDP port that the SNTP client receives server packets on.

The allowed range is 1025 to 65535 and the value 123. The default value is 123. When the default value is configured, the actual client port value used in SNTP packets is assigned by the operating system.

10. Select the Source Interface to use for the SNTP client.

Possible values are as follows:

• None

• VLAN 1

• Routing interface

• Routing VLAN

• Routing loopback interface

• Tunnel interface

• Service port


58



11. Specify the Unicast Poll Interval .

This is the number of seconds between unicast poll requests expressed as a power of two when configured in unicast mode. The allowed range is 6 to 10. The default value is

6.

12.

Specify the

Broadcast Poll Interval

.

This is the number of seconds between broadcast poll requests expressed as a power of

2 when configured in broadcast mode. Broadcasts received prior to the expiry of this interval are discarded. The allowed range is 6 to 10. The default value is 6.

13. Specify the Unicast Poll Timeout .

This is the number of seconds to wait for an SNTP response when configured in unicast mode. The allowed range is 1 to 30. The default value is 5.

14. Specify the Unicast Poll Retry .

This is the number of times to retry a request to an SNTP server after the first time-out before attempting to use the next configured server when configured in unicast mode.

The allowed range is 0 to 10. The default value is 1.

15.

Use the

Time Zone Name

field to configure a time zone specifying the number of hours and, optionally, the number of minutes difference from UTC with

Offset Hours

and

Offset

Minutes

.

The time zone can affect the display of the current system time. The default value is UTC.

When using SNTP/NTP time servers to update the switch's clock, the time data received from the server is based on Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), which is the same as

Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This might not be the time zone in which the switch is located.

16. Use the Offset Hours field to specify the number of hours of difference from UTC.

The allowed range is –12 to 13. The default value is 0.

17.

Use the

Offset Minutes

field to specify the number of minutes of difference from UTC.

The allowed range is 0 to 59. The default value is 0.





59


View SNTP Global Status

When you select the SNTP option as the Clock Source , the SNTP global status is displayed below the SNTP Global Configuration section of the screen.

 To view SNTP global status:











7. Select System > Management > Time > Time Configuration > SNTP Global Status

When you select the SNTP option as the Clock Source , the SNTP Global Status is displayed below the SNTP Global Configuration section.


60


The following table displays the nonconfigurable SNTP Global Status information.

Table 19. SNTP Global Status

Field

Version

Supported mode

Last Update Time

Last Attempt Time

Last Attempt Status

Server IP Address

Address Type

Server Stratum

Reference Clock ID

Server mode

Unicast Server Max Entries

Unicast Server Current Entries

Broadcast Count

Description

The SNTP version that the client supports.

The SNTP modes that the client supports. Multiple modes can be supported by a client.

The local date and time (UTC) that the SNTP client last updated the system clock.

The local date and time (UTC) of the last SNTP request or receipt of an unsolicited message.

The status of the last SNTP request or unsolicited message for both unicast and broadcast modes. If no message was received from a server, a status of

Other

is displayed. These values are appropriate for all operational modes.

• Other

. None of the following enumeration values.

• Success . The SNTP operation was successful and the system time was updated.

• Request Timed Out . A directed SNTP request timed out without receiving a response from the SNTP server.

• Bad Date Encoded . The time provided by the SNTP server is not valid.

• Version Not Supported . The SNTP version supported by the server is not compatible with the version supported by the client.

• Server Unsynchronized . The SNTP server is not synchronized with its peers. This is indicated through the leap indicator

field on the SNTP message.

• Server Kiss Of Death

. The SNTP server indicated that no further queries were to be sent to this server. This is indicated by a stratum field equal to 0 in a message received from a server.

The IP address of the server for the last received valid packet. If no message was received from any server, an empty string is shown.

The address type of the SNTP server address for the last received valid packet.

The claimed stratum of the server for the last received valid packet.

The reference clock identifier of the server for the last received valid packet.

The mode of the server for the last received valid packet.

The maximum number of unicast server entries that can be configured on this client.

The number of current valid unicast server entries configured for this client.

The number of unsolicited broadcast SNTP messages that were received and processed by the SNTP client since the last reboot.


61


Configure an SNTP Server

SNTP assures accurate network device clock time synchronization up to the millisecond.

Time synchronization is performed by a network SNTP server. M6100/M7100/M5300 software operates only as an SNTP client and cannot provide time services to other systems.

Time sources are established by stratums. Stratums define the accuracy of the reference clock. The higher the stratum (where zero is the highest), the more accurate the clock. The device receives time from Stratum 1 and above since it is itself a Stratum 2 device.

The following is an example of stratums:

• Stratum 0 . A real-time clock is used as the time source, for example, a GPS system.

• Stratum 1 . A server that is directly linked to a Stratum 0 time source is used. Stratum 1 time servers provide primary network time standards.

• Stratum 2 . The time source is distanced from the Stratum 1 server over a network path.

For example, a Stratum 2 server receives the time over a network link, through NTP, from a Stratum 1 server.

Information received from SNTP servers is evaluated based on the time level and server type.

SNTP time definitions are assessed and determined by the following time levels:

• T1 . Time that the original request was sent by the client.

• T2 . Time that the original request was received by the server.

• T3 . Time that the server sent a reply.

• T4 . Time that the client received the server's reply.

The device can poll unicast server types for the server time.

Polling for unicast information is used for polling a server for which the IP address is known.

SNTP servers that were configured on the device are the only ones that are polled for synchronization information. T1 through T4 are used to determine server time. This is the preferred method for synchronizing device time because it is the most secure method. If this method is selected, SNTP information is accepted only from SNTP servers defined on the device using the SNTP Server Configuration screen.

The device retrieves synchronization information, either by actively requesting information or at every poll interval.

You can view and modify information for adding and modifying Simple Network Time Protocol

SNTP servers.

 To configure the SNTP server settings:





62





5.



6.

Click the

Login

button.


7. Select System > Management > Time > SNTP Server Configuration .

8. In the Server Type list, select the address type of the configured SNTP server address.


• IPv4

• IPv6

• DNS

The default value is IPv4.

9. In the Address field, specify the address of the SNTP server.

This is a text string of up to 64 characters, containing the encoded unicast IP address or host name of an SNTP server. Unicast SNTP requests are sent to this address. If this address is a DNS host name, then that host name is resolved into an IP address each time an SNTP request is sent to it.

10. Enter a Port number on the SNTP server to which SNTP requests are sent.

The valid range is 1 to 65535. The default value is 123.

11. Specify the Priority of this server entry in determining the sequence of servers to which

SNTP requests are sent.


63


The client continues sending requests to different servers until a successful response is received, or all servers are exhausted. The priority indicates the order in which to query the servers. A server entry with a precedence of 1 is queried before a server with a priority of 2, and so forth. If more than one server has the same priority, then the requesting order follows the lexicographical ordering of the entries in this table. The valid range is 1 to 3. The default value is 1.

12. Specify the NTP Version running on the server.

The range is 1 to 4. The default value is 4.


The SNTP server entry is added. This sends the updated configuration to the switch.

Configuration changes take effect immediately.

14. Repeat the previous steps to add additional SNTP servers.

You can configure up to three SNTP servers.

15. To change the settings for an existing SNTP server, select the check box next to the configured server and enter new values in the available fields.

16. To remove an SNTP server entry, select the check box next to the configured server to remove, and then click the Delete button.

The entry is removed, and the device is updated.




The SNTP Server Status table displays status information about the SNTP servers configured on your switch. The following table displays SNTP Server Status information.

Table 20. SNTP Server Status

Field

Address

Last Update Time

Last Attempt Time

Description

All the existing server addresses. If no server configuration exists, a message saying No SNTP server exists flashes on the screen.

The local date and time (UTC) that the response from this server was used to update the system clock.

The local date and time (UTC) that this SNTP server was last queried.


64


Table 20. SNTP Server Status (continued)

Field

Last Attempt Status

Requests

Failed Requests

Description

The status of the last S9 NTP request to this server. If no packet was received from this server, a status of Other is displayed.

• Other

. None of the following enumeration values.

• Success . The SNTP operation was successful and the system time was updated.

• Request Timed Out . A directed SNTP request timed out without receiving a response from the SNTP server.

• Bad Date Encoded . The time provided by the SNTP server is not valid.

• Version Not Supported . The SNTP version supported by the server is not compatible with the version supported by the client.

• Server Unsynchronized . The SNTP server is not synchronized with its peers. This is indicated through the leap indicator field on the SNTP message.

• Server Kiss Of Death

. The SNTP server indicated that no further queries were to be sent to this server. This is indicated by a stratum field equal to 0 in a message received from a server.

The number of SNTP requests made to this server since last agent reboot.

The number of failed SNTP requests made to this server since last reboot.

Configure Daylight Saving Time Settings

 To configure the Daylight Saving Time settings:


2.



4.










65


7. Select System > Management > Time > Daylight Saving Configuration .

8. Select Daylight Saving (DST) radio button:

• Disable . Disable daylight saving time.

• Recurring . Enable Recurring daylight saving time.

• Recurring EU . Enable recurring EU daylight saving time.

• Recurring USA . Enable recurring USA daylight saving time.

• Non Recurring . Configure non-recurring daylight saving time.



The fields in the following tables are visible only when DayLight Saving is Recurring or

Recurring EU or Recurring USA .

Table 21. DayLight Saving - Recurring

Field

Begins At

Description

These fields are used to configure the start values of the date and time.

• Week . Configure the start week.

• Day

. Configure the start day.

• Month . Configure the start month.

• Hours

. Configure the start hours.

• Minutes . Configure the start minutes.


66


Table 21. DayLight Saving - Recurring

Field

Ends At

Offset

Zone

Description

These fields are used to configure the end values of date and time.

• Week . Configure the end week.

• Day

. Configure the end day.

• Month . Configure the end month.

• Hours

. Configure the end hours.

• Minutes . Configure the end minutes.

Configure recurring offset in minutes. The valid range is 1–1440 minutes.

Configure the time zone.

The fields in the following table are visible only when DayLight Saving is Non Recurring .

Table 22. DayLight Saving - Non Recurring

Field

Begins At

Ends At

Offset

Zone

Description

These fields are used to configure the start values of the date and time.

• Week

. Configure the start week.

• Day . Configure the start day.

• Month

. Configure the start month.

• Hours . Configure the start hours.

• Minutes

. Configure the start minutes.

These fields are used to configure the end values of date and time.

• Week . Configure the end week.

• Day

. Configure the end day.

• Month . Configure the end month.

• Hours

. Configure the end hours.

• Minutes . Configure the end minutes.

Configure the non-recurring offset in minutes. The valid range is

1–1440 minutes.

Configure the time zone.

View the DayLight Saving Time Status

 To view the DayLight Saving Time status:


2.



4.



67








7. Select System > Management > Time > DayLight Saving Configuration .


The following table displays the nonconfigurable Daylight Saving (DST) status information.

Table 23. DayLight Saving Status

Field

Daylight Saving (DST)

Begins At

Ends At

Description

The Daylight Saving value, which is one of the following:

• Disable

• Recurring

• Recurring EU

• Recurring USA

• Non Recurring

Displays when the daylight saving time begins. This field is not displayed when daylight saving time is disabled.

Displays when the daylight saving time ends. This field is not displayed when daylight saving time is disabled.


68


Table 23. DayLight Saving Status (continued)

Field

Offset (in Minutes)

Zone

Daylight Saving (DST) in Effect

Description

The offset value in minutes.This field is not displayed when daylight saving time is disabled.

The zone acronym. This field is not displayed when daylight saving time is disabled.

Displays whether daylight saving time is in effect.

Configure DNS Settings

You can configure information about DNS servers that the network uses and how the switch operates as a DNS client.

Configure Global DNS Settings

You can configure global DNS settings and DNS server information.

 To configure the global DNS settings:

1.



3.





5.



6.

Click the

Login

button.


7. Select System > Management > DNS > DNS Configuration .


69


8. Select the DNS Status Disable or Enable radio button:

• Enable . Allow the switch to send DNS queries to a DNS server to resolve a DNS domain name. The default value is Enable.

• Disable . Prevent the switch from sending DNS queries.

9. Enter the DNS Default domain Name to include in DNS queries.

When the system is performing a lookup on an unqualified host name, this field is provides the domain name (for example, if default domain name is netgear.com and the user enters test, then test is changed to test.netgear.com to resolve the name). The length of the name must not be longer than 255 characters.

10. Use Retry Number to specify the number of times to retry sending DNS queries to the DNS server.

This number ranges from 0 to 100. The default value is 2.

11. Use Response Timeout (secs) to specify the amount of time, in seconds, to wait for a response to a DNS query.

This time-out ranges from 0 to 3600. The default value is 3.

12. Specify the Source Interface to use for DNS.


•

None

• VLAN 1

•

Routing interface

• Routing VLAN

•

Routing loopback interface

• Tunnel interface

•

Service port


70



13. To specify the DNS server to which the switch sends DNS queries, enter an IP address in standard IPv4 dot notation in the DNS Server Address field and click the Add button.

The server appears in the list. You can specify up to eight DNS servers. The precedence is set in the order created.

14. To remove a DNS server from the list, select its check box and click the Delete button.

If you click the

Delete button without selecting a DNS server, all the DNS servers are deleted.




The following table displays DNS Server Configuration information.

Table 24. DNS Server Configuration

Field

Serial No

Preference

Description

The sequence number of the DNS server.

Shows the preference of the DNS server. The preference is determined by the order in which they were entered.

Add a Static Entry to the Local DNS Table

You can manually map host names to IP addresses or to view dynamic DNS mappings.

 To add a static entry to the local DNS table:

1.



3.





5.



6.

Click the

Login

button.



71


7. Select System > Management > DNS > Host Configuration .

8. In the Host Name (1 to 255 characters) field, specify the static host name to add.

Its length cannot exceed 255 characters and it is a mandatory field.

9.

In the

IP Address

field, enter the IP address in standard IPv4 dot notation to associate with the host name.


The entry appears in the list on the screen.

11.

To remove an entry from the static DNS table, select its check box and click the

Delete button.

To clear all the dynamic host name entries from the list, click the Clear button.


The Dynamic Host Mapping table shows host name-to-IP address entries that the switch learned. The following table describes the dynamic host fields.

Table 25. DNS Dynamic Host Mapping

Field

Host

Total

Elapsed

Type

Addresses

Description

Lists the host name that you assign to the specified IP address.

Amount of time since the dynamic entry was first added to the table.

Amount of time since the dynamic entry was last updated.

The type of the dynamic entry.

Lists the IP address associated with the host name.

Configure the Switch Database Management Template

Preference

A Switch Database Management (SDM) template is a description of the maximum resources a switch or router can use for various features. Different SDM templates allow different


72

M6100, M5300, and M7100 Series Managed Switches combinations of scaling factors, enabling different allocations of resources depending on how the device is used. In other words, SDM templates enable you to reallocate system resources to support a different mix of features based on your network requirements.

Note: If you attach a unit to a stack and its template does not match the stack’s template, then the new unit automatically reboots using the template used by the other stacking members. To avoid the automatic reboot, first set the template to the SDM template used by existing members of the stack. Then power off the new unit, attach it to the stack, and power it on.

You can configure SDM template preferences for the switch.

 To configure the SDM Template Preference settings:

1.



3.





5.



6.

Click the

Login

button.


7. Select System > Management > DNS > SDM Template Preference .

8. Use SDM Next Template ID to configure the next active template.


73


It is active only after the next reboot. To revert to the default template after the next reboot, use the Default option. Possible values are as follows:

• Dual IPv4 and IPv6

• IPv4 Routing Default

• IPv4 Data Center

• IPv4 Data Center Plus

• Dual IPv4 and IPv6 Data Center

The following table displays Summary information.

Table 26. SDM Template Preference Summary

Field

SDM Current Template ID

SDM Template

ARP Entries

IPv4 Unicast Routes

IPv6 NDP Entries

IPv6 Unicast Routes

ECMP Next Hops

IPv4 Multicast Routes

IPv6 Multicast Routes

Description

The current active SDM template. Possible values are as follows:

•

Dual IPv4 and IPv6

• IPv4-routing Default

•

IPv4 Data Center

Identifies the template. The possible values are as follows:

• Dual IPv4 and IPv6

•

IPv4-routing Default

• IPv4 Data Center

The maximum number of entries in the IPv4 Address Resolution

Protocol (ARP) cache for routing interfaces.

The maximum number of IPv4 unicast forwarding table entries.

The maximum number of IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP) cache entries.

The maximum number of IPv6 unicast forwarding table entries.

The maximum number of next hops that can be installed in the IPv4 and IPv6 unicast forwarding tables.

The maximum number of IPv4 multicast forwarding table entries.

The maximum number of IPv6 multicast forwarding table entries.

Configure Green Ethernet Settings

 To configure the Green Ethernet settings:






74









7.

Select

System > Management > Green Ethernet

.

8. Select the Auto Power Down mode Disable or Enable radio button.

The factory default is Enable. When the port link is down, the PHY automatically goes down for short period of time, and then wakes up to check link pulses. This allows autonegotiation and power consumption saving when no link partner is present.

9. Select the EEE mode Disable or Enable radio button.

Energy Efficient Ethernet (EEE) combines the MAC with a family of PHYs that support operation in a low power mode. It is defined by IEEE 802.3az Energy Efficient Task

Force. Lower power mode enables both the send and receive sides of the link to disable some functionality for power savings when lightly loaded. Transition to low power mode does not change the link status. Frames in transit are not dropped or corrupted in transition to and from low power mode. Transition time is transparent to upper layer protocols and applications.



Configure Green Ethernet Interface Settings

 To configure the Green Ethernet interface settings:






75








7. Select System > Management > Green Ethernet > Green Ethernet Interface

Configuration .

8. Specify the Go To Interface by entering the Interface in unit/slot/port format and click the Go button.

The entry corresponding to the specified interface, is selected.

9. Select the Port .

10. Use the Auto Power Down mode selection to enable or disable this option.

The factory default is Enable. When the port link is down, the PHY automatically goes down for a short period of time, and then wakes up to check link pulses. This allows the switch to perform autonegotiation and save power consumption when no link partner is present.

11. Use the EEE mode menu to Enable or Disable this option.

The factory default is Disable. IF the EEE mode is not supported, then

N/A

is displayed.




76


Configure Green Ethernet Local and Remote Devices

 To configure green Ethernet local nad remote devices:


2.



4.









7.

Select

System  Management  Green Ethernet  Green Ethernet Details

.

8. Select the Interface .


77


9. Use the Energy Detect Admin mode selection to enable or disable this option on the port.

With energy detect mode enabled, when the port link is down, the PHY automatically goes down for a short period of time, and then wakes up to check link pulses. This allows the switch to perform autonegotiation and save power consumption when no link partner is present. The default value is Disabled.

10. Use the Short Reach Admin mode selection to enable or disable this option on the port.

With short reach mode enabled, PHY is forced to operate in low power mode irrespective of the cable length. The default value is Disabled.

11. Use the EEE Admin mode selection to enable or disable this option on the port.

With EEE mode enabled, port transitions to low power mode during a link idle condition.

The default value is Disabled.




To clear the configuration, resetting all statistics for the selected interface to default values, click the Clear button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields.

Table 27. Green Ethernet Local Device information

Field Description

Cumulative Energy Saved on this port due to Green mode(s) (Watts

* Hours)

Cumulative energy saved due to all green modes enabled on this port in (Watts * Hours).

Operational Status

Reason

Operational Status

Indicates whether Energy Detect Admin mode is currently operational

(Enabled).

The reason for the current operational status of Energy Detect Admin mode.

Indicates whether Short Reach Admin mode is currently operational

(Enabled).

Reason

Rx Low Power Idle Event Count

Rx Low Power Idle Duration

(uSec)

Tx Low Power Idle Event Count

The reason for the current operational status of Short Reach Admin mode.

This field is incremented each time MAC RX enters low-power idle

(LPI) state. Shows the total number of Rx LPI events since EEE counters were last cleared.

This field indicates duration of Rx LPI state in 10 us increments. Shows the total duration of Rx LPI since the EEE counters were last cleared.

This field is incremented each time MAC TX enters LPI state. Shows the total number of Tx LPI events since EEE counters were last cleared.


78


Table 27. Green Ethernet Local Device information (continued)

Field

Tx Low Power Idle Duration

(uSec)

Tw_sys_tx (uSec)

Tw_sys_tx Echo (uSec)

Tw_sys_rx (uSec)

Tw_sys_rx Echo (uSec)

Fallback Tw_sys (uSec)

Tx_dll_enabled

Description

This field indicates duration of Tx LPI state in 10 us increments. Shows the total duration of Tx LPI since the EEE counters were last cleared.

Integer that indicates the value of Tw_sys that the local system can support.

Integer that indicates the remote system's Transmit Tw_sys that was used by the local system to compute the Tw_sys that it wants to request from the remote system.

Integer that indicates the value of Tw_sys that the local system requests from the remote system.

Integer that indicates the remote system’s Receive Tw_sys that was used by the local system to compute the Tw_sys that it can support.

Integer that indicates the value of fallback Tw_sys that the local system requests from the remote system.

Data Link Layer Enabled: Initialization status of the EEE transmit Data

Link Layer management function on the local system.

Tx_dll_ready Data Link Layer ready: This variable indicates that the tx system initialization is complete and is ready to update/receive LLDPDU containing EEE TLV.

Status of the EEE capability negotiation on the local system. Rx_dll_enabled

Rx_dll_ready Data Link Layer ready: This variable indicates that the rx system initialization is complete and is ready to update/receive LLDPDU containing EEE TLV.

Time Since Counters Last Cleared Time Since Counters Last Cleared (since the time of power up, or after

EEE counters are cleared).

Configure Green Ethernet Remote Device Details

 To configure the Green Ethernet remote device information:

1.



3.





5.



79





7. Select System  Management  Green Ethernet  Green Ethernet Details .

The Green Ethernet Details screen displays.

8. Scroll down to the Remote Device Information section.



Table 28. Green Ethernet Remote Device Information


Remote ID

Remote Tw_sys_tx (uSec)

The remote client identifier assigned to the remote system.

Integer that indicates the value of Tw_sys that the remote system can support.

Remote Tw_sys_tx Echo (uSec) Integer that indicates the value of Transmit Tw_sys echoed back by the remote system.

Remote Tw_sys_rx (uSec) Integer that indicates the value of Tw_sys that the remote system requests from the local system.

Remote Tw_sys_rx Echo (uSec) Integer that indicates the value of Receive Tw_sys echoed back by the remote system.

Remote Fallback Tw_sys (uSec) Integer that indicates the value of fallback Tw_sys that the remote system is advertising.

View the Green Ethernet Statistics Summary

 To view the green Ethernet statistics:





80





5.



6.

Click the

Login

button.


7. Select System  Management  Green Ethernet  Green Ethernet Summary .



Table 29. Green Ethernet Statistics Summary


Current Power Consumption by all ports in Chassis (mWatts)

Estimated Power Consumption by all ports in chassis in mWatts.

Estimated Percentage Power

Saving per chassis (%)

Estimated percentage of power saved on all ports in chassis when green modes are enabled.


81


Table 29. Green Ethernet Statistics Summary (continued)


Cumulative Energy Saving per

Chassis (Watts * Hours)

Unit

Estimated cumulative energy saved per chassis in (watts * hour) when all green modes are enabled.

The Unit ID.

Green Features supported on this unit

List of green features supported on the given unit, which could be one or more of the following: Energy-Detect (Energy Detect), Short-Reach

(Short Reach), EEE (Energy Efficient Ethernet), LPI-History (EEE Low

Power Idle History), LLDP-Cap-Exchg (EEE LLDP Capability

Exchange), Pwr-Usg-Est (Power Usage Estimates).

Interface

Energy Detect Admin mode

Interface for which data is displayed or configured.

Enable or disable Energy Detect mode on the port. When this mode is enabled, when the port link is down, the PHY automatically goes down for a short period of time, then wakes up to check link pulses. This allows the switch to perform autonegotiation and save power consumption when no link partner is present.

Energy Detect Operational Status Current operational status of the Energy Detect mode.

Short Reach Admin mode Enable or disable Short Reach Admin mode on the port. With Short

Reach mode enabled, PHY is forced to operate in low power mode irrespective of the cable length.

Short Reach Operational Status

EEE Admin mode

Current operational status of the Short Reach mode.

Enable or disable Energy Efficient Ethernet mode on the port. With

EEE mode enabled, the port transitions to low power mode during link idle conditions.

Configure the Green Ethernet EEE LPI History

 To configure the port Green Mode EEE history:











82



7. Select System  Management  Green Ethernet  Green Ethernet LPI History .


9. In the Sampling Interval field, enter the interval at which EEE LPI data is collected.

This is a global setting and is applied to all interfaces. The range is 30 to 36000.The default value is 3600.

10. In the Max Samples field, enter the maximum number of samples to keep.

This is a global setting and is applied to all interfaces. The range is 1 to 168.The default value is 168.


The update configuration is sent to the switch.



Table 30. Interface Green mode EEE LPI History


Percentage LPI time per Chassis Time spent in LPI mode per chassis since EEE counters were last cleared.

Sample No.

Sample index.

Time Since The Sample Was

Recorded

Each time the screen is refreshed, it shows a different time as it reflects the difference in current time and time at which the sample was recorded.


83


Table 30. Interface Green mode EEE LPI History

Field

Percentage Time spent in LPI mode since last sample

Percentage Time spent in LPI mode since last reset

Description

Percentage of time spent in LPI mode during the current measurement interval.

Percentage of time spent in LPI mode since EEE LPI statistics were reset.

Licenses (M5300 only)

You can view license information for M5300 series switches.

View License Keys for M5300 Series Switches

You can view information about available license keys for various features. By default, those license keys are not available. If the license key feature is available, you can configure this functionality.

 To view license keys:











7. Select System > License > License Key .


84


The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.

Table 31. License Key

Field

License Date

License Copy

License Status

Description

Description

The date the license is purchased.

The number of licenses.

Displays whether the license is Active or Inactive .

Inactive

means that you must download a license file and reboot the system.

Shows the status of license key.

View License Features for M5300 Series Switches

You can view a list of features that require licensing.

 To view the license features:











7. Select System > License > License Features .


85


Configure DHCP Server Settings

You can configure settings for DHCP server, DHCP pools, DHCP bindings, and DHCP relay.

You can also view DHCP statistics and conflicts.

Configure DHCP Server

 To configure a DHCP server:


2.



4.










86


7. Select System > Services > DHCP Server > DHCP Server Configuration .

8. Select the Admin Mode Disable or Enable radio button.

This specifies whether the DHCP service is enabled or disabled. The default value is

Disable.

9. Use Ping Packet Count to specify the number of packets a server sends to a pool address to check for duplication as part of a ping operation.

The default value is 2. Valid range is 0, 2 to 10. Setting the value to 0 disables the function.

10. Select the Conflict Logging mode Disable or Enable radio button.

This specifies whether conflict logging on a DHCP server is to be enabled or disabled.

The default value is Enable.

11. Select the BootP Automatic mode Disable or Enable radio button.

This specifies whether BootP for dynamic pools is to be enabled or disabled. The default value is Disable.

12. To exclude addresses, do the following: a.

In the IP Range From field, enter the lowest address in the range or a single address to be excluded.

b. In the IP Range To field, to exclude a range, enter the highest address in the range.

To exclude a single address, enter the same IP address as specified in the IP

Range From field, or leave it as 0.0.0.0.


The exclude addresses are added to the switch

14. To delete the exclude address from the switch, click the Delete button.



87



Configure the DHCP Pool

 To configure the DHCP pool:











7. Select System > Services > DHCP Server > DHCP Pool Configuration .


88



The pool configuration is added.

9.

To delete the pool, click the

Delete

button.

This field is not visible to a user with read-only permission.



The following table describes the DHCP Pool Configuration fields.

Table 32. DHCP Pool Configuration

Field

Pool Name*

Pool Name

Type of Binding

Network Address

Network Mask

Network Prefix Length

Client Name

Hardware Address

Hardware Address Type

Client ID

Host Number

Description

For a user with read/write permission, this field shows names of all the existing pools along with an additional option

Create

. When the user selects Create , another text box Pool Name , appears where the user can enter a name for the pool to be created. For a user with read-only permission, this field shows names of the existing pools only.

The name of the pool to be created. This field appears when the user with read-write permission selects

Create

in the Pool Name list*.

Pool

Name can be up to 31 characters in length.

The type of binding for the pool:

•

Unallocated

• Dynamic

•

Manual

The subnet address for a DHCP address of a dynamic pool.

The subnet number for a DHCP address of a dynamic pool. Either

Network Mask or Prefix Length can be configured to specify the subnet mask but not both.

The subnet number for a DHCP address of a dynamic pool. Either

Network Mask or Prefix Length can be configured to specify the subnet mask but not both. The valid range is 0 to 32.

The client name for DHCP manual pool.

The MAC address of the hardware platform of the DHCP client.

The protocol of the hardware platform of the DHCP client. Valid types are Ethernet and ieee802. The default value is Ethernet.

The client identifier for DHCP manual pool.

The IP address for a manual binding to a DHCP client. The host can be set only if f Client Identifier or Hardware Address is specified. Deleting

Host would delete the client name, client ID, and hardware address for the manual pool, and set the pool type to Unallocated.


89


Table 32. DHCP Pool Configuration (continued)


Host Mask

Host Prefix Length

Lease Time

Days

Hours

Minutes

Default Router Addresses

DNS Server Addresses

The subnet mask for a manual binding to a DHCP client. Either Host

Mask

or

Prefix Length

can be configured to specify the subnet mask but not both.

The subnet mask for a manual binding to a DHCP client. Either Host

Mask

or

Prefix Length

can be configured to specify the subnet mask but not both. The valid range is 0 to 32.

Can be selected as Infinite to specify lease time as Infinite or

Specified Duration

to enter a specific lease period. In case of dynamic binding infinite implies a lease period of 60 days and In case of manual binding infinite implies indefinite lease period. The default value is

Specified Duration.

The number of days of the lease period. This field appears only if the user specified


as the Lease time. The default value is 1. The valid range is 0 to 59.

The number of hours of the lease period. This field appears only if the user specified


as the Lease time. The valid range is 0 to 22.

The number of minutes of the lease period. This field appears only if you specified


as the lease time. The valid range is

0 to 86399.

The list of Default Router Addresses for the pool. Click the arrow beside the field name to expand the screen and display a table where you can specify up to eight default router addresses in order of preference.

The list of

DNS Server Addresses

for the pool. Click the arrow beside the field name to expand the screen and display a table where you can specify up to eight DNS Server Addresses in order of preference.

NetBIOS Name Server Addresses The list of

NetBIOS Name Server Addresses

for the pool. Click the arrow beside the field name to expand the screen and display a table where you can specify up to eight NetBIOS name server addresses in order of preference.

NetBIOS Node Type The NetBIOS node type for DHCP clients:

• b-node Broadcast

• p-node Peer-to-Peer

• m-node Mixed

• h-node Hybrid

Next Server Address

Domain Name

Bootfile

The Next Server Address characters in length.

for the pool.

The domain name for a DHCP client. Domain Name can be up to 255

The name of the default boot image for a DHCP client. File Name can be up to 128 characters in length.


90


Configure DHCP Pool Options

 To configure DHCP Pool options:


2.



4.









7.

Select

System

>

Services

>

DHCP Server

>

DHCP Pool Options

.

8. In Pool Name list, select the pool name.

9. Option Code specifies the Option Code configured for the selected Pool.

10. Use Option Type to specify the Option Type against the Option Code configured for the selected pool:

• ASCII

• Hex

• IP Address

11. Option Value specifies the value against the Option Code configured for the selected pool.


The Option Code is added for the selected pool.

13. To delete the Option Code for the selected pool, click the Delete button.


91


View DHCP Server Statistics

 To view the DHCP server statistics:











7. Select System > Services > DHCP Server > DHCP Server Statistics .


92


The following table describes the DHCP Server Statistics fields.

Table 33. DHCP Server Statistics

Field

Automatic Bindings

Expired Bindings

Malformed Messages

DHCPDISCOVER

DHCPREQUEST

DHCPDECLINE

DHCPRELEASE

DHCPINFORM

DHCPOFFER

DHCPACK

DHCPNAK

Description

The number of automatic bindings on the DHCP Server.

The number of expired bindings on the DHCP Server.

The number of the malformed messages.

The number of DHCPDISCOVER messages received by the DHCP

Server.

The number of DHCPREQUEST messages received by the DHCP

Server.

The number of DHCPDECLINE messages received by the DHCP

Server.

The number of DHCPRELEASE messages received by the DHCP

Server.

The number of DHCPINFORM messages received by the DHCP

Server.

The number of DHCPOFFER messages sent by the DHCP Server.

The number of DHCPACK messages sent by the DHCP Server.

The number of DHCPNAK messages sent by the DHCP Server.

View DHCP Bindings Information

 To view the DHCP bindings:


2.



4.










93


7. Select System > Services > DHCP Server > DHCP Bindings Information .

8. To display DHCP Bindings Information, select one of the following radio buttons:

• All Dynamic Bindings . Specify all dynamic bindings to be deleted.

• Specific Dynamic Binding . Specify specific dynamic binding to be deleted.

The following table describes the DHCP Bindings Information fields.

Table 34. DHCP Bindings Information

Field

IP Address

Hardware Address

Lease Time Left

Type

Description

The client's IP address.

The client's hardware address.

The Lease Time Left in Days, Hours and Minutes dd:hh:mm format.

The Type of Binding: Dynamic or Manual.

View DHCP Conflicts

You can view information on hosts with address conflicts, such as when the same IP address is assigned to two or more devices on the network.

 To view the DHCP conflicts:








94







7.

Select

System > Services > DHCP Server > DHCP Conflicts Information

.

8. To display DHCP conflicts information, select one of the following radio buttons:

• All Address Conflicts . Specify all address conflicts to be deleted.

• Specific Address Conflict . Specify a specific dynamic binding to be deleted.

The following table describes the DHCP Conflicts Information fields.

Table 35. DHCP Conflicts Information

Field

IP Address

Hardware Address

Detection Method

Detection Time

Description

The IP address of the host as recorded on the DHCP server.

The client’s hardware address.

The manner in which the IP address of the hosts were found on the

DHCP server.

The time when the conflict was detected in N days NNh:NNm:NNs format with respect to the system up time.

Configure the DHCP Relay

 To configure DHCP relay:



95











7. Select System > Services > DHCP Relay .

8. Use Maximum Hop Count to enter the maximum number of hops a client request can take before being discarded.

The range is (1 to 16). The default value is 4.


When you select Enable, DHCP requests are forwarded to the IP address you entered in the 'Server Address' field.

10. Use Minimum Wait Time to enter a Minimum Wait Time in seconds.

This value is compared to the time stamp in the client's request packets, which represents the time since the client was powered up. Packets are forwarded only when the time stamp exceeds the minimum wait time. The range is (0 to 100).

11. Select the Circuit ID Option mode Disable or Enable radio button.


96


If you select Enable , Relay Agent options are added to requests before they are forwarded to the server and removed from replies before they are forwarded to clients.

The following table describes the DHCP Relay Statistics fields.

Table 36. DHCP Relay Status

Field

Requests Received

Requests Relayed

Packets Discarded

Description

The total number of DHCP requests received from all clients since the last time the switch was reset.

The total number of DHCP requests forwarded to the server since the last time the switch was reset.

The total number of DHCP packets discarded by this Relay Agent since the last time the switch was reset.

DHCP L2 Relay

Configure Global DHCP L2 Relay Settings

 To configure global DHCP L2 Relay settings:

1.



3.





5.



6.

Click the

Login

button.


7. Select System > Services > DHCP L2 Relay > DHCP L2 Relay Global Configuration .


97



For global configuration, this enables or disables the DHCP L2 Relay on the switch. The default is Disable.

9. For VLAN configuration, VLAN ID shows the VLAN ID configured on the switch.

a.

Use Admin mode to enable or disable the DHCP L2 Relay on the selected VLAN.

b. Use Circuit ID mode to enable or disable the Circuit ID suboption of DHCP

Option-82.

c. Use Remote ID String to specify the Remote ID when Remote ID mode is enabled.



• Pagination Navigation Menu

Rows per page. Select how many table entries are displayed per screen. Possible values are 20, 50, 100, 200, and All.

Note: If you select All, the browser might be slow to display the information.

< Display the previous page of the table data entries.

> Display the next page of the table data entries.

Configure a DHCP L2 Relay Interface

 To configure DHCP L2 Relay:






98









7.

Select

System > Services > DHCP L2 Relay > DHCP L2 Relay Interface Configuration

.

8. Use Admin mode to enable or disable the DHCP L2 Relay on the selected interface.

The default is Disable.

9. Use 82 Option Trust mode to enable or disable an interface to be trusted for DHCP L2

Relay (Option-82) received.

View DHCP L2 Relay Interface Statistics

 To view the DHCP L2 Relay Interface Statistics:









99





7. Select System > Services > DHCP L2 Relay > DHCP L2 Relay Interface Statistics .

The following table describes the DHCP L2 Relay Interface Statistics fields.

Table 37. DHCP L2 Relay Interface Statistics


Interface

UntrustedClientMsgsWithOpt82

Shows the interface from which the DHCP message is received.

UntrustedServerMsgsWithOpt82 Shows the number of DHCP message with option82 received from an untrusted server.

Shows the number of DHCP message with option82 received from an untrusted client.

TrustedServerMsgsWithoutOpt82 Shows the number of DHCP message without option82 received from a trusted server.

TrustedClientMsgsWithoutOpt82 Shows the number of DHCP message without option82 received from a trusted client.

Configure UDP Relay Global Settings

 To configure UDP relay global settings:







100








7.

Select

System > Services > UDP Relay > UDP Relay Global Configuration

.


This enables or disables UDP Relay on the switch. The default value is Disable.

9. Use Server Address to specify the UDP Relay Server Address in x.x.x.x format.

10. Use UDP Port to specify the UDP Destination Port.

These ports are supported:

• DefaultSet . Relay UDP port 0 packets. This is specified if no UDP port is selected when creating the Relay server.

• dhcp . Relay DHCP (UDP port 67) packets.

• domain . Relay DNS (UDP port 53) packets.

• isakmp . Relay ISAKMP (UDP port 500) packets.

• mobile-ip . Relay Mobile IP (UDP port 434) packets

• nameserver . Relay IEN-116 Name Service (UDP port 42) packets

• netbios-dgm . Relay NetBIOS Datagram Server (UDP port 138) packets

• netbios-ns . Relay NetBIOS Name Server (UDP port 137) packets

• ntp . Relay network time protocol (UDP port 123) packets.

• pim-auto-rp . Relay PIM auto RP (UDP port 496) packets.

• rip . Relay Routing Image Protocol (RIP) (UDP port 520) packets

• tacacs . Relay TACACS (UDP port 49) packet

• tftp . Relay TFTP (UDP port 69) packets


101


• time . Relay time service (UDP port 37) packets

• Other . If this option is selected, the UDP Port Other Value is enabled. This option permits you to enter your own UDP port in UDP Port Other Value.

11. Use UDP Port Other Value to specify a UDP Destination Port that lies between 0 and

65535.


This creates an entry in UDP Relay Table with the specified configuration.

13. To remove all entries or a specified one from UDP Relay Table, click the Delete button.



The Hit Count field displays the number of UDP packets hitting the UDP port.


Configure UDP Relay Interface Settings

 To configure UDP Relay Interface settings:











7. Select System > Services > UDP Relay > UDP Relay Interface Configuration .


102


8. Use Interface to select an Interface to be enabled for the UDP Relay.

9.

Use

Server Address

to specify the UDP Relay Server Address in x.x.x.x format.

10. Use UDP Port to specify UDP Destination Port.

The following ports are supported:

• DefaultSet

. Relay UDP port 0 packets. This is specified if no UDP port is selected when creating a Relay server.

• dhcp

. Relay DHCP (UDP port 67) packets.

• domain . Relay DNS (UDP port 53) packets.

• isakmp

. Relay ISAKMP (UDP port 500) packets.

• mobile-ip . Relay Mobile IP (UDP port 434) packets

• nameserver

. Relay IEN-116 Name Service (UDP port 42) packets

• netbios-dgm . Relay NetBIOS Datagram Server (UDP port 138) packets

• netbios-ns

. Relay NetBIOS Name Server (UDP port 137) packets

• ntp . Relay network time protocol (UDP port 123) packets.

• pim-auto-rp

. Relay PIM auto RP (UDP port 496) packets.

• rip . Relay RIP (UDP port 520) packets

• tacacs

. Relay TACACS (UDP port 49) packet

• tftp . Relay TFTP (UDP port 69) packets

• time

. Relay time service (UDP port 37) packets

• Other . If this option is selected, the UDP Port Other Value is enabled. This option permits the user to enter their own UDP port in UDP Port Other Value.

11.

Use

UDP Port Other Value

to specify UDP Destination Port that lies between 0 and 65535.

12. Use Discard to enable/disable dropping of matched packets.

Enable can be chosen only when a user enters 0.0.0.0 IP address. Discard mode can be set to Disable when user adds a new entry with a non-zero IP address.


This creates an entry in UDP Relay Table with the specified configuration.

14.

Click the

Apply

button.


To remove all entries or a specified one from UDP Relay Interface Configuration Table, click the Delete button.

The Hit Count field displays the number of UDP packets hitting the UDP port.



103


Enable or Disable DHCPv6 Server

You can configure the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for IPv6 (DHCPv6) server settings on the device. The device can act as a DHCPv6 server or DHCPv6 relay agent to help assign network configuration information to IPv6 clients.

 To enable or disable DHCP service:











7. Select System > Services > DHCPv6 Server > DHCPv6 Server Configuration .


This specifies whether the DHCPv6 Service administrative mode is enabled or disabled

The default value is Disable.

9. Use the DHCPv6 Server DUID field to specify the DHCP Unique Identifier (DUID) of the

DHCPv6 server.




104


Configure the DHCPv6 Pool

You can view the currently configured DHCPv6 server pools as well as to add and remove pools. A DHCPv6 server pool is a set of network configuration information available to

DHCPv6 clients that request the information.

 To configure DHCPv6 pool settings:

1.



3.





5.



6.

Click the

Login

button.


7. Select System > Services > DHCPv6 Server > DHCPv6 Pool Configuration .

The Pool Name field shows the names of all the existing pools and the Create option.


105


Note: If you are logged in as a user with read-only permission, the Pool

Name field displays only the existing pool names. To create a pool, you must log in with the admin user name, which has read/write permissions.

8. To create a pool, select Create , and enter a unique name that identifies the DHCPv6 server pool to be created.

The name can be up to 31 alphanumeric characters in length.

9. Use the Default Router Addresses field to specify the list of default router addresses for the pool.

The user can specify up to eight default router addresses in order of preference.

10. User the Domain Name field to specify the domain name for a DHCPv6 client in the pool.

The domain name can be up to 255 alphanumeric characters in length.

To delete the selected pool on the switch, click the Delete button.



Configure the DHCPv6 Prefix Delegation

 To configure the DHCPv6 Prefix delegation settings:











7. Select System > Services > DHCPv6 Server > DHCPv6 Prefix Delegation

Configuration .


106


8. Select from the list of configured Pool Names .

9.

In the

Prefix

and

Prefix Length

fields, specify the delegated IPv6 prefix.

10. In the DUID field, specify the DUID identifier used to identify the client’s unique DUID value.

11.

Specify the

Client Name

, which is useful for logging or tracing only.

The name can be up to 31 alphanumeric characters.

12. Specify the Valid Lifetime in seconds for the delegated prefix.

Valid values are 0 to 4294967295.

13.

Specify the

Prefer Lifetime

in seconds for the delegated prefix.

Valid values are 0 to 4294967295.


The delegated prefix is added for the selected pool.

15.

To delete the delegated prefix for the selected pool, click the

Delete

button.



Configure DHCPv6 Interface Settings

You can configure the per-interface settings for DHCPv6. The DHCPv6 interface modes are mutually exclusive. The fields that can be configured on this screen depend on the selected mode for the interface.

 T o configure DHCPv6 Interface settings:


2.



4.






107





7. Select System > Services > DHCPv6 Server > DHCPv6 Interface Configuration .

8. Select the Interface with the information to view or configure. You can either: a.

In the Go To Interface field, enter the interface in unit/slot/port format and click the Go button. The entry corresponding to the specified interface is selected.

b. Select the check box from the list of Interface s configured for DHCPv6 server functionality.

9. In the Admin mode list, select to Enable or Disable DHCPv6 mode to configure server functionality.

DHCPv6 server and DHCPv6 relay functions are mutually exclusive.

10. In the Pool Name field, specify the DHCPv6 pool containing stateless and/or prefix delegation parameters.

11. Rapid Commit is an optional parameter. In the Rapid Commit list, select to Enable or

Disable allowing an abbreviated exchange between the client and server.

12. In the Preference field, specify the preference value used by clients to determine the preference between DHCPv6 servers.

Valid values are 0 to 4294967295. The default value is 0.



View DHCPv6 Bindings Information

You can view entries in the DHCP Bindings table. After a client acquires IPv6 configuration information from the DHCPv6 server, the server adds an entry to its database. The entry is called a binding.


108


 To view DHCPv6 bindings information:


2.



4.









7.

Select

System > Services > DHCPv6 Server > DHCPv6 Bindings Information

.


The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields that are displayed.

Table 38. DHCPv6 Binding Information

Field

Client Address

Client Interface

Description

The IPv6 address of the client associated with the binding.

The interface number where the client binding occurred.


109


Table 38. DHCPv6 Binding Information (continued)

Field

Client DUID

Prefix

Prefix Length

Prefix Type

Expiry Time

Valid Lifetime

Prefer Lifetime

Description

The DHCPv6 Unique Identifier (DUID) of the client. The DUID is a combination of the client’s hardware address and client identifier.

The IPv6 address for the delegated prefix associated with this binding.

The IPv6 mask length for the delegated prefix associated with this binding.

The type of IPv6 prefix associated with this binding.

The number of seconds until the prefix associated with a binding expires.

The maximum amount of time in seconds that the client is allowed to use the prefix.

The preferred amount of time in seconds that the client is allowed to use the prefix.

View DHCPv6 Server Statistics

You can view the DHCPv6 server statistics for the device, including information about the

DHCPv6 messages, sent, received, and discarded globally and on each interface. The values on the screen indicate the various counts that accumulated since they were last cleared.

 To view DHCPv6 server statistics:











7. Select System > Services > DHCPv6 Server > DHCPv6 Server Statistics .


110


8. To view detailed DHCPv6 statistics for an interface, from the Interface list select the entry for which data is to be displayed.

If you select All , data is shown for all interfaces.

To reset the DHCPv6 counters for one or more interface, select each interface with the statistics to reset and click the Clear button.


The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields that are displayed.

Table 39. DHCPv6 Server Statistics

Field

Messages Received

Total DHCPv6 Packets Received

DHCPv6 Solicit Packets Received

Description

The aggregate of all interface level statistics for received messages.

The number of DHCPv6 messages received on the interface. The

DHCPv6 messages sent from a DHCP v6 client to a DHCP v6 server include solicit, request, confirm, renew, rebind, release, decline, and information-request messages. Additionally, a DHCP v6 relay agent can forward relay-forward messages to a DHCP v6 server.

The number of DHCPv6 Solicit messages received on the interface. This type of message is sent by a client to locate DHCPv6 servers.


111


Table 39. DHCPv6 Server Statistics (continued)


DHCPv6 Request Packets Received The number of requests.

DHCPv6 Confirm Packets Received The number of DHCPv6 Confirm messages received on the interface.

This type of message is sent by a client to all DHCPv6 servers to determine whether its configuration is valid for the connected link.

DHCPv6 Renew Packets Received The number of DHCPv6 Renew messages received on the interface.

This type of message is sent by a client to extend and update the configuration information provided by the DHCPv6 server.

DHCPv6 Rebind Packets Received The number of DHCPv6 Rebind messages received on the interface.

This type of message is sent by a client to any DHCPv6 server when it does not receive a response to a Renew message.

DHCPv6 Release Packets Received The number of DHCPv6 Release messages received on the interface.

This type of message is sent by a client to indicate that it no longer needs the assigned address.

DHCPv6 Decline Packets Received The number of DHCPv6 Decline messages received on the interface.

This type of message is sent by a client to the DHCPv6 server to indicate that an assigned address is already in use on the link.

DHCPv6 Inform Packets Received The number of DHCP v6 information-request messages received on the interface. This type of message is sent by a client to request configuration information other than IP address assignment.

DHCPv6 Relay-forward Packets

Received

DHCPv6 Relay-reply Packets

Received

The number of DHCPv6 relay-forward messages received on the interface. This type of message is sent by a relay agent to forward messages to servers.

The number of DHCP v6 relay-reply messages received on the interface. This type of message is sent by a server to a DHCP v6 relay agent and contains the message for the relay agent to deliver to the client.

DHCPv6 Malformed Packets

Received

Received DHCPv6 Packets

Discarded

Messages Sent

Total DHCPv6 Packets Sent

The number of DHCPv6 messages that were received on the interface but were dropped because they were malformed.

The number of Packets Discarded.

The aggregate of all interface level statistics for messages sent.

The number of DHCPv6 messages sent by the interface. The DHCPv6 messages sent from a DHCPv6 server to a DHCPv6 client include

Advertise, Reply, Reconfigure, and Relay-Reply messages.

DHCPv6 Advertisement Packets

Transmitted

The number of DHCPv6 Advertise messages sent by the interface. This type of message is sent by a server to a DHCPv6 client in response to a

Solicit message and indicates that it is available for service.

DHCPv6 Reply Packets Transmitted The number of DHCPv6 Reply messages sent from the interface to a

DHCPv6 client in response to a solicit, request, renew, rebind, information-request, confirm, release, or decline message.


112


Table 39. DHCPv6 Server Statistics (continued)

Field

DHCPv6 Reconfig Packets

Transmitted

DHCPv6 Relay-forward Packets

Transmitted

DHCPv6 Relay-reply Packets

Transmitted

Description

The number of DHCPv6 reconfigure messages sent by the interface.

This type of message is sent by a server to a DHCPv6 client to inform the client that the server has new or updated information. The client then typically initiates a renew/reply or Information-request/reply transaction with the server to receive the updated information.

The number of DHCPv6 Relay-Forward messages sent by the interface.

This type of message is sent by a relay agent to forward messages to servers.

The number of DHCPv6 Relay-Reply messages sent by the interface.

This type of message is sent by a server to a DHCPv6 relay agent and contains the message for the relay agent to deliver to the client.

Configure DHCPv6 Relay for an Interface

 To configure DHCPv6 Relay for an interface:


2.



4.









7.

Select

System > Services > DHCPv6 Relay

.


113


8. Select the Interface with the information to view or configure. You can either:

• In the Go To Interface field, enter the interface in unit/slot/port format and click the Go button. The entry corresponding to the specified interface is selected.

• Select the check box from the list of Interface s configured for DHCPv6 Relay functionality.

9. In the Admin mode field, specify the DHCPv6 mode, either Enable or Disable, to configure

DHCPv6 Relay functionality.

The default is Disable. DHCPv6 server and DHCPv6 relay functions are mutually exclusive.

10. From the Relay Interface list, select an interface to reach a relay server.

11. In the Destination IP Address , specify an IPv6 address to reach a relay server.

12. In the Remote ID field, specify the relay agent information option.

The remote ID is derived from the DHCPv6 server DUID and the relay interface number, or it can be specified as a user-defined string.



Configure Basic PoE

 To configure basic PoE settings:






114









7.

Select

System > PoE > Basic > PoE Configuration

.

The Unit Selection field displays the current PoE unit.

8. To change the PoE unit, select another unit from the list.

9. To set the System Usage Threshold , enter a number from 1 to 99.

This sets the threshold level at which a trap is sent if consumed power is greater than the threshold power.

10. The Power Management mode describes or controls the power management algorithm used by the PSE to deliver power to the requesting PDs.

Select Static to indicate that the power allocated for each port depends on the type of power threshold configured on the port. Select Dynamic to indicate that the power consumption on each port is measured and calculated in real-time.

11. To set the traps, select Enable to activate the PoE traps.

Select Disable to deactivate the PoE traps. The default setting is enabled.



The following table describes the PoE Configuration nonconfigurable fields.

Table 40. PoE Configuration nonconfigurable Fields

Field

Units

Firmware Version

Power Status

Description

The Current PoE Unit. You can change the PoE Unit by selecting another unit ID listed here.

Version of the PoE controller's FW image.

Indicates the power status.


115


Table 40. PoE Configuration nonconfigurable Fields (continued)

Field

Total Power (Main AC)

Total Power (RPS)

Power Source

Threshold Power

Consumed Power

Description

The total power provided by the MAIN AC power source.

The total power provided by the redundant power source.

Current source of system power (Main AC or RPS).

System can power up one port, if consumed power is less than this power. Consumed power can be between Nominal & Threshold Power values. The threshold power value is effected by changing System

Usage Threshold.

Total amount of a power which is currently being delivered to all ports.

Congure PoE Settings

 To configure PoE settings:











7. Select System > PoE > Advanced > PoE Configuration .

The Unit Selection field displays the current PoE unit.

8. To change the PoE unit, select another unit from the list.

9. To set the System Usage Threshold , enter a number from 1 to 99.


116


This sets the threshold level at which a trap is sent if consumed power is greater than the threshold power.

10.

The

Power Management mode

describes or controls the power management algorithm used by the PSE to deliver power to the requesting PDs.

Select Static to indicate that the power allocated for each port depends on the type of power threshold configured on the port. Select Dynamic to indicate that the power consumption on each port is measured and calculated in real-time.

11. To set the traps, select Enable to activate the PoE traps.

Select

Disable

to deactivate the PoE traps. The default setting is enabled.

12.

Click the

Apply

button.



Table 41. PoE Configuration

Field

Units

Firmware Version

Power Status

Total Power (Main AC)

Total Power (RPS)

Total Power (PD) for GSM5212P switches only

Power Source

Threshold Power

Consumed Power

Description

The current PoE Unit. You can change the PoE Unit by selecting another unit ID listed here.

The version of the PoE controller's FW image.

Indicates the power status.

The total power provided by the MAIN AC power source.

The total power provided by the redundant power source.

Current source of system power (Main AC or RPS).

System can power up one port, if consumed power is less than this power. i.e. Consumed power can be between Nominal and Threshold

Power values. The threshold power value is effected by changing

System Usage Threshold.

Total amount of a power which is currently being delivered to all ports.

Configure PoE Ports

 To configure PoE port settings:,


2.




117









7. Select System > PoE > Advanced > PoE Port Configuration .

8. Select the Admin mode ( Enable or Disable ) to determine the ability of the port to deliver power.

9. Port Priority is used to determine which ports can deliver power when the total power delivered by the system crosses a specific threshold.

If the switch cannot supply power to all connected devices, the priority determines which ports can supply power. The lowest numbered ports with the same Port Priority setting are given higher priority. Select the priority order from the following list:

• Low . Low priority

• Medium . Medium priority

• High . High priority

• Critical . Critical priority

10. Select the High Power mode from the following options:

• Disabled indicates that a port is powered in the IEEE 802.3af mode.

• Legacy indicates that a port is powered using high-inrush current, used by legacy

PD's whose power requirements are more than 15W from power up.

• Pre-802.3at

indicates a port is powered in the IEEE 802.3af mode initially and then switched to the high-power IEEE 802.3at mode before 75 msec. This mode must be selected if the PD is NOT performing Layer 2 Classification or the PSE is performing

2-Event Layer 1 Classification.

• 802.3at

indicates that a port is powered in the IEEE 802.3at mode. For example, if the class detected by PSE is not class4, then the PSE port does not power up the PD.

11. The Power Limit Type describes or controls the maximum power that a port can deliver.

Select the type from the following list:

• Class indicates that the port power limit is equal to the class of the PD attached.


118


• User indicates that the port power limit is equal to the value specified by Power Limit.

• None

indicates that the port draws up to class 0 maximum power in low power mode and up to class 4 maximum power in high power mode.

12. Select the Power Limit to define the maximum power (in watts) which can be delivered by a port.

13.

The

Detection Type

Describes a PD detection mechanism performed by the PSE port.

• pre-ieee

. Only legacy detection is done.

• ieee . 4 Point Resistive Detection is done.

• auto

. 4 Point Resistive Detection followed by Legacy Detection is done.

• 4point and Legacy indicates that the resistive 4 point detection scheme is used and when it fails to detect a connected PD, legacy capacitive detection is used.

14.

The

Timer Schedule

defines the timer schedule assigned to the port. Select

None

to remove the timer schedule assignment.

15. Click Reset to forcibly reset the PSE port.

16.

Click the

Apply

button.



Table 42. PoE Configuration

Field

Port

High Power

Max Power

Class

Output Voltage

Output Current

Output Power

Description

The interface for which data is to be displayed or configured.

Enabled when particular port supports High Power mode.

The maximum power in Watts that can be provided by the port.

The Class defines the range of power a PD is drawing from the system.

Class definitions:

0 – 0.44-12.95 (watts)

1 – 0.44-3.83 (watts)

2 – 0.44-6.48 (watts)

3 – 0.44-12.95 (watts)

4 – 0.44-25.5 (watts)

Current voltage being delivered to device in volts.

Current being delivered to device in mA.

Current power being delivered to device in Watts.


119


Table 42. PoE Configuration (continued)

Field

Status

Fault Status

Description

The status is the operational status of the port PD detection.

• Disabled

. No power being delivered.

• DeliveringPower . Power is being drawn by device.

• Fault

. Indicates a problem with the port.

• Test . The port is in test mode.

• otherFault

. The port is idle due to error condition.

• Searching . The port is not in one of the above states.

Describes the error description when the PSE port is in fault status.

• No Error

. The PSE port is not in any error state.

• MPS Absent . The PSE port has detected an absence of main power supply.

• Short . The PSE port has detected a short circuit condition.

• Overload

.The PD connected to the PSE port tried to provide more power than it is permissible by the hardware.

• Power Denied

. The PSE port was denied power because of shortage of power or due to administrative action.

Configure SNMP

You can configure SNMP settings for SNMP V1/V2 and SNMPv3.

Configure the SNMP V1/V2 Community

By default, two SNMP communities exist:

• Private, with read/write privileges and status set to Enable .

• Public, with read-only privileges and status set to Enable .

These are well-known communities. You can change the defaults or to add other communities. Only the communities that you define can access to the switch using the SNMP

V1 and SNMP V2 protocols. Only those communities with read/write level access can be used to change the configuration using SNMP.

Note: If you want to use SNMP v3, use the User Accounts menu.

 To configure the SNMP V1/V2 community:




120



4.









7.

Select

System > SNMP > SNMP V1/V2 > Community Configuration

.

8. Use Community Name to reconfigure an existing community, or to create a new one.

Use this menu to select one of the existing community names, or select 'Create' to add a new one. A valid entry is a case-sensitive string of up to 16 characters.

9. Client Address . Taken together, the Client Address and Client IP Mask denote a range of

IP addresses from which SNMP clients can use that community to access this device.

If either (Client Address or IP Mask) value is 0.0.0.0, access is allowed from any IP address. Otherwise, every client's address is ANDed with the mask, as is the Client

Address, and, if the values are equal, access is allowed. For example, if the Client

Address and Client IP Mask parameters are 192.168.1.0/255.255.255.0, then any client whose address is 192.168.1.0 through 192.168.1.255 (inclusive) is allowed access. To allow access from only one station, use a Client IP Mask value of 255.255.255.255, and use that machine's IP address for Client Address.

10. Client IP Mask . Taken together, the Client Address and Client IP Mask denote a range of IP addresses from which SNMP clients can use that community to access this device.

If either (Client Address or IP Mask) value is 0.0.0.0, access is allowed from any IP address. Otherwise, every client's address is ANDed with the mask, as is the Client

Address, and, if the values are equal, access is allowed. For example, if the Client

Address and Client IP Mask parameters are 192.168.1.0/255.255.255.0, then any client whose IP address is 192.168.1.0 through 192.168.1.255 (inclusive) is allowed access. To allow access from only one station, use a Client IP Mask value of 255.255.255.255, and use that machine's IP address for Client Address.

11. In the Access mode menu, select Read-Write or Read-Only .


121


This specifies the access level for this community.

12. Use Status to specify the status of this community by selecting Enable or Disable .

If you select enable, the Community Name must be unique among all valid Community

Names or the set request are rejected. If you select disable, the Community Name becomes invalid.


This adds the selected community to the switch.

14. To delete the selected Community Name, click the Delete button.

Configure SNMP V1/V2 Trap Settings

 To configure the SNMP V1/V2 trap settings:











7. Select System > SNMP > SNMP V1/V2 > Trap Configuration .

8. In the Source Interface list, select the source interface to use for SNMP Trap receiver.


122



• Routing interface

•

Routing VLAN

• Routing loopback interface

•

Tunnel interface

• Service port

VLAN 1 is used as source interface by default.

9. To add a host that receives SNMP traps, do the following steps: a. Community Name

. Enter the community string for the SNMP trap packet to be sent to the trap manager. This name can be up to 16 characters and is case-sensitive.

b. Version . Select the trap version to be used by the receiver:

• SNMP V1 . Uses SNMP V1 to send traps to the receiver.

• SNMP V2

. Uses SNMP V2 to send traps to the receiver.

c. Protocol

. Select the protocol to be used by the receiver. Select

IPv4

if the receiver's address is IPv4 address or

IPv6

if the receiver's address is IPv6.

d. Address . Enter the IPv4 address in x.x.x.x format or the IPv6 address in xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx to receive SNMP traps from this device.

The length of the address cannot exceed 39 characters.

e. Status

. Select the receiver's status:

• Enable

. Send traps to the receiver

• Disable . Do not send traps to the receiver.

f. Click the Add button.

10.

To modify information about an existing SNMP recipient, select the check box for the recipient, and change the desired fields.

11. To delete a recipient, select the check box for the recipient and click the Delete button.

12.

Click the

Apply

button.


Configure SNMP V1/V2 Trap Flags

You can enable or disable traps. When the condition identified by an active trap is encountered by the switch, a trap message is sent to any enabled SNMP Trap Receivers, and a message is written to the trap log.

 To configure the trap flags:

1.




123










7. Select System > SNMP > SNMP V1/V2 > Trap Flags .

8. Select the Authentication Disable or Enable radio button.

This enables or disables activation of authentication failure traps. The factory default is

Enable.

9. Select the Link Up/Down Disable or Enable radio button

This enables or disables activation of link status traps.The factory default is Enable.

10. Select the Multiple Users Disable or Enable radio button


124


This enables or disables activation of multiple user traps.The factory default is Enable.

This trap is triggered when the same user ID is logged into the switch more than once at the same time (either through Telnet or the serial port).

11. Select the Spanning Tree Disable or Enable radio button.

This enables or disables activation of spanning tree traps. The factory default is Enable.

12.

Select the ACL

Disable

or

Enable

radio button.

This enables or disables activation of ACL traps. The factory default is Disable.

13. Select the PoE Disable or Enable radio button.

This enables or disables activation of PoE traps. The factory default is Enable. Indicates whether PoE traps are sent.



View the Supported MIBs

 To view all the MIBs supported by the switch:

1.



3.





5.



6.

Click the

Login

button.


7. Select System > SNMP > SNMP V1/V2 >Supported MIBs .


125


The following table describes the SNMP Supported MIBs Status fields.

Table 43. SNMP Supported MIBs

Field

Name

Description

Description

The RFC number if applicable and the name of the MIB.

The RFC title or MIB description.

Configure SNMP V3 Users

 To configure SNMPv3 settings for the user account:










126




7.

Select

System > SNMP > SNMP V3 > User Configuration

.

8. In the User Name list, select the user account to be configured.

The SNMP v3 Access mode field indicates the SNMPv3 access privileges for the user account. The admin account has read/write access, and all other accounts are assigned read-only access.

9. Select an Authentication Protocol radio button.

The valid Authentication Protocols are None, MD5 or SHA:

• If you select None , the user cannot access the SNMP data from an SNMP browser.

• If you select MD5 or SHA , the user login password are used as the SNMPv3 authentication password, and you must therefore specify a password, and it must be eight characters long.

This specifies the SNMPv3 Authentication Protocol setting for the selected user account.

10. Select a Encryption Protocol radio button.

The valid Encryption Protocols are None or DES:

• If you select the DES Protocol you must enter a key in the Encryption Key field.

• If None is specified for the Protocol, the Encryption Key is ignored.

This specifies the SNMPv3 Encryption Protocol setting for the selected user account.

11. If you selected DES in the Encryption Protocol field, enter the encryption key in the

SNMPv3 Encryption Key field.

If you did not select DES, this field is ignored. Valid keys are 0 to 15 characters long. You must select the Apply check box to change the Encryption Protocol and Encryption Key.




127


LLDP Overview

The IEEE 802.1AB-defined standard, Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP), allows stations on an 802 LAN to advertise major capabilities and physical descriptions. This information is viewed by a network manager to identify system topology and detect bad configurations on the LAN.

LLDP is a one-way protocol; there are no request/response sequences. Information is advertised by stations implementing the transmit function, and is received and processed by stations implementing the receive function. The transmit and receive functions can be enabled/disabled separately per port. By default, both transmit and receive are disabled on all ports. The application is responsible for starting each transmit and receive state machine appropriately, based on the configured status and operational state of the port.

The Link Layer Discovery Protocol-Media Endpoint Discovery (LLDP-MED) is an enhancement to LLDP with the following features:

• Auto-discovery of LAN policies (such as VLAN, Layer 2 Priority, and DiffServ settings), enabling plug and play networking.

• Device location discovery for creation of location databases.

• Extended and automated power management of Power over Ethernet endpoints.

• Inventory management, enabling network administrators to track their network devices and determine their characteristics (manufacturer, software and hardware versions, serial/asset number).

Configure LLDP Global Settings

You can specify LLDP parameters that are applied to the switch.

 To configure global LLDP settings:












128


7. Select System > LLDP > Global Configuration .

8. In the Transmit Interval field, enter the interval in seconds to transmit LLDP frames.

The range is from 5 to 32768 secs. The default value is 30 seconds.

9.

In the

Transmit Hold Multiplier

field, enter the multiplier on Transmit Interval to assign TTL.

The range is from 2 to 10 secs. The default value is 4.

10. In the Re-Initialization Delay field, enter the delay before re-initialization.


11.

In the

Notification Interval

field, enter the interval in seconds for transmission of notifications.



The updated configuration is sent to the switch. The changes take effect immediately but are not retained across a power cycle unless a save is performed.

Configure the LLDP Interface

 To configure the LLDP interface:

1.



3.





5.



6.

Click the

Login

button.



129


7. Select System > LLDP > Interface Configuration .

8. Use Go To Port to enter the Port in unit/slot/port format and click the Go button.

The entry corresponding to the specified Port, is selected.

9. Use Port to specify the list of ports on which LLDP - 802.1AB can be configured.

The Link Status field indicates whether the link is up or down.

10. Use Transmit to specify the LLDP - 802.1AB transmit mode for the selected interface.

11. Use Receive to specify the LLDP - 802.1AB receive mode for the selected interface.

12. Use Notify to specify the LLDP - 802.1AB notification mode for the selected interface.

13. Optional TLV(s):

• Use Port Description to include port description TLV in LLDP frames.

• Use System Name to include system name TLV in LLDP frames.

• Use System Description to include system description TLV in LLDP frames.

• Use System Capabilities to include system capability TLV in LLDP frames.

14. Use Transmit Management Information to specify whether management address is transmitted in LLDP frames for the selected interface.

View LLDP Statistics

 To view LLDP statistics:









130



6.

Click the

Login

button.


7. Select System > LLDP > Statistics .

The following table describes the LLDP Statistics fields.

Table 44. LLDP Statistics

Field

Last Update

Total Inserts

Total Deletes

Total Drops

Total Age outs

Interface

Transmit Total

Description

The time when an entry was created, modified or deleted in the tables associated with the remote system.

The number of times the complete set of information advertised by a particular MAC Service Access Point (MSAP) was inserted into tables associated with the remote systems.

The number of times the complete set of information advertised by a particular MAC Service Access Point (MSAP) was deleted from tables associated with the remote systems.

The number of times the complete set of information advertised by a particular MAC Service Access Point (MSAP) could not be entered into tables associated with the remote systems because of insufficient resources.

The number of times the complete set of information advertised by a particular MAC Service Access Point (MSAP) was deleted from tables associated with the remote systems because the information timeliness interval has expired.

The unit/slot/port for the interfaces.

The number of LLDP frames transmitted by the LLDP agent on the corresponding port.


131


Table 44. LLDP Statistics (continued)

Field

Receive Total

Discards

Errors

Age outs

TLV Discards

TLV Unknowns

TLV MED

TLV 802.1

TLV 802.3

Description

The number of valid LLDP frames received by this LLDP agent on the corresponding port, while the LLDP agent is enabled.

The number of LLDP TLVs discarded for any reason by the LLDP agent on the corresponding port.

The number of invalid LLDP frames received by the LLDP agent on the corresponding port, while the LLDP agent is enabled.

The number of age-outs that occurred on a given port. An age-out is the number of times the complete set of information advertised by a particular MAC Service Access Point (MSAP) was deleted from tables associated with the remote entries because information timeliness interval expired.

The number of LLDP TLVs discarded for any reason by the LLDP agent on the corresponding port.

The number of LLDP TLVs received on the local ports which were not recognized by the LLDP agent on the corresponding port.

The total number of LLDP-MED TLVs received on the local ports.

The total number of LLDP TLVs received on the local ports which are of type 802.1.

The total number of LLDP TLVs received on the local ports which are of type 802.3.

View LLDP Local Device Information

 To view LLDP local device information:












132


7. Select System > LLDP > Local Device Information .

8. In Interface list, select the ports on which LLDP - 802.1AB frames can be transmitted.

The following table describes the LLDP Local Device Information fields.

Table 45. LLDP Local Device Information

Field

Chassis ID Subtype

Chassis ID

Port ID Subtype

Port ID

System Name

System Description

Port Description

System Capabilities Supported

System Capabilities Enabled

Management Address Type

Management Address

Description

The string that describes the source of the chassis identifier.

The string value used to identify the chassis component associated with the local system.

The string that describes the source of the port identifier.

The string that describes the source of the port identifier.

The system name of the local system.

The description of the selected port associated with the local system.

The description of the selected port associated with the local system.

The system capabilities of the local system.

The system capabilities of the local system which are supported and enabled.

The type of the management address.

The advertised management address of the local system.


133


View LLDP Remote Device Information

You can view information on remote devices connected to the port.

 To view LLDP remote device information:











7. Select System > LLDP > Remote Device Information .

8. Use Interface to select the local ports which can receive LLDP frames.

The following table describes the LLDP Remote Device Information fields.

Table 46. LLDP Remote Device Information

Field

Remote ID

Chassis ID

Chassis ID Subtype

Port ID

Port ID Subtype

System Name

Description

The remote ID.

The chassis component associated with the remote system.

The source of the chassis identifier.

The port component associated with the remote system.

The source of port identifier.

The system name of the remote system.


134


Table 46. LLDP Remote Device Information (continued)

Field

System Description

Port Description

System Capabilities Supported

System Capabilities Enabled

Time to Live

Management Address Type

Management Address

Description

The description of the given port associated with the remote system.

The description of the given port associated with the remote system.

The system capabilities of the remote system.

The system capabilities of the remote system which are supported and enabled.

The Time To Live value in seconds of the received remote entry.

The type of the management address.

• Management Address. The advertised management address of the remote system.

• Type. The type of the management address.

View LLDP Remote Device Inventory

 To view LLDP remote device inventory:

1.



3.





5.



6.

Click the

Login

button.


7. Select System > LLDP > LLDP > Remote Device Inventory .


135


The following table describes the LLDP Remote Device Inventory fields.

Table 47. LLDP Remote Device Inventory

Field

Port

Remote Device ID

Management Address

MAC Address

System Name

Remote Port ID

Description

The list of all the ports on which LLDP frame is enabled.

The remote device ID.

The advertised management address of the remote system.

The MAC address associated with the remote system.

Specifies model name of the remote device.

The port component associated with the remote system.

Configure LLDP-MED Global Settings

You can specify LLDP-MED parameters that are applied to the switch.

 To configure LLDP-MED global settings:











7. Select System > LLDP > LLDP-MED > Global Configuration .


136


8. In the Fast Start Repeat Count field, enter the number of LLDP PDUs that are transmitted when the protocol is enabled.

The range is from (1 to 10). Default value of fast repeat count is 3.

The

Device Class

field specifies local device's MED Classification. There are four different kinds of devices, three of them represent the actual end points (classified as

Class I Generic [IP Communication Controller and so on], Class II Media [Conference

Bridge and so on], Class III Communication [IP Telephone and so on]). The fourth device is Network Connectivity Device, which is typically a LAN Switch/Router, IEEE 802.1

Bridge, IEEE 802.11 Wireless Access Point and so on

Configure LLDP-MED Interface

 To configure LLDP-MED Interface

1.



3.





5.



6.

Click the

Login

button.


7. Select System > LLDP > LLDP-MED > Interface Configuration .

The

Link Status

field displays the link status of the port (up or down).

The

Operational Status

field displays whether the LLDP-MED TLVs are transferred on this interface.


137


8. Use Go To Port to enter the Port in unit/slot/port format and click the Go button.

The entry corresponding to the specified Port, is selected.

9. Use Interface to specify the list of ports on which LLDP-MED - 802.1AB can be configured.

10. Use MED Status to specify whether LLDP-MED mode is enabled or disabled on this interface.

11. Use Notification Status to specify the LLDP-MED topology notification mode of the interface.

12. Use Transmit Type Length Values to specify which optional type length values (TLVs) in the LLDP-MED is transmitted in the LLDP PDUs frames for the selected interface:

• MED Capabilities . To transmit the capabilities TLV in LLDP frames.

• Network Policy . To transmit the network policy TLV in LLDP frames.

• Location Identification . To transmit the location TLV in LLDP frames.

• Extended Power via MDI - PSE . To transmit the extended PSE TLV in LLDP frames.

• Extended Power via MDI - PD . To transmit the extended PD TLV in LLDP frames.

• Inventory Information . To transmit the inventory TLV in LLDP frames.

View LLDP-MED Local Device Information

 To view LLDP-MED local device information:











7. Select System > LLDP > LLDP-MED > Local Device Information .


138


8. Use Interface to select the ports on which LLDP-MED frames can be transmitted.

The following table describes the LLDP-MED Local Device Information fields.L

Table 48. LDP-MED Local Device Information


Network Policy Information: Specifies if network policy TLV is present in the LLDP frames.

Media Application Type The application type. Types of application types are unknown voicesignaling

, guestvoice

, guestvoicesignalling

, softphonevoice

, videoconferencing , streammingvideo , vidoesignalling .

Each application type that is received has the VLAN ID, priority, DSCP, tagged bit status and unknown bit status. A port can receive one or many such application types.

If a network policy TLV was transmitted, only then would this information be displayed

,

Inventory: Specifies if inventory TLV is present in LLDP frames

Hardware Revision Specifies hardware version.


139


Table 48. LDP-MED Local Device Information (continued)

Field

Firmware Revision

Software Revision

Serial Number

Manufacturer Name

Model Name

Asset ID

Description

Specifies Firmware version.

Specifies Software version.

Specifies serial number.

Specifies manufacturers name.

Specifies model name.

Specifies asset ID.

Location Information: Specifies if location TLV is present in LLDP frames.

Sub Type

Location Information

Specifies type of location information.

The location information as a string for given type of location ID.

View LLDP-MED Remote Device Information

 To view LLDP-MED remote device information:











7. Select System > LLDP > LLDP-MED > Remote Device Information .


140


8. Use Interface to select the ports on which LLDP-MED is enabled.

The following table describes the LLDP-MED Remote Device Information fields.

Table 49. LLDP-MED Remote Device Information


Capability Information: The supported and enabled capabilities that was received in MED TLV on this port.

Supported Capabilities

Enabled Capabilities

Device Class

Specifies supported capabilities that was received in MED TLV on this port.

Specifies enabled capabilities that was received in MED TLV on this port.

Specifies device class as advertised by the device remotely connected to the port.

Network Policy Information: Specifies if network policy TLV is received in the LLDP frames on this port.


141


Table 49. LLDP-MED Remote Device Information (continued)

Field

Media Application Type

VLAN Id

Priority

DSCP

Unknown Bit Status

Tagged Bit Status

Description

The application type. Types of application types are unknown , voicesignaling

, guestvoice

, guestvoicesignalling

, softphonevoice

, videoconferencing , streammingvideo , vidoesignalling . Each application type that is received has the VLAN ID, priority, DSCP, tagged bit status and unknown bit status. A port can receive one or many such application types. If a network policy TLV was received on this port, only then would this information be displayed.

The VLAN ID associated with a particular policy type.

The priority associated with a particular policy type.

The DSCP associated with a particular policy type.

The unknown bit associated with a particular policy type.

The tagged bit associated with a particular policy type.

Inventory Information: Specifies if inventory TLV is received in LLDP frames on this port.

Hardware Revision

Firmware Revision

Software Revision

Serial Number

Manufacturer Name

Model Name

Asset ID

Specifies hardware version of the remote device.

Specifies Firmware version of the remote device.

Specifies Software version of the remote device.

Specifies serial number of the remote device.

Specifies manufacturers name of the remote device.


Specifies asset ID of the remote device.

Location Information: Specifies if location TLV is received in LLDP frames on this port.

Sub Type

Location Information

Specifies type of location information.

The location information as a string for given type of location ID.

Extended POE: Specifies if remote device is a PoE device.

Device Type Specifies remote device's PoE device type connected to this port.

Extended POE PSE: Specifies if extended PSE TLV is received in LLDP frame on this port

Available

Source

Priority

The remote ports PSE power value in tenths of watts.

The remote ports PSE power source.

The remote ports PSE power priority.

Extended POE PD: Specifies if extended PD TLV is received in LLDP frame on this port.

Required

Source

The remote port's PD power requirement.

The remote port's PD power source.


142


Table 49. LLDP-MED Remote Device Information (continued)

Field

Priority

Description

The remote port's PD power priority.

View LLDP-MED Remote Device Inventory

 To view LLDP-MED remote device inventory:


2.



4.









7.

Select

System > LLDP > LLDP-MED > Remote Device Inventory

.

The following table describes the LLDP-MED Remote Device Inventory fields.

Table 50. LLDP-MED Remote Device Inventory

Field

Port

Management Address

MAC Address

Definition

The list of all the ports on which LLDP-MED is enabled.

The advertised management address of the remote system.

The MAC address associated with the remote system.


143


Table 50. LLDP-MED Remote Device Inventory (continued)

Field

System Model

Software Revision

Definition


Specifies Software version of the remote device.

Configure ISDP

You can configure ISDP global and interface settings.

Configure ISDP Basic Global Settings

 To configure ISDP basic global settings:











7. Select System > ISDP > Basic > Global Configuration .


144



This specifies whether the ISDP Service is enabled or disabled. The default value is

Enabled.

9. Use Timer to specify the period of time between sending new ISDP packets.

The range is 5 to 254 seconds. The default value is 30 seconds.

10.

Use

Hold Time

to specify the hold time for ISDP packets that the switch transmits.

The hold time specifies how long a receiving device must store information sent in the

ISDP packet before discarding it. The range 10 to 255 seconds. The default value is 180 seconds.

11. Select the Version 2 Advertisements Disable or Enable radio button.

This enables or disables the sending of ISDP version 2 packets from the device. The default value is Enabled.

The following table describes the ISDP Basic Global Configuration fields.

Table 51. ISDP Basic Global Configuration


Neighbors table last time changed Specifies if

Device ID The device ID of this switch.

Device ID Format Capability

Device ID Format

The device ID format capability.

The device ID format.

Configure ISDP Global Settings

 To configure ISDP global settings:

1.



3.





5.



6.

Click the

Login

button.


145



7. Select System > ISDP > Advanced > Global Configuration .


This specifies whether the ISDP Service is enabled or disabled. The default value is

Enable.

9. In the Timer field, specify the period of time between sending new ISDP packets.

The range is 5 to 254 seconds. The default value is 30 seconds.

10. In the Hold Time field, specify the hold time for ISDP packets that the switch transmits.

The hold time specifies how long a receiving device must store information sent in the

ISDP packet before discarding it. The range 10 to 255 seconds. The default value is 180 seconds.

11. Select the Version 2 Advertisements Disable or Enable radio button.

This enables or disables the sending of ISDP version 2 packets from the device. The default value is Enable.

The following table describes the ISDP Advanced Global Configuration fields.

Table 52. ISDP Advanced Global Configuration


Neighbors table last time changed Displays when the Neighbors table last changed.

Device ID The device ID of this switch.

Device ID Format Capability

Device ID Format

The device ID format capability.

The device ID format.


146


Configure an ISDP Interface

 To configure an ISDP interface:


2.



4.









7.

Select

System > ISDP > Advanced > Interface Configuration

.

8. Use Port to select the port on which the admin mode is configured.

9. Use Admin mode to enable or disable ISDP on the port.


View an ISDP Neighbor

 To view an ISDP neighbor:




147










7. Select System > ISDP > Advanced > Neighbor .

The following table describes the ISDP Neighbor fields.

Table 53. ISDP Neighbor

Field

Device ID

Interface

Address

Capability

Platform

Port ID

Hold Time

Description

The device ID of the ISDP neighbor.

The interface on which the neighbor is discovered.

The address of the neighbor.

The capability of the neighbor. These are supported:

•

Router

• Trans Bridge

•

Source Route

• Switch

•

Host

• IGMP

•

Repeater

The model type of the neighbor. (0 to 32)

The port ID on the neighbor.

The hold time for ISDP packets that the neighbor transmits.


148


Table 53. ISDP Neighbor (continued)

Field

Advertisement Version

Entry Last Changed Time

Software Version

Description

The ISDP version sending from the neighbor.

The time since last entry is changed.

The software version on the neighbor.

View ISDP Statistics

 To view ISDP statistics:


2.



4.









7.

Select

System > ISDP > Advanced > Statistics

.


149


The following table describes the ISDP Statistics fields.

Table 54. ISDP Statistics

Field

ISDP Packets Received

ISDP Packets Transmitted

ISDPv1 Packets Received

ISDPv1 Packets Transmitted

ISDPv2 Packets Received

ISDPv2 Packets Transmitted

ISDP Bad Header

ISDP Checksum Error

ISDP Transmission Failure

ISDP Invalid Format

ISDP Table Full

ISDP Ip Address Table Full

Description

The ISDP packets received including ISDPv1 and ISDPv2 packets.

The ISDP packets transmitted including ISDPv1 and ISDPv2 packets.

The ISDPv1 packets received.

The ISDPv1 packets transmitted.

The ISDPv2 packets received.

The ISDPv2 packets transmitted.

The ISDP bad packets received.

The number of the checksum error.

The number of the transmission failure.

The number of the invalid format ISDP packets received.

The table size of the ISDP table.

The table size of the ISDP IP address table.

Timer Schedule

You can configure the global timer settings and the timer schedule.

Configure the Global Timer Settings

 To configure the global timer settings:










150




7.

Select

System > Timer Schedule > Basic > Global Configuration

.

8. Use the Timer Schedule Name to specify the name of a timer schedule.


The timer is added. The configuration changes take effect immediately.

10. To delete the selected timer schedules, click the Delete button.

The configuration changes take effect immediately.

Configure the Timer Schedule

 To configure the timer schedule:












151


7. Select System > Services > Timer Schedule > Advanced > Schedule Configuration .

8. In the Timer Schedule Name list, select the timer schedule.

9. In the Timer Schedule Type list, select Absolute or Periodic .

10. In the Timer Schedule Entry list, select the number of the timer schedule entries to be configured or added.

If you are adding an entry, select new .

11. In the Time Start field, enter the time of the day in format (HH:MM) when the schedule operation is started.

This field is required. If no time is specified, the schedule does not start running.

12. In the Time End field, enter the time of the day in format (HH:MM) when the schedule operation is terminated.

13. Use the Date Start to set the schedule start date.

If no date is specified, the schedule starts running immediately.

14. Use the Date Stop to set the schedule termination date.

If No End Date selected, the schedule operates indefinitely.

15. Use the Recurrence Pattern to show with what period the event repeats.

If recurrence is not needed (a timer schedule must be triggered just once), then set Date

Stop as equal to Date Start. There are the following possible values of recurrence:

• Daily . The timer schedule works with daily recurrence

Daily mode . Every WeekDay selection means that the schedule is triggered every day from Monday to Friday. Every Day(s) selection means that the schedule is triggered every defined number of days. If number of days is not specified, then the schedule is triggered every day.

• Weekly . The timer schedule works with weekly recurrence


152


Every Week(s) . Define the number of weeks when the schedule is triggered. If number of weeks is not specified, then the schedule is triggered every week.

WeekDay . Specify the days of week when the schedule operates.

• Monthly

. The timer schedule works with monthly recurrence

Monthly mode

. Show the day of the month when the schedule is triggered. Field

Every Month(s) means that the schedule is triggered every defined number of months.

16.

Click the

Apply

button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. The configuration changes take effect immediately.


153

3.

Chassis and Stacking

3

The chassis features apply only to the M6100 series switches. Stacking features apply only to the M5300 series switches


•

M6100 Series Switch Chassis Overview

•

M5300 Series Switch Stacking Overview

154


M6100 Series Switch Chassis Overview

You can move the primary management unit (supervisor) functionality from one blade to another. When this change is applied, the entire chassis (including all interfaces in the chassis) is unconfigured and reconfigured with the configuration on the new primary management unit. After the reload is complete, all chassis management capability must be performed on the new primary management unit. To preserve the current configuration across a chassis move, save the current configuration to the NVRAM before performing the chassis move. A chassis move causes all routes and Layer 2 addresses to be lost. The system prompts the administrator to confirm the management move before the changes are applied.

Configure Basic Chassis Settings

 To configure the global status management mode and sample size:

1.



3.





5.



6.

Click the

Login

button.



155


7. Select System > Chassis > Basic > Chassis Configuration .

Note: You can also navigate to this screen by selecting Advanced >

Chassis Configuration .

8. Select the Management Unit .

This field displays the current primary management unit. You can change it by selecting another blade ID listed here.

9. Click the Apply button to send the updated configuration to the switch.

Configuration changes take effect immediately.

Note: The Move Management operation might cause a change in the system

IP address when the IP address is assigned by a DHCP server.

10. Select the Chassis Sample Mode .

The global status management mode, which can be one of the following:

• Cumulative. This tracks the sum of received time-stamp offsets cumulatively.

• History . This tracks the history of received timestamps.

11. Enter a value for Max Samples – the maximum number of samples to keep.

The valid range is 100 to 500. Max Samples applies to History mode.


The updated configuration is sent to the switch. The mode and sample size parameters are applied globally to all units in the chassis. Configuration changes take effect immediately.

13. Select the Unit ID from the displayed list of blades.

14. Specify the Switch Type .

This specifies the type of blade hardware when you are creating a new blade in the chassis.


156


15. Select the Management Status. Indicates whether the selected switch is the management unit, or a normal chassis member, or on standby.

16.

Click the

Apply

button.

The system prompts you to confirm the management move. Upon administrator confirmation, the entire chassis, including all interfaces in the chassis, is unconfigured and reconfigured with the configuration on the new primary management unit.

Configuration changes take place immediately.

17.

After the reload is complete, all chassis management capability must be performed on the new primary management unit.

To refresh the screen with the latest information on the switch, click the Update button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields on the Chassis Configuration section.

Table 55. Chassis Configuration section

Field

Hardware Management

Preference

Standby Status

Switch Status

Description

The hardware management preference of the blade. The hardware management preference can be disabled or unassigned.

Identifies the switch that is configured as the standby unit. The possible values are as follows:

• Cfg Standby . Indicates that the blade is configured as the standby blade. The blade configured as the Standby blade becomes the supervisor if the current supervisor fails.

• Opr Standby

. Indicates that this blade is operating as the standby.

The status of the selected unit. The possible values are as follows:

•

OK

• Unsupported

•

Code Mismatch

• Config Mismatch

•

Not Present

• SDM Mismatch

•

Updating Code

The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields displayed in the Basic Chassis

Status.

Table 56. Basic Chassis Status section

Field

Unit ID

Switch Description

Serial Number

Uptime

Description

The unit ID of the specific blade.

The description for the blade that can be configured by the user.

The unique box serial number for this blade.

The relative time since the last reboot of the blade.


157


Table 56. Basic Chassis Status section

Field

Plugged-in Model Identifier

Detected Code Version

Detected Code in Flash

SFS Last Attempt Status

Description

The model type assigned by the device manufacturer to identify the plugged-in device.

Indicates the detected version of code on this blade.

The release number and version number of the code stored in flash.

The stack firmware synchronization last attempt status.

View the Chassis Protocol Information

 To view chassis protocol information:












158


7. Select System > Chassis > Advanced > Chassis Status .

8.

Select either the

Unit ID

or

All

.

•

Select the

Unit ID to display information for the selected unit.

• Select All to display information for all units.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable Advanced Chassis Status data that is displayed.

Table 57. Advanced Chassis Status

Field

Unit ID

Neighbor Unit ID

Current

Average

Min

Max

Dropped

Description


The neighboring blade with which data is exchanged.

Current time of heartbeat message reception.

Average time of heartbeat messages received.

Minimum time of heartbeat messages received.

Maximum time of heartbeat messages received.

Heartbeat messages dropped or lost counter.

 To clear the sampling information:


2.




159









7. Click System > Chassis > Advanced > Chassis Status .

8. In the Clear sampling information > Clear counters field, select the unit to clear the counters.

Possible choices are None , a unit ID number, or All .

9. To display watchdog status, scroll down to the Watchdog Status section.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable Watchdog Status data that is displayed.

Table 58. Watchdog Status

Field

Unit ID

Watchdog Counter

Description


The watchdog reset counter for the corresponding unit.


160


View Chassis Backplane-Port Configuration

 To view backplane-port configuration:


2.



4.









7.

Select

System

>

Chassis > Advanced > Backplane-port Configuration.

8. Select either the Unit ID or All .

• Select the Unit ID to display information for the selected unit.


The following table describes the nonconfigurable Backplane-port Configuration data that is displayed.

Table 59. Backplane-Port Configuration

Field

Unit ID

Port

Link Status

Link Speed (Gbps)

Description


The backplane-port on the given blade.

The link status (Up/Down) of the port.

The maximum speed of the backplane-port.


161


Table 59. Backplane-Port Configuration (continued)

Field

Transmit Data Rate (Mbps)

Transmit Error Rate (Error/s)

Total Transmit Errors

Receive Data Rate (Mbps)

Receive Error Rate (Error/s)

Total Receive Errors

Link Flaps

Description

The approximate transmit rate on the backplane-port.

The number of errors in transmit packets per second.

The total number of errors in transmit packets since bootup. The counter might wrap.

The approximate receive rate on the backplane-port.

The number of errors in receive packets per second.

The total number of errors in receive packets since bootup. The counter might wrap.

Displays a backplane-port counter that increments whenever a backplane-port link transitions to the down state.

View the Chassis Backplane-Port Packet-Path

You can view low-level statistics such as APT counts and RPC counts, and so on for all the backplane-ports in the given chassis.

 To view the backplane-port packet-path:












162


7. Select System > Chassis > Advanced > Backplane-port Diagnostics .

8. Select either the Unit ID or All .



9. Select System > Chassis > Advanced > Backplane-port Diagnostics to display the

Blackplane-port packet-path fields.

10. To navigate, select either the Unit ID or All .

• Select the Unit ID to display the packet path starting from the selected blade.

• Select All to display the packet path starting from all the blades of the chassis.


The following table describes the nonconfigurable Backplane-port Diagnostics data that is displayed.

Table 60. Backplane-Port Diagnostics

Field

Unit ID

Port

Port Diagnostics Info

Description

The slot number of the blade.

The backplane-port on the given blade.

Displays three text fields (character strings) populated by the driver containing debug and status information. The port

Diagnostics information contains hardware counters; counter values are displayed in hexadecimal digits.


163


The following table describes the nonconfigurable Backplane-port packet-path data that is displayed.

Table 61. Backplane-port Packet-path

Field

Direction

Packet-path

Description

The path direction.

The packet path.

Configure the Chassis Power Settings

 To configure the chassis power settings:











7. Click System > Chassis > Advanced > Chassis Power Configuration .

8. Select the Power Module Redundancy Enable or Disable radio button.

This specifies whether power redundancy mode is enabled or disabled.



164


If you enabled this feature, power redundancy mode is applied.

Configure the System Power

 To configure the system power:

1.



3.





5.



6.

Click the

Login

button.


7. Click System > Chassis > Advanced > Chassis Power Configuration .

8. To configure system power, in the System Power field, specify the power reserved for the system, excluding PoE power.

This provides a way to reserve power for blades. The remaining power can be used by a

PoE sub system. System Power must be less than or equal to 2550W. Use 0 to reset

System Power to defaults.


The system power is applied.


165


Configure the Power Auto-Rebalance

 To configure the power auto-rebalance:











7. Select System > Chassis > Advanced > Chassis Power Configuration .

8. In the Power Auto-rebalance field, specify whether power auto-rebalance mode is Enabled or Disabled .


Power is applied in auto-rebalance mode. When enabled, the system automatically shuts down low priority ports to power up higher priority ports, even if they were spread across different blades on the chassis.


166


The following table describes the nonconfigurable Chassis Power Configuration data that is displayed.

Table 62. Chassis Power Configuration

Field

Total Available Power

Total Required System Power

Total Power Consumption

Power Module AC Input

Description

Total available power for chassis in watts.

Total required system power in watts. The value depends on the type of blades on the chassis. Refer to the Power Matrix or Blade

Power Consumption table for power requirements of each blade type.

Total power consumption in watts measured at PSU.

Power module input voltage in volts. Possible values are 110 and

220.

View Blade Power Consumption

 To view blade power consumption:


2.



4.









7.

Select

System > Chassis > Advanced > Chassis Power Configuration

.


167


The following table describes the Blade Power Consumption data that is displayed.

Table 63. Chassis Power Modules

Field

Unit ID

Blade Type

Blade Model

Current Power Consumption

Blade Power Required

Blade Status

Description

The unit ID that identifies the blade slot.

Displays blade type number.

Displays blade model.

Displays amount of power required by blade (excluding PoE power) in watts.

Displays amount of power required by blade (excluding PoE power) in watts.

Displays blade status. The possible values are as follows:

• OK

• Booting up

• Bootup Failed

• Thermal Shutdown

• SW Power Down

• Not Enough Power

• Unknown Blade

• Absent

View Power Redundancy

 To view power redundancy:













168


The Chassis Power Configuration screen displays.

8. Scroll down to the Power Redundancy section.

The following table describes the Power Redundancy data that is displayed.

Table 64. Power Redundancy

FIeld

N+1 Configuration

N+1 Active

Number of PSU

Effective Power

Description

Power redundancy configuration. Possible values are Enable and

Disable

.

Displays whether power supply N+1 redundancy is active on the chassis.

Total number of active PSUs in chassis.

Effective number of PSUs in the chassis after factoring N+1 active state. The value is one less than number of PSU when N+1 is active on the chassis.

View the Power Modules

 To view the power modules:

1.



3.





5.



169





7. Select System > Chassis > Advanced > Chassis Power Configuration


Scroll down to the Power Module section..

The following table describes the nonconfigurable Power Module data that is displayed.

Table 65. Power Modules

Field

Slot

Type

State

AC

Description

Power module number counted from left to right.

Power module type. Valid values are

Fixed

and

Removable

.

Power module state. Possible states are as follows:

• Operational

• Failed

• Not Present

• Not Powered

• Not Applicable

Power module input voltage category in volts. Possible values are

110V

,

220V

, and

N/A

.

N/A

specifies that power source input voltage cannot be obtained.

View EPS Power Modules and EPS Ports

 To display EPS ports:







170








7.

Select

System > Chassis > Advanced > Chassis Power Configuration

.


8. Scroll down to the EPS Power Module section.

9. Scroll down to the EPS Ports section..

The following tables describes the EPS power module data and the EPS ports data that is displayed.

Table 66. EPS Power Modules

Field

Slot

Type

State

AC

Description

EPS power module number counted from left to right.

EPS power module type. Valid value is Removable.

EPS power module state. Possible states are as follows:

• Operational

• Not Present

EPS power module input voltage category in volts. Possible values are 110V , 220V , and N/A . N/A specifies that power source input voltage cannot be obtained.


171


The following table describes the non configurable EPS Ports data that is displayed.

Table 67. EPS Ports

Field

Ports

State

Sharing Status

Device Type

EPS/RPS Port Group

Description

EPS port number counted from left to right while facing rear side of the chassis.

EPS port state. Possible state is Not present or Operational .

EPS power sharing status.

Device type. Possible values are as follows:

• RPS4000v1

• RPS4000v2

• Unknown

Group of EPS slots connected to this port. Possible values are as follows:

• 1,2

• 3,4

View the Power Matrix

 To view the power matrix:














172


8. Scroll down to the Power Matrix section.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable Power Matrix data that is displayed.

Table 68. Power Matrix

Field

Blade Type

Blade Model

Power Required

Description

The 4-bit identification number assigned to a blade.

Blade model.

Maximum consumption by blade in watts (excluding PoE power).

Rebalance the Chassis Power

 To rebalance the chassis power:











7. Select System > Chassis > Advanced > Chassis Power Rebalance .

8. Select the check box.


173



The low-priority PD device powers down until enough power is obtained to power up a new blade or higher-priority PoE port on a different blade.

Configure Chassis Firmware Synchronization

 To configure chassis firmware synchronization:











7. Select System > Chassis > Advanced > Chassis Firmware Synchronization .

8. Select the Chassis Firmware Auto Upgrade Disable or Enable radio button.

This specifies whether the firmware synchronization feature enabled or disabled. The default is Disable.

9. Select the Traps Disable or Enable radio button.

This enables or disables the sending of traps during chassis firmware synchronization start, failure, and finish. The default is Enable.

10. Select the Allow Downgrade Disable or Enable radio button.

This enables or disables downgrading the image on a chassis member if the chassis member’s version is newer. The default is Enable.


174





View NSF Summary Data

 To display NSF Summary data:

1.



3.





5.



6.

Click the

Login

button.


7. Navigate to the NSF Summary screen:

• For M6100 switches, select System > Chassis > NSF > NSF Summary .


175


• For M5300 and M7100 switches, select System > Stacking > NSF > NSF Summary .

8. To cause the supervisor unit to fail over to the backup blade, click the Initiate Failover button on the top right corner of the screen.


The following table describes the nonconfigurable NSF Summary data that is displayed.

Table 69. NSF Summary

Field

Operational Status

Last Startup Reason

Description

Indicates whether NSF is enabled on the chassis. NSF is enabled by default.

The type of activation that caused the software to start the last time. The possible values are as follows:

• Power On

. The switch is rebooted. A power cycle or an administrative reload command might caused this

• Cold Admin Move

. The system resets all hardware tables without a reboot and the application begins from a pre-initialized state, but no data is retained from before the failover.

• Warm Admin Move

. The administrator issued a command for the standby manager to take over.

• Auto Warm

. The primary management card restarted due to a failure, and the system executed a nonstop forwarding failover.

• Auto Cold

. The system switched from the active manager to the backup manager and could not maintain user data traffic.

This is usually caused by multiple failures occurring close together.


176


Table 69. NSF Summary (continued)

Field

Time Since Last Restart

Restart In Progress

Warm Restart Ready

Description

Time since the current management card because the active management card. For the backup manager, the value is set to

0d:00:00:00.

Indicates whether a restart is in progress. A restart is not considered complete until all hardware tables are fully reconciled.

Indicates whether the initial full checkpoint finished.

Copy of Running Configuration to Backup Unit

Status

Backup Configuration Age

Time Until Next Backup

Status of copying the running configuration to backup blades.

Indicates the time since the running configuration was last copied to the backup blade.

Indicates the number of seconds until the running configuration is copied to the backup blade.

NSF Support on Unit

Unit ID

NSF Support

The slot number for the blade.

Displays whether the switch supports the nonstop forwarding

(NSF) feature.

View NSF Checkpoint Statistics

 To view NSF checkpoint statistics:


2.



4.










177


7. Select System > Chassis > NSF > Checkpoint Statistics .

To reset the statistics on the screen, click the Clear button.


The following table describes the nonconfigurable data that is displayed.

Table 70. NSF Checkpoint Statistics


Messages Checkpoint

Bytes Checkpointed

The number of messages sent from the supervisor to the backup blade.

How much data was sent from the supervisor until to the backup blade.

Time Since Counters Cleared

Checkpoint Message Rate

The amount of time since the counters were reset.

The number of seconds between measurements.

Last 10-second Message Rate How many messages were sent in the last measurement interval.

Highest 10-second Message Rate The highest number of messages that were sent in a measurement interval.

M5300 Series Switch Stacking Overview

A stackable switch is a switch that is fully functional operating as a stand-alone unit but can also be set-up to operate together with up to seven other switches. This group of switches shows the characteristics of a single switch while having the port capacity of the sum of the combined switches.

One of the switches in the stack controls the operation of the stack. This switch is called the stack

master

. The remaining switches in the stack are stack

members

. The stack members use stacking technology to behave and work together as a unified system. Layer 2 and higher protocols present the entire switch stack as a single entity to the network.

The stack master is the single point of stack-wide management. From the stack master, you configure the following:

• System-level (global) features that apply to all stack members


178


• Interface-level features for all interfaces on any stack member

A switch stack is identified in the network by its network IP address. The network IP address is assigned according to the MAC address of the stack master. Every stack member is uniquely identified by its own stack member number, which is from 1 to 6. The stack master can be any number within that range.

Stacking supports the following:

•

Up to eight switches per stack, which can be any combination of the following switch models:

-

M6100

M7100

-

M5300

• Single IP address management through a web browser, the CLI, or SNMP.

•

Master-slave configuration:

• The master retains configuration for entire stack.

•

Automatic detection of new members, with synchronization of firmware (upgrade or downgrade as needed).

•

Configuration updates across the stack through a single operation.

• Automatic master failover. Fully resilient stack with chain and ring topology.

•

Hot swapping (insertion and removal) of stack members.

Firmware Synchronization and Upgrade

All stack members must run the same software version to ensure compatibility within the stack. By default, if a unit is added to the stack and its software version is not the same as the stack master, that unit is not allowed to join the stack. You can enable the Stack Firmware

Auto Upgrade feature, which automatically synchronizes the firmware version on the new unit with the version running on the stack master. The synchronization operation might result in either upgrade or downgrade of firmware on the mismatched stack member.

Upgrading the firmware on a stack of switches is the same as upgrading the firmware on a single switch. After you download a new image by using the File Download screen or SCC, the downloaded image is distributed to all the connected units of the stack.

Note: NETGEAR recommends that you set the active image for all stack members the same as the active image of the stack master. In other words, if image1 is the active image on the stack master, all units must use image1 as the active image. For information about configuring the active image, see

Configure Dual Image Settings

on page 729.


179


Stack Configuration Maintenance

The stack master stores and maintains the saved and running configuration files for the switch stack. The configuration files include the system-level settings for the switch stack and the interface-level settings for all stack members. Each stack member retains a copy of the saved file for backup purposes. If the master is removed from the stack or becomes unavailable, another member is elected master and then runs from that saved configuration.

The switch master copies its running configuration to the stack member configured as the

standby

unit whenever it changes (subject to some restrictions to reduce overhead). This enables the standby unit to take over the stack operation with minimal interruption if the stack master becomes unavailable. The running-config synchronization also occurs when the running configuration is auto-saved on the stack master or when the standby unit changes.

Stack Master Election

All stack members are eligible stack masters. If the stack master becomes unavailable, the remaining stack members participate in electing a new stack master from among themselves.

The following factors determine which switch is elected the stack master:

• The switch that is master always has priority to retain the role of master.

• Assigned priority.

• MAC address.

When the stack is powered up and completes the boot process or the original stack master becomes unavailable, the stack master is determined through an election process.

The rules for stack master election are as follows:

• If a unit was elected stack master previously, then it remains the stack master and other units are stack members.

• If no units were stack masters, or more than one unit was a stack master, then the unit with the highest management preference is elected stack master. The management preference can be assigned by the administrator. However, if all units are assigned the same management preference, then the unit with the highest MAC address is assigned as the stack master.

Stack Factory Defaults Reset Behavior

If the stack master is reset to the factory default settings (see

Reset the Switch to Its Factory

Default Settings

on page 716), the stack master applies the default settings to all the stack members and resets the stack, including all participating stack members. When the stack boots, the stack master election process begins.

A switch can be described in terms of three semi-independent functions called the forwarding plane, the control plane, and the management plane. The forwarding plane forwards data packets. The forwarding plane is implemented in hardware. The control plane is the set of protocols that determine how the forwarding plane forwards packets, deciding which data packets are allowed to be forwarded and where they go. Application software on the


180

M6100, M5300, and M7100 Series Managed Switches management unit acts as the control plane. The management plane is application software running on the management unit that provides interfaces allowing a network administrator to configure and monitor the device.

Stack NSF

Nonstop forwarding (NSF) allows the forwarding plane of stack units to continue to forward packets while the control and management planes restart as a result of a power failure, hardware failure, or software fault on the management unit. A nonstop forwarding failover can also be manually initiated by clicking the Initiate Failover button on the NSF Summary screen. Traffic flows that enter and exit the stack through physical ports on a unit other than the management continue with at most sub-second interruption when the management unit fails.

To prepare the backup management unit in case of a failover, applications on the management unit continuously checkpoint some state information to the backup unit.

Changes to the running configuration are automatically copied to the backup unit. MAC addresses stay the same across a nonstop forwarding failover so that neighbors are not required to relearn them.

When a nonstop forwarding failover occurs, the control plane on the backup unit starts from a partially initialized state and applies the checkpointed state information. While the control plane is initializing, the stack cannot react to external changes, such as network topology changes. Once the control plane is fully operational on the new management unit, the control plane ensures that the hardware state is updated as necessary. Control plane failover time depends on the size of the stack, the complexity of the configuration, and the speed of the

CPU.

The management plane restarts when a failover occurs. Management connections must be reestablished.

For NSF to be effective, adjacent networking devices must not reroute traffic around the restarting device. The switch uses three techniques to prevent traffic from being rerouted:

•

A protocol can distribute a part of its control plane to stack units so that the protocol can give the appearance that it is still functional during the restart. Spanning tree and port channels use this technique.

• A protocol can enlist the cooperation of its neighbors through a technique known as graceful restart. OSPF uses graceful restart if it is enabled.

• A protocol can restart after the failover if neighbors react slowly enough that they cannot normally detect the outage. The IP multicast routing protocols are a good example of this behavior.

To take full advantage of nonstop forwarding, Layer 2 connections to neighbors must be through port channels that span two or more stack units, and Layer 3 routes must be ECMP routes with next hops through physical ports on two or more units. The hardware can quickly move traffic flows from port channel members or ECMP paths on a failed unit to a surviving unit.


181


Stack Configuration

You can move the primary management unit functionality from one unit to another. Upon execution, the entire stack (including all interfaces in the stack) is unconfigured and reconfigured with the configuration on the new primary management unit. After the reload is complete, all stack management capability must be performed on the new primary management unit. To preserve the current configuration across a stack move, save the current configuration to the NVRAM before performing the stack move. A stack move causes all routes and Layer 2 addresses to be lost. The administrator is prompted to confirm the management move.

Select a New Stack Master

 To select a new stack master:











7. Select System > Stacking > Basic > Stack Configuration .


182


The Management Unit Selected menu displays the current primary management unit.

8. To change the primary management unit, select another unit ID of the stack member to become the stack master.

A message displays to notify you that moving stack management unconfigures the entire stack including all interfaces.

9. Click the OK button to confirm the selection and reload the stack.

The stack is unavailable until the boot process completes.

Specify the Stack Sample Mode

Use the Stack Sample mode section of the screen to configure global status management mode, and sample size. The mode and sample size parameters are applied globally to all units in the stack.

In the Sample mode list, select one of the following:

• Cumulative . Tracks the sum of received time-stamp offsets cumulatively.

• History . Tracks the history of received timestamps.

In the Max Samples field, configure the maximum number of samples to keep. The valid range is 100 to 500.

Configure a Stack Member

 To configure a stack member before adding it to the stack:





183









7. Select System > Stacking > Stack Configuration .

8. Select the Unit ID of the stack member to add.

9. Select the switch model number of the new unit from the Switch Type field.

10. Optionally, specify the Switch Priority to select whether this unit becomes a management unit in preference to another unit.

The default value for this setting is undefined. If the preference level is set to zero, then the device cannot become a management unit. A higher value indicates a higher priority.

The maximum value is 15.

11. Use the Management Status field to indicate whether the selected switch is the stack master, a normal stacking member, or the standby unit.

A standby unit takes over the stack master responsibilities if the stack master becomes unavailable.


The preconfigured unit is added to the stack.


184


 To change the settings for an existing stack member:

1. Select the check box next to the stack member to configure.

2.

If desired, specify a new unit ID for the stack member in the

Change to Switch ID

field.

The renumbering process causes the unit to reload.

3. Specify the switch type, priority, or management status from the available fields.

4.

Click the

Apply

button.

The changes to the stack member are saved.

Note: If you configured a new unit number for an existing stack member, you are asked to confirm the change. Click the

OK

button to continue or click the Cancel button to retain the original settings.

5. Click the Delete button to remove the selected unit from the stack.

6.

Click

Refresh

to update the screen with the latest information from the switch.

Note: In the case of adding or removing a dummy unit with POE for preconfiguration, you must log in again to an actual web session to apply changes and observe relevant POE web pages.


This adds the unit to the stack with the specific switch type.

8.

To remove the selected unit from the stack, click the

Delete

button.




The following table describes the nonconfigurable Stack Configuration fields.

Table 71. Stack Configuration

Field

Hardware Management

Preference

Description

The hardware management preference of the switch. The hardware management preference can be disabled or unassigned.


185


Table 71. Stack Configuration (continued)


Standby Status

Switch Status

Identifies the switch that is configured as the standby unit. The possible values are as follows:

• Cfg Standby . Indicates that the unit is configured as the standby unit.

The unit configured as the standby switch becomes the stack manager if the current manager fails.

• Opr Standby

. Indicates that this unit is operating as the standby unit and the configured standby unit is not part of the stack.

• None

. The switch is not configured as the standby unit.

The status of the selected unit. The possible values are as follows:

• OK

•

Unsupported

• Code Mismatch

•

Config Mismatch

• Not Present

The following table describes the nonconfigurable Stack Status information that is displayed.

Table 72. Stack Status nonconfigurable fields

Field

Hardware Management

Preference

Standby Status

Switch Status

Unit ID

Switch Description

Serial Number

Description

The hardware management preference of the switch, which can be disabled or unassigned.

Identifies the switch that is configured as the standby unit:

• Cfg Standb y. The unit is configured as the standby unit. The unit configured as the standby switch becomes the stack manager if the current manager fails.

• Opr Standb y. This unit is operating as the standby unit and the configured standby Unit is not part of the stack.

• None . The switch is not configured as the standby unit.

The status of the selected unit. Possible values are as follows:

• OK

. The unit is connected and works properly.

• Unsupported . The type of inserted unit is not supported.

• Code Mismatch

. The code version is not identical to the master/management unit.

• Config Mismatch

. The inserted device type is different from the configured devices.

• Not Present

. The unit is not connected.

• SDM Mismatch . SDM template mismatch.

• Updating Code

. A code update is in progress.

• STM Mismatch . STM template mismatch.

The unit ID of the specific switch.

The description for the unit that is configured by the user.

The unique box serial number for this switch.


186


Table 72. Stack Status nonconfigurable fields (continued)

Field

Up Time

Preconfigured Model Identifier

Plugged-In Model Identifier

Detected Code Version

Detected Code in Flash

SFS Last Attempt Status

Description

The relative time since the last reboot of the switch.

The model type assigned by the device manufacturer to identify the device.

The model type assigned by the device manufacturer to identify the plugged-in device.

The detected version of code on this unit.

The release number and version number of the code stored in flash.

The stack firmware synchronization last attempt status.

View the Stack Status

 To view the stack status:


2.



4.









7.

Select

System > Stacking > Advanced > Stack Status

.


187


8. Select the units.



9. To refresh the screen with the latest information on the switch, click the Update button.

10. To clear the sampling information, in the Clear Counters list, select the unit.

The following table displays the nonconfigurable information.

Table 73. Stack Status

Field

Unit ID

Neighbor Unit ID

Current

Average

Min

Max

Dropped

Description

The unit ID of the specific switch.

The neighboring unit with which data is exchanged.

The current time of heartbeat message reception.

The average time of heartbeat messages received.

Minimum time of heartbeat messages received.

Maximum time of heartbeat messages received.

Heartbeat message dropped/lost counter.

Configure the mode of the Stack Ports

By default, the stack ports on each switch are configured for stacking. However, you can use these ports as standard Ethernet ports. Use the Stack Port Configuration screen to configure the mode of the stack ports and to view information about the ports.

 To configure the mode of the stack ports:



188



3.





5.



6.

Click the

Login

button.


7. Select System > Stacking > Advanced > Stack Port Configuration .

The screen is shown in two parts.

8. Select the check box associated with the unit and port to configure:

9. From the Configured Stack mode field, select the operating mode of the port to be either:

• Stack . The port connects to the stack port on another stack member. This is the default value for back panel stack mode.

• Ethernet . The port operates as a standard switch port that receives and transmits network traffic. This is the default value for front panel stack mode.

10. Click the Apply button to apply the new settings to the system.



189


The following table describes Stack Port Configuration fields.

Table 74. Stack Port Configuration

Field

Unit ID

Port

Slot ID

Type

Product Name

Running Stack mode

Link Status

Link Speed (Gbps)

Transmit Data Rate (Mbps)

Transmit Error Rate

Total Transmit Errors

Receive Data Rate (Mbps)

Receive Error Rate

Total Receive Errors

Link Flaps

Description

The unit.

The stackable interfaces on the given unit.

The slot ID in the format unit/slot.

The type of stackable interfaces on the given unit.

The name of the XFP/SFP+ adapter.

The run-time mode of the stackable interface.

The link status (UP/DOWN) of the port.

The maximum speed of the stacking port.

The approximate transmit rate on the stacking port.

The number of errors in transmit packets per second.

The total number of errors in transmit packets since boot. The counter might wrap.

The approximate receive rate on the stacking port.

The number of errors in receive packets per second.

The total number of errors in receive packets since boot. The counter might wrap.

The total number of link flaps.

Run Stack Port Diagnostics

 To run stack port diagnostics:









190



6.

Click the

Login

button.


7. Select System > Stacking > Advanced > Stack Port Diagnostics .

8. Select Unit ID to display the packet path starting from the selected unit.

9. Select All to display the packet path from all the units in the stack.

10. To refresh the screen with the latest information on the switch, click the Update button.

The following table describes the Stack Port Diagnostics fields.

Table 75. Stack Port Diagnostics

Field

Unit ID

Port

Port Diagnostics Info

Definition

The unit.

The stackable interface on the given unit.

Displays three text fields (80 character strings) populated by the driver containing debug and status information.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable Stack Port Packet Path fields.

Table 76. Stack Port Packed Path

Field

Direction

Packet Path

Definition

The path direction.

The packet path.


191


Configure Stack Firmware Synchronization

 To configure the stack firmware synchronization features:











7. Select System > Stacking > Advanced > Stack Firmware Synchronization .

8. Specify whether Stack Firmware Auto Upgrade is enabled or disabled.

This feature determines what to do when a new member attempts to join the stack, and its firmware does not match the version running on the master.

• Enable . The stack master upgrades the version on the new member to match the version running on the rest of the stack.

• Disable . The new member is not allowed to join.

9. Use the Traps field to enable or disable sending of traps during stack firmware synchronization start, failure, or finish.


192


10. Use the Allow Downgrade field to determine whether the stack master downgrades the firmware version on a new member that attempts to join the stack if the new member has a firmware version that is more recent that the stack.

11.

Click the

Apply

button.


To refresh the screen with the latest information on the switch, click the

Update

button.


193

4.

Configure Switching Information

4


•

Configure VLANs

•

Auto-VoIP

•

iSCSI Overview

•

Spanning Tree Protocol

•

Multicast

•

Configure MVR

•

MAC Address Table

•

Port Settings

•

Link Aggregation Groups

•

Multiple Registration Protocol Overview

194


Configure VLANs

Adding virtual LAN (VLAN) support to a Layer 2 switch offers some of the benefits of both bridging and routing. Like a bridge, a VLAN switch forwards traffic based on the Layer 2 header, which is fast, and like a router, it partitions the network into logical segments, which provides better administration, security, and management of multicast traffic.

By default, all ports on the switch are in the same broadcast domain. VLANs electronically separate ports on the same switch into separate broadcast domains so that broadcast packets are not sent to all the ports on a single switch. When you use a VLAN, users can be grouped by logical function instead of physical location.

Each VLAN in a network is assigned an associated VLAN ID, which appears in the IEEE

802.1Q tag in the Layer 2 header of packets transmitted on a VLAN. An end station can omit the tag, or the VLAN portion of the tag, in which case the first switch port to receive the packet can either reject it or insert a tag using its default VLAN ID. A given port can handle traffic for more than one VLAN, but it can support only one default VLAN ID.

You can define VLAN groups stored in the VLAN membership table. Each switch in the

M6100/M7100/M5300 family supports up to 1024 VLANs. VLAN 1 is created by default and is the default VLAN of which all ports are members.

Configure Basic VLAN Settings

The internal VLAN is reserved by a port-based routing interface and invisible to the end user.

Once these internal VLANs are allocated by the port-based routing interface, they cannot be assigned to a routing VLAN interface.

 To configure internal VLAN settings:


2.



4.










195


7. Select Switching

 > VLAN > Basic > VLAN Configuration .

8. To reset VLAN settings to their default values, select the Reset Configuration check box.

The factory default values are as follows:

• All ports are assigned to the default VLAN of 1.

• All ports are configured with a PVID of 1.

• All ports are configured to an Acceptable Frame Types value of Admit All Frames.

• All ports are configured with Ingress Filtering disabled.

• All ports are configured to transmit only untagged frames.

• GVRP is disabled on all ports and all dynamic entries are cleared.

All VLANs, except for the default VLAN, are deleted.

9. Specify the internal VLAN settings.

The Internal VLAN Configuration section displays the allocation base and the allocation mode of internal VLAN.

a.

Use Internal VLAN Allocation Base to specify the VLAN allocation base for the routing interface.

The default base range of the internal VLAN is 1 to 4093.

b. Select the Internal VLAN Allocation Policy Ascending or Descending radio button.

This specifies a policy for the internal VLAN allocation.

10. Use VLAN ID to specify the VLAN identifier for the new VLAN.

The range of the VLAN ID is 1 to 4093.

11. Use the optional VLAN Name field to specify a name for the VLAN.

The VLAN name can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters long, including blanks. The default is blank. VLAN ID 1 always uses the name Default.


196


The VLAN Type field identifies the type of the VLAN you are configuring. You cannot change the type of the default VLAN (VLAN ID = 1): it is always type Default. When you create a VLAN using this screen, its type is always Static. A VLAN that is created by

GVRP registration initially uses a type of Dynamic. When configuring a dynamic VLAN, you can change its type to Static.


The VLAN is added to the switch.

13.

To delete a selected VLAN from the switch, click the

Delete

button .



Configure an Advanced VLAN

 To configure an advanced VLAN:

1.



3.





5.



6.

Click the

Login

button.



 > VLAN > Advanced > VLAN Configuration .


197


8. Reset Configuration - If you select this button and confirm your selection on the next screen, all VLAN configuration parameters are reset to their factory default values.

Also, all VLANs, except for the default VLAN, are deleted. The factory default values are as follows:

• All ports are assigned to the default VLAN of 1.

• All ports are configured with a PVID of 1.

• All ports are configured to an Acceptable Frame Types value of Admit All Frames.

• All ports are configured with ingress filtering disabled.

• All ports are configured to transmit only untagged frames.

• GVRP is disabled on all ports and all dynamic entries are cleared.

Configure an Internal VLAN

The Internal VLAN section displays the allocation base and the allocation mode of internal

VLAN. The internal VLAN is reserved by a port-based routing interface and invisible to the end user. Once these internal VLANs are allocated by the port-based routing interface, they cannot be assigned to a routing VLAN interface.

 To configure an internal VLAN:







198








7.

Select

Switching

 >

VLAN

>

Advanced

>

VLAN Configuration

.

8. In the Internal VLAN Allocation Base field, specify the VLAN allocation base for the routing interface.

You can enter a value from 1 to 4093.

9. Select the Internal VLAN Allocation Policy Ascending or Descending radio button.

This specifies a policy for the internal VLAN allocation.

Configure VLAN Trunking

You can configure switchport mode settings on interfaces. The switchport mode defines the purpose of the port based on the type of device it connects to and constraints the VLAN configuration of the port accordingly. Assigning the appropriate switchport mode helps simplify VLAN configuration and minimize errors.

 To configure VLAN trunking:





199










 > VLAN > Advanced > VLAN Trunking Configuration .

8. Select the interface:

• Select the Unit ID field to display physical port information for the selected unit.

• Use LAG to display LAGs only.

• Use All to display all physical ports.

• Use Go To Interface to select an interface by entering its number.

• Use Interface to select the interface for which data is to be displayed or configured.

9. In the Switchport Mode list, select one of the following:

• Access . This mode is suitable for ports connected to end stations or end users.

Access ports participate in only one VLAN. They accept both tagged and untagged packets, but always transmit untagged packets.

• Trunk . This mode is intended for ports that are connected to other switches. Trunk ports can participate in multiple VLANs and accept both tagged and untagged packets.

• General . This mode enables custom configuration of a port. You configure the general port VLAN attributes, such as membership, PVID, tagging, ingress filter, and


200

M6100, M5300, and M7100 Series Managed Switches so on, using the settings on the Port Configuration screen. By default, all ports are initially configured in

General

mode.

• Host . This mode is used for private VLAN configuration.

• Promiscuous

. This mode is used for private VLAN configuration.

10.

Select from the list to configure the

Access VLAN ID

.

This is the access VLAN for the port, and is valid only when the port switchport mode is

Access

.

11.

Select from the list to configure the

Native VLAN ID

.

This is the native VLAN for the port, and is valid only when the port switchport mode is

Trunk

.

12.

Configure the

Trunk Allowed VLANs

.

This is the set of VLANs of which the port can be a member when configured in Trunk mode. By default, this list contains all possible VLANs, even if they are not yet created.

VLAN IDs are in the range 1 to 4093. Use a hyphen (-) to specify a range, or a comma (,) to separate VLAN IDs in a list. Spaces are not permitted. A zero value clears the allowed

VLANs. An All value sets all VLANs in the range (1 to 4093).


The updated configuration is sent to the switch.Configuration changes take effect immediately.

The Native VLAN Tagging field displays enabled or disabled:

• When VLAN tagging is enabled, if the trunk port receives untagged frames, it forwards them on the native VLAN with no VLAN tag.

• When VLAN tagging is disabled, if the trunk port receives untagged frames, it includes the native VLAN ID in the VLAN tag when forwarding

Configure VLAN Membership

 To configure VLAN membership:


2.



4.






201






 > VLAN > Advanced > VLAN Membership .

8. In the VLAN ID list, select the VLAN ID.

9. In the Group Operation list, select all the ports and configure them:

• Untag All . Select all the ports on which all frames transmitted for this VLAN are untagged. All the ports are included in the VLAN.

• Tag All . Select the ports on which all frames transmitted for this VLAN are tagged. All the ports are included in the VLAN.

• Remove All . All the ports that can be dynamically registered in this VLAN through

GVRP. This selection excludes all ports from the selected VLAN.

10. In the Port display, select port numbers to add them to this VLAN.

Each port can use one of three modes:

• T (Tagged) . Select the ports on which all frames transmitted for this VLAN are tagged.

The ports that are selected are included in the VLAN.

• U (Untagged) . Select the ports on which all frames transmitted for this VLAN are untagged. The ports that are selected are included in the VLAN.

• BLANK (Autodetect) . Select the ports that can be dynamically registered in this

VLAN through GVRP. This selection excludes a port from the selected VLAN.


202


The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the screen.

Table 77. Advanced VLAN Membership

Field

VLAN Name

VLAN Type

Definition

The name for the VLAN that you selected. It can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters long, including blanks. VLAN ID 1 always uses the name Default.

The type of the VLAN you selected:

• Default

(VLAN ID = 1). Always present

• Static . A VLAN that you configured

• Dynamic

. A VLAN created by GVRP registration that you did not convert to static, and that GVRP can therefore remove

View VLAN Status

You can view the status of all currently configured VLANs.

 To view the VLAN status:


2.



4.









7.

Select

Switching

 >

VLAN

>

Advanced

>

VLAN Status

.


203



Table 78. VLAN Status

Field

VLAN ID

VLAN Name

VLAN Type

Routing Interface

Member Ports

Definition

The VLAN identifier (VID) of the VLAN. The range of the VLAN ID is 1 to 4093.

The name of the VLAN. VLAN ID 1 is always named `Default`.

The VLAN type:

• Default

(VLAN ID = 1). Always present

• Static . A VLAN that you configured

• Dynamic

. A VLAN created by GVRP registration that you did not convert to static, and that GVRP can therefore remove

The interface associated with the VLAN, in the case that VLAN routing is configured for this VLAN.

The ports that are included in the VLAN.

Configure Port PVID Settings

You can assign a port VLAN ID (PVID) to an interface. There are certain requirements for a

PVID:

• You must define a PVID for all ports.

• If no other value is specified, the default VLAN PVID is used.

• To change the port’s default PVID, you must first create a VLAN that includes the port as a member.

• Use the Port VLAN ID (PVID) Configuration screen to configure a virtual LAN on a port.

 To configure PVID settings:











204




 > VLAN > Advanced > Port PVID Configuration .

8. To display information for all physical ports and LAGs, click the ALL button.

9. Select the interfaces.

Select the Interface check box next to the interfaces. You can select multiple interfaces.

To select all the interfaces, select the Interface check box in the heading row.

10. In the PVID field, specify the VLAN ID to assign to untagged or priority-tagged frames received on this port.

The factory default is 1.

11. In the VLAN Member field, specify the VLAN ID or list of VLANs of a member port.

VLAN IDs range from 1 to 4093. The factory default is 1. Use a hyphen (-) to specify a range or a comma (,) to separate VLAN IDs in a list. Spaces and zeros are not permitted.

12. In the VLAN Tag field, specify the VLAN ID or list of VLANs of a tagged port.

VLAN IDs range from 1 to 4093. Use a hyphen (-) to specify a range or a comma (,) to separate VLAN IDs in a list. Spaces and zeros are not permitted. To reset the VLAN tag configuration to the defaults, use the None keyword. Port tagging for the VLAN can obe set only if the port is a member of this VLAN.

13. In the Acceptable Frame Types list, specify the types of frames that can be received on this port.

The options are VLAN only and Admit All :

• When set to VLAN only , untagged frames or priotiry-tagged frames received on this port are discarded.

• When set to Admit All , untagged frames or priotiry-tagged frames received on this port are accepted and assigned the value of the port VLAN ID for this port. With either option, VLAN-tagged frames are forwarded in accordance to the 802.1Q VLAN specification.

14. In the Configured Ingress Filtering field, select Enabled or Disabled .

• When enabled, the frame is discarded if this port is not a member of the VLAN with which this frame is associated. In a tagged frame, the VLAN is identified by the VLAN


205


ID in the tag. In an untagged frame, the VLAN is the port VLAN ID specified for the port that received this frame.

• When disabled, all frames are forwarded in accordance with the 802.1Q VLAN bridge specification. The factory default is disabled.

15. In the Port Priority field, specify the default 802.1p priority assigned to untagged packets arriving at the port.

You can enter a number from 0 to 7.

Configure a MAC-Based VLAN

The MAC-Based VLAN feature allows incoming untagged packets to be assigned to a VLAN and thus classify traffic based on the source MAC address of the packet.

You define a MAC to VLAN mapping by configuring an entry in the MAC to VLAN table. An entry is specified through a source MAC address and the desired VLAN ID. The MAC to

VLAN configurations are shared across all ports of the device (that is, there is a system-wide table with MAC address to VLAN ID mappings).

When untagged or priotiry-tagged packets arrive at the switch and entries exist in the MAC to

VLAN table, the source MAC address of the packet is looked up. If an entry is found, the corresponding VLAN ID is assigned to the packet. If the packet is already priority tagged it maintains this value; otherwise, the priority is set to zero. The assigned VLAN ID is verified against the VLAN table, if the VLAN is valid, ingress processing on the packet continues; otherwise the packet is dropped. This implies that the user is allowed to configure a MAC address mapping to a VLAN that was not created on the system.

 To configure a MAC-based VLAN:












 > VLAN > Advanced > MAC Based VLAN .


206


8. In the MAC Address field, type a valid MAC address to be bound to a VLAN ID.

This field is configurable only when a MAC-based VLAN is created.

9. In the VLAN ID field, specify a VLAN ID in the range of 1 to 4093.


The MAC address is added to the VLAN mapping.

11. To delete a MAC address from VLAN mapping, click the Delete button.

Configure Protocol-Based VLAN Groups

You can use a protocol-based VLAN to define filtering criteria for untagged packets. By default, if you do not configure any port-based (IEEE 802.1Q) or protocol-based VLANs, untagged packets are assigned to VLAN 1. You can override this behavior by defining either port-based VLANs or protocol-based VLANs, or both. Tagged packets are always handled according to the IEEE 802.1Q standard, and are not included in protocol-based VLANs.

If you assign a port to a protocol-based VLAN for a specific protocol, untagged frames received on that port for that protocol are assigned the protocol-based VLAN ID. Untagged frames received on the port for other protocols are assigned the Port VLAN ID, either the default PVID (1) or a PVID you specifically assigned to the port using the Port VLAN

Configuration screen.

You define a protocol-based VLAN by creating a group. Each group has a one-to-one relationship with a VLAN ID, can include one to three protocol definitions, and can include multiple ports. When you create a group, you specify a name and a group ID is assigned automatically.

 To configure a protocol-based VLAN group:









207






 > VLAN > Advanced > Protocol Based VLAN Group Configuration .

8. In the Group Name field, type a name for the new group.

You can enter up to 16 characters.

9. In the Protocol field, select the protocols to be associated with the group.

There are three configurable protocols:

• IP . IP is a network layer protocol that provides a connectionless service for the delivery of data.

• ARP . Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is a low-level protocol that dynamically maps network layer addresses to physical medium access control (MAC) addresses.

• IPX . The internetwork packet exchange (IPX) is a connectionless datagram network-layer protocol that forwards data over a network.

10. In the VLAN ID field, select the VLAN ID.

It can be any number in the range of 1 to 4093. All the ports in the group assigns this

VLAN ID to untagged packets received for the protocols that you included in this group.


The protocol-based VLAN group is added to the switch.

12. To remove the protocol-based VLAN group identified by the value in the Group ID field, click the Delete button.


Table 79. Protocol Based VLAN Group

Field

Group ID

Ports

Description

A number used to identify the group created by the user. Group IDs are automatically assigned when a group is created by the user.

Display all the member ports that belong to the group.


208


Configure Protocol-Based VLAN Group Membership

 To configure protocol-based VLAN group membership:


2.



4.









7.

Select

Switching

 >

VLAN

>

Advanced

>

Protocol Based VLAN Group Membership

.

8. In the Group ID list, select the protocol-based VLAN group ID.

9. Select port numbers ( 1 , 2 , 3 , and so on) to select ports to add to this protocol-based VLAN group.

An interface can belong to only one group for a given protocol. If you already added a port to a group for IP, you cannot add it to another group that also includes IP, although you can add it to a new group for IPX.


209



Table 80. Protocol-Based VLAN Group Membership

Field

Group Name

Current Members

Description

This field identifies the name for the protocol-based VLAN that you selected. It can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters long, including blanks.

This button can be click to show the current numbers in the selected protocol-based VLAN group.

Configure an IP Subnet-Based VLAN

IP subnet to VLAN mapping is defined by configuring an entry in the IP Subnet to VLAN table.

An entry is specified through a source IP address, network mask, and the desired VLAN ID.

The IP subnet to VLAN configurations are shared across all ports of the device.

 To configure IP subnet-based VLAN:












 > VLAN > Advanced > IP Subnet Based VLAN .

8. In the IP Address field, specify a valid IP address bound to the VLAN ID.

Enter the IP address in dotted-decimal notation.

9. In the Subnet Mask field, specify a valid subnet mask of the IP address.


210


Enter the subnet mask in dotted-decimal notation.

10. In the VLAN ID field, specify a VLAN ID in the range of (1 to 4093).

11.

Click the

Add

button.

The IP subnet-based VLAN is added.

12. To delete the selected IP subnet–based VLAN, click the Delete button.

Configure a Port DVLAN

 To configure a port DVLAN:


2.



4.









7.

Select

Switching

 >

VLAN

>

Advanced

>

Port DVLAN Configuration

.


211


8. Select Interface check boxes to select the physical interface.

To select all ports, select the Interface check box at the top of the column.

9. In the Admin Mode field, select Enabled or Disabled .

This specifies the administrative mode through which double VLAN ragging can be enabled or disabled. The default value for this is Disabled.

10. In the Global EtherType field, specify the first 16 bits of the DVLAN tag.

• 802.1Q Tag . Commonly used tag representing 0x8100

• vMAN Tag . Commonly used tag representing 0x88A8

• Custom Tag . Configure the EtherType in any range from 0 to 65535

Configure a Voice VLAN

You can configure the parameters for voice VLAN configuration. Only users with read/write access privileges can change the data on this screen.

 To configure a voice VLAN:












 > VLAN > Advanced > Voice VLAN Configuration .


212



This specifies the administrative mode for voice VLAN for the switch. The default is

Disable.

9. Use Interface to select the physical interface.

10. Use Interface Mode to select the voice VLAN mode for selected interface:

• Disable . This is the default value.

• None . Allow the IP phone to use its own configuration to send untagged voice traffic.

• VLAN ID . Configure the phone to send tagged voice traffic.

• dot1p Configure voice VLAN 802.1p priority tagging for voice traffic. When this is selected, enter the dot1p value in the Value field.

• Untagged . Configure the phone to send untagged voice traffic.

11. Use Value to enter the VLAN ID or dot1p value.

This is enabled only when VLAN ID or dot1p is selected as the interface mode.

12. In the CoS Override Mode field, select Disable or Enable .


13. In the Authentication Mode field, select Enable or Disable .

The default is Enable . When the authentication mode is enabled, voice traffic is allowed on an unauthorized voice VLAN port. When the authentication mode is disabled, devices are authorized through dot1x.

Note: Authentication through dot1x is possible only if dot1x is enabled.

14. In the DSCP Value field, configure the Voice VLAN DSCP value for the port.


The Operational State field displays the operational status of the voice VLAN on the given interface.


213


Configure GARP Switch Settings

Note: It can take up to 10 seconds for GARP configuration changes to take effect.

 To configure GARP switch settings:












 > VLAN > Advanced > GARP Switch Configuration .

8. Select the GVRP Mode Disable or Enabl e radio button.

This selects the GARP VLAN registration protocol administrative mode for the switch.

The factory default is Disable.

9. Select the GMRP Mode Disable or Enabl e radio button.

This selects the GARP multicast registration protocol administrative mode for the switch.



214


Configure GARP Port

Note: It can take up to 10 seconds for GARP configuration changes to take effect.

 To configure GARP port:

1.



3.





5.



6.

Click the

Login

button.



 > VLAN > Advanced > GARP Port Configuration .

8. Use Interface to select the physical interface for which data is to be displayed or configured.

9. In the Port GVRP Mode field, select Enable or Disable .

This specifies the GARP VLAN registration protocol administrative mode for the port.If you select Disable, the protocol is not active and the join time, leave time, and leave all time have no effect. The factory default is Disable.

10. In the Port GMRP Mode field, select Enable or Disable


215


This specifies the GARP multicast registration protocol administrative mode for the port. If you select Disable, the protocol is not active, and the join time, leave time, and leave all time have no effect. The factory default is Disable.

11. In the Join Time (centiseconds) field, specify the time between the transmission of GARP

PDUs registering (or re-registering) membership for a VLAN or multicast group in centiseconds.

Enter a number between 10 and 100 (0.1 to 1.0 seconds). The factory default is 20 centiseconds (0.2 seconds). An instance of this timer exists for each GARP participant for each port.

12. In the Leave Time (centiseconds) field, specify the time to wait after receiving an unregister request for a VLAN or multicast group before deleting the associated entry, in centiseconds.

This allows time for another station to assert registration for the same attribute to maintain uninterrupted service. Enter a number between 20 and 600 (0.2 to 6.0 seconds). The factory default is 60 centiseconds (0.6 seconds). An instance of this timer exists for each

GARP participant for each port.

13. Use Leave All Time (centiseconds) to control how frequently LeaveAll PDUs are generated.

A LeaveAll PDU indicates that all registrations will be deregistered soon. To maintain registration, participants must rejoin. The leave all period timer is set to a random value in the range of LeaveAllTime to 1.5*LeaveAllTime. The timer is specified in centiseconds.

Enter a number between 200 and 6000 (2 to 60 seconds). The factory default is 1000 centiseconds (10 seconds). An instance of this timer exists for each GARP participant for each port.

Auto-VoIP

You can configure protocol-based port settings and OUI settings.

Configure Protocol-Based Port Settings

 To configure protocol-based port settings:









216



6.

Click the

Login

button.


7. Select Switching > Auto-VoIP > Protocol-based > Port Settings .

8. In the Prioritization Type field, select Traffic Class or Remark .

This specifies the type of prioritization.

9. In the Class Value list, specify the CoS tag value to be reassigned for packets received on the voice VLAN when Remark CoS is enabled.


The switch is updated with the values you entered. For the switch to retain the new values across a power cycle you must perform a save.

Configure Auto-VoIP OUI-Based Properties

 To configure auto-VoIP OUI-based properties:







217







7. Select Switching > Auto-VoIP > OUI-based > Properties .

8. In the VoIP VLAN ID field, type the VoIP VLAN ID of the switch.

There is no default VLAN for auto-VoIP, you must create a VLAN for it first.

9. In the OUI-based priority list, select the OUI-based priority of the switch.

The default value is 7.


The switch is updated with the values you entered. For the switch to retain the new values across a power cycle, you must perform a save.

OUI-Based Port Settings

 To configure auto-VoIP OUI-based port settings:











218



7. Select Switching > Auto-VoIP > OUI-based > Port Settings .

The Operational Status field displays the current operational status of each interface.

8. Use Interface check boxes to select the interfaces.

9. In the Auto VoIP Mode field, select Disable or Enable .

Auto-VoIP is disabled by default.

10. Use Go To Interface to select an interface by entering its number.


The switch is updated with the values you entered. For the switch to retain the new values across a power cycle, you must perform a save.

Configure the OUI Table

 To configure the OUI Table:












219


7. Select Switching > Auto-VoIP > OUI-based > OUI Table .

8. In the Telephony OUI(s) field, specify the VoIP OUI prefix to be added in the format

AA:BB:CC.

Up to 128 OUIs can be configured.

9. In the Description field, enter the description for the OUI.

The maximum length of description is 32 characters. The following OUIs are present in the configuration by default:

• 00:01:E3 - SIEMENS

• 00:03:6B - CISCO1

• 00:12:43 - CISCO2

• 00:0F:E2 - H3C

• 00:60:B9 - NITSUKO

• 00:D0:1E - PINTEL

• 00:E0:75 - VERILINK

• 00:E0:BB - 3COM

• 00:04:0D - AVAYA1

• 00:1B:4F - AVAYA2


The telephony OUI entry is added.

11. To delete a created entry, click the Delete button.


220


View the Auto-VoIP Status

 To view the auto-VoIP status:


2.



4.









7.

Select

Switching > Auto-VoIP > Auto-VoIP Status

.


The following table describes the nonconfigurable Auto-VoIP status information.

Table 81. Auto-VoIP Status

Field

Auto-VoIP VLAN ID

Maximum Number of Voice

Channels Supported

Number of Voice Channels

Detected

Description

The auto-VoIP VLAN ID.

The maximum number of voice channels supported.

The number of VoIP channels prioritized successfully.


221


iSCSI Overview

The Internet Small Computer System Interface (iSCSI) feature helps network administrators track iSCSI traffic between iSCSI initiators and target systems. This is accomplished by monitoring or snooping traffic to detect packets used by iSCSI stations in establishing iSCSI sessions and connections. Data from these exchanges is used to create classification rules that assign the traffic between the stations to a configured traffic class. Packets in the flow are queued and scheduled for egress on the destination port based on these rules.

In networks containing iSCSI initiators and targets, iSCSI helps to monitor iSCSI sessions or give iSCSI traffic preferential Quality of Service (QoS) treatment. Dynamically-generated classifier rules are used to direct the iSCSI data traffic to queues that can be given the desired preference characteristics over other data traveling through the switch. This might help to avoid session interruptions during times of congestion that would otherwise cause iSCSI packets to be dropped. However, in systems where a large proportion of traffic is iSCSI, it might also interfere with other network control-plane traffic, such as ARP or LACP.

The preferential treatment of iSCSI traffic must be balanced against the needs of other critical data in the network.

You can view and manage iSCSI Optimization settings on the device. iSCSI Optimization provides a means of giving traffic between iSCSI initiator and target systems special Quality of Service (QoS) treatment.

In addition, if configured, the packets can be updated with IEEE 802.1 or IP-DSCP values.

This is done by enabling Remark. Remarking packets with priority data provides special QoS treatment as the packets continue through the network.

Configure Global iSCSI Settings

 To configure the global iSCSI settings on the switch:












222


7. Select Switching > iSCSI > Basic > Global Configuration .

8. In the iSCSI Status field, select Enable or Disable .

This globally enables or disables the iSCSI Optimization feature. By default, iSCSI

Optimization is disabled.

9. Select the QoS Profile VLAN Priority Tag or DSCP radio button.

This specifies the Quality of Service (QoS) profile that is applied to iSCSI flows. By default, iSCSI flows are assigned to the highest VLAN Priority tag (VPT)/DSCP mapped to the highest queue not used for chassis management or voice VLAN.

Setting the VLAN Priority tag/DSCP sets the QoS profile which determines the egress queue to which the frame is mapped. The switch default setting for egress queues scheduling is Weighted Round Robin (WRR). Complete the QoS setting by configuring the relevant ports to work in other scheduling and queue management modes through the

Class of Service settings. Depending on the platform, these choices might include strict priority for the queue used for iSCSI traffic. The downside of strict priority is that, in certain circumstances (under heavy high priority traffic), other lower priority traffic might get starved. In WRR, the queue to which the flow is assigned to can be set to get the required percentage.

10. Configure the global traffic class mapping in Class of Service.

The global traffic class mapping configuration determines the traffic class used to transmit iSCSI packets. The traffic mapping configuration options are as follows:

• IEEE 802.1P

• IP-DSCP

The configuration of the CoS component determines changes in the mapping of IEEE

802.1p or IP-DSCP values to traffic classes. For more information, see

Class of Service

on page 511.

11. If you are using VLAN Priority as the QoS profile, in the VLAN Priority Tag field, select the iSCSI session packets.

The range is 0 to 7. The default is 5.

12. If you are using DSCP as the QoS profile, in the DSCP list, select a value to assign iSCSI session packets.


223



13. Select the Remark Enable or Disable radio button.

This enables or disables the marking of iSCSI frames with the configured VLAN Priority tag/DSCP when egressing the switch. Enabling remarks updates the packets with IEEE

802.1p or IP-DSCP values. Remarking packets with priority data provides special QoS treatment as the packets continue through the network. Remark is enabled by default.

14. In the iSCSI Aging Time field, set the number of minutes a session can be inactive prior to

If using DSCP as the QoS profile, useremoval.

The iSCSI Aging Time must be a whole number in the range of 1 to 43200 minutes. The default is 10 minutes.



View iSCSI Sessions

 To view active iSCSI session information:











7. click Switching > iSCSI > Basic > Sessions .


224



The following table describes the nonconfigurable iSCSI Sessions information.

Table 82. iSCSI Sessions

Field

Target Name

Initiator Name

Initiator Session ID (ISID)

Description

The target’s name.

The initiator’s name.

The iSCSI identifier.

Control iSCSI Target Settings

You can view iSCSI targets and assign target ports/port IP address combinations for iSCSI optimization on the switch.

 To configure iSCSI target settings

1.



3.





5.



6.

Click the

Login

button.


7. Select Switching > iSCSI > Advanced > iSCSI Targets .


225


8. In the TCP Port field, specify the TCP port for the target that monitors iSCSI traffic.

Up to 16 TCP ports can be defined in the system. The well-known iSCSI ports 860 and

3260 are configured as defaults but you can remove them as any other configured target.

9. In the IP address field, specify an IP address for the target that monitors iSCSI traffic.

The default is 0.0.0.0.

10. In the Target Name field, specify a name to assign to the target.

The iSCSI Target Name can be up to 233 characters in length.


The iSCSI targets configuration is added.

12. To delete a selected iSCSI targets configuration, click the Delete button.

View iSCSI Sessions

 To view information about active iSCSI sessions:











7. Select Switching > iSCSI > Advanced > Sessions.


226


The following describes the nonconfigurable iSCSI Sessions information that is displayed.

Table 83. iSCSI Sessions

Field

Target Name

Initiator Name

Initiator Session ID (ISID)

Description

The target’s name.


The unique identifier an initiator assigns to its session endpoint which, when combined with the iSCSI initiator name, provides a unique name for the iSCSI initiator port.

View iSCSI Session Details

You can view detailed information about active iSCSI sessions.

 Toview the iSCSI session details:


2.



4.









7.

Select

Switching > iSCSI > Advanced > Sessions Detailed

.



227


The following table describes the nonconfigurable iSCSI Sessions Detailed information.

Table 84. iSCSI Sessions Detailed

Field

Session Index

Description

The list of session indices.

The rest of the fields on this screen correspond to the currently selected Session Index.

Target Name The target’s name.

Initiator Name

Up Time


The time elapsed since the creation of the current session.

Time for Aging Out (in Seconds) The time left for the current session to expire in seconds.

Initiator Session ID (ISID) The unique identifier an initiator assigns to its session endpoint which, when combined with the iSCSI initiator name, provides a unique name for the iSCSI initiator port.

Initiator IP Address

Initiator TCP Port

Target IP Address

Target TCP Port

The initiator’s IP address.

The initiator’s TCP port number of one of the connections between the target and initiator.

The IP address of the target.

The target’s TCP port number of one of the connections between the target and initiator.

Spanning Tree Protocol

The Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) provides a tree topology for any arrangement of bridges.

STP also provides one path between end stations on a network, eliminating loops. Spanning tree versions supported include Common STP, Multiple STP, and Rapid STP.

Classic STP provides a single path between end stations, avoiding and eliminating loops. For information on configuring Common STP, see

Configure CST Port Settings

on page 236.

Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) supports multiple instances of Spanning Tree to efficiently channel VLAN traffic over different interfaces. Each instance of the Spanning Tree behaves in the manner specified in IEEE 802.1w, Rapid Spanning Tree (RSTP), with slight modifications in the working but not the end effect (chief among the effects, is the rapid transitioning of the port to Forwarding). The difference between the RSTP and the traditional

STP (IEEE 802.1D) is the ability to configure and recognize full-duplex connectivity and ports which are connected to end stations, resulting in rapid transitioning of the port to Forwarding state and the suppression of Topology Change Notification. These features are represented by the parameters

pointtopoint

and

edgeport

. MSTP is compatible to both RSTP and STP. It behaves appropriately to STP and RSTP bridges. A MSTP bridge can be configured to behave entirely as a RSTP bridge or a STP bridge.


228


Note: For two bridges to be in the same region, the force version must be

802.1s and their configuration name, digest key, and revision level must match. For additional information about regions and their effect on network topology, refer to the IEEE 802.1Q

standard.

Configure Basic STP Settings

 To configure STP basic settings:

1.



3.





5.



6.

Click the

Login

button.


7. Select Switching > STP > Basic > STP Configuration .


229


8. Select the Spanning Tree Admin Mode Disable or Enable radio button.

This specifies whether spanning tree operation is enabled on the switch.

9. Use Force Protocol Version to specify the Force Protocol Version parameter for the switch.

The options are IEEE 802.1d, IEEE 802.1w, IEEE 802.1s, PVST, and RPVST.

10. Use Configuration Name to specify an identifier used to identify the configuration currently being used.

It can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters.

11. Use Configuration Revision Level to specify an identifier used to identify the configuration currently being used.

The values allowed are between 0 and 65535. The default value is 0.

12. Select the Forward BPDU while STP Disabled Disable or Enable radio button.

This specifies whether spanning tree BPDUs are forwarded or not while spanning-tree is disabled on the switch.

13. Select the BPDU Guard Disable or Enable radio button.

This specifies whether the BPDU guard feature is enabled. The STP BPDU guard allows a network administrator to enforce the STP domain borders and keep the active topology consistent and predictable. The switches behind the edge ports with STP BPDU guard enabled do not influence the overall STP topology. At the reception of BPDUs, the BPDU guard operation disables the port that is configured with this option and transitions the port into disable state. This would lead to an administrative disable of the port.

14. Select the BPDU Filter Disable or Enable radio button.

This specifies whether the BPDU Filter feature is enabled. STP BPDU filtering applies to all operational edge ports. Edge Port in an operational state is supposed to be connected to hosts that typically drop BPDUs. If an operational edge port receives a BPDU, it immediately loses its operational status. In that case, if BPDU filtering is enabled on this port then it drops the BPDUs received on this port.

15. Select the e Fast Backbone Mode Disable or Enable radio button. (

PVSTP only

.)

Use this option to choose a new indirect link when an indirect link fails. The system does not ignore inferior BPDUs, as is done in 802.1d. Rather the system uses the BPDUs to age out on the port it received the BPDUs. Later the system sends out root link queries on other non-designated ports. Based on the replies, if there is a positive response to at least one of them, it chooses a new indirect link. Fast Backbone mode is disabled by default.

16. Select the Fast Uplink Mode Disable or Enable radio button. (

PVSTP only

.)

This option reduces the recovery time in selecting a new root port when the primary root port goes down. Fast Uplink mode is disabled by default.

17. Use the Max Update Rate field to configure the Fast Uplink Maximum Update Rate.

This field is enabled for configuration when Fast Uplink mode is enabled. Allowed values are 0 to 32000 packets per second. The default value is 150.


230





Table 85. STP Configuration

Field

Configuration Digest Key

Configuration Format Selector

MST ID

VID ID

FID ID

Description

Identifier used to identify the configuration currently being used.

The version of the configuration format being used in the exchange of

BPDUs.

Table consisting of the MST instances (including the CST) and the corresponding VLAN IDs associated with each of them.

Table consisting of the VLAN IDs and the corresponding FID associated with each of them.

Table consisting of the FIDs and the corresponding VLAN IDs associated with each of them.

Configure Advanced STP Settings

 To configure advanced STP settings:

1.



3.





5.



6.

Click the

Login

button.


7. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > STP Configuration .


231



This specifies whether spanning tree operation is enabled on the switch. The default is

Enable.

9. Use Force Protocol Version to specify the Force Protocol Version parameter for the switch.

The options are IEEE 802.1d, IEEE 802.1w, IEEE 802.1s, PVST, and RPVST. The default is IEEE 802.1w.

10. Use Configuration Name to specify the identifier used to identify the configuration currently being used.

It can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters.

11. Use Configuration Revision Level to specify the identifier used to identify the configuration currently being used.

The values allowed are between 0 and 65535. The default value is 0.

12. Select the Forward BPDU while STP Disabled Disable or Enable radio button.

This specifies whether spanning tree BPDUs are forwarded while spanning-tree is disabled on the switch. The default is Disable.

13. Select the BPDU Guard Disable or Enable radio button.

This specifies whether the BPDU guard feature is enabled. The STP BPDU guard allows a network administrator to enforce the STP domain borders and keep the active topology consistent and predictable. The switches behind the edge ports with STP BPDU guard enabled do not influence the overall STP topology. At the reception of BPDUs, the BPDU guard operation disables the port that is configured with this option and transitions the port into disable state. This would lead to an administrative disable of the port.


232


14. Select the BPDU Filter Disable or Enable radio button.

This specifies whether the BPDU Filter feature is enabled. STP BPDU filtering applies to all operational edge ports. Edge Port in an operational state is supposed to be connected to hosts that typically drop BPDUs. If an operational edge port receives a BPDU, it immediately loses its operational status. In that case, if BPDU filtering is enabled on this port then it drops the BPDUs received on this port.

15.

Select the Fast Backbone Mode

Disable

or

Enable

radio button. (

PVSTP only

.)

Use this option to choose a new indirect link when an indirect link fails. The system does not ignore inferior BPDUs, as is done in 802.1d. Rather the system uses the BPDUs to age out on the port it received the BPDUs. Later the system sends out root link queries on other non-designated ports. Based on the replies, if there is a positive response to at least one of them, it chooses a new indirect link. Fast Backbone mode is disabled by default.

16.

Select the Fast Uplink Mode

Disable

or

Enable

radio button. (

PVSTP only

.)

This option reduces the recovery time in selecting a new root port when the primary root port goes down. Fast Uplink mode is disabled by default.

17.

Use the

Max Update Rate

field to configure the Fast Uplink Maximum Update Rate.

This field is enabled for configuration when Fast Uplink mode is enabled. Allowed values are 0 to 32000 packets per second. The default value is 150.

18.

Click the

Apply

button.



Table 86. STP Configuration

Field

Configuration Digest Key

Configuration Format Selector

Description

The 16-byte signature of type HMAC-MD5 created from the MST

Configuration Table (a VLAN ID-to-MST ID mapping) which is used to identify the configuration currently being used.

The version of the configuration format being used in the exchange of

BPDUs.

STP Status

MST ID

VID ID

FID ID

Table consisting of the MST instances (including the CST) and the corresponding VLAN IDs associated with each of them.

Table consisting of the VLAN IDs and the corresponding FID associated with each of them.

Table consisting of the FIDs and the corresponding VLAN IDs associated with each of them.


233


Configure CST Settings

You can configure Common Spanning Tree (CST) and Internal Spanning Tree on the switch.

 To configure CST settings:











7. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > CST Configuration .


234


8. Specify values for CST in the appropriate fields:

• Bridge Priority . When switches or bridges are running STP, each is assigned a priority. After exchanging BPDUs, the switch with the lowest priority value becomes the root bridge. Specifies the bridge priority value for the Common and Internal

Spanning Tree (CST). The valid range is 0–61440. The bridge priority is a multiple of

4096. If you specify a priority that is not a multiple of 4096, the priority is automatically set to the next lowest priority that is a multiple of 4096. For example, if the priority is attempted to be set to any value between 0 and 4095, it is set to 0. The default priority is 32768.

• Bridge Max Age (secs) . The bridge maximum age time for the Common and Internal

Spanning Tree (CST), which indicates the amount of time in seconds a bridge waits before implementing a topological change. The valid range is 6–40, and the value must be less than or equal to (2 * Bridge Forward Delay) – 1 and greater than or equal to 2 * (Bridge Hello Time +1). The default value is 20.

• Bridge Hello Time (secs)

. The bridge hello time for the Common and Internal

Spanning Tree (CST), which indicates the amount of time in seconds a root bridge waits between configuration messages. The value is fixed at 2 seconds. The value must be less than or equal to (Bridge Max Age / 2) - 1. The default hello time value is

2.

• Bridge Forward Delay (secs).

The bridge forward delay time, which indicates the amount of time in seconds a bridge remains in a listening and learning state before forwarding packets. The value must be greater or equal to (Bridge Max Age / 2) + 1.

The time range is from 4 seconds to 30 seconds. The default value is 15 seconds.

• Spanning Tree Maximum Hops . The maximum number of bridge hops the information for a particular CST instance can travel before being discarded. The valid range is 6–40. The default is 20 hops.

• Spanning Tree Tx Hold Count

. Configures the maximum number of bpdus the bridge is allowed to send within the hello time window. The valid range is 1–10. The default value is 6.

9.

Click the

Apply

button.



Update

button.

The following table describes the CST Status information that is displayed.

Table 87. STP Advanced CST Configuration

Field

Bridge identifier

Time since topology change

Topology change count

Description

The bridge identifier for the CST. It is made up using the bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.

The time in seconds since the topology of the CST last changed.

Number of times topology changed for the CST.


235


Table 87. STP Advanced CST Configuration

Field

Topology change

Designated root

Root Path Cost

Root Port Identifier

Max Age(secs)

Forward Delay(secs)

Hold Time(secs)

CST Regional Root

CST Path Cost

Description

The value of the topology change parameter for the switch indicating if a topology change is in progress on any port assigned to the CST. It takes a value if True or False.

The bridge identifier of the root bridge. It is made up from the bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.

Path Cost to the Designated Root for the CST.

Port to access the Designated Root for the CST.

Path Cost to the Designated Root for the CST.

Derived value of the Root Port Bridge Forward Delay parameter.

Minimum time between transmission of Configuration BPDUs.

Priority and base MAC address of the CST Regional Root.

Path Cost to the CST tree Regional Root.

Configure CST Port Settings

You can configure the Common Spanning Tree (CST) and Internal Spanning Tree on a specific port on the switch.

A port can become

Diagnostically Disabled

(D-Disable) when DOT1S experiences a severe error condition. The most common cause is when the DOT1S software experiences BPDU flooding. The flooding criteria is such that DOT1S receives more than 15 BPDUs in a

3-second interval. The other causes for DOT1S D-Disable are extremely rare.

 To configure CST port settings:











236



7. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > CST Port Configuration .

8. Select an Interface .

You can select a physical or port channel interface associated with VLANs associated with the CST.

9. Use Port Priority to specify the priority for a particular port within the CST.

The port priority is set in multiples of 16. For example if the priority is attempted to be set to any value between 0 and 15, it is set to 0. If it is tried to be set to any value between 16 and (2*16-1) it is set to 16 and so on. The default value is 128.

10. Use Admin Edge Port to specify if the specified port is an Edge Port within the CIST.

Use the menu to select Disable or Enable . The default value is Disable.

11. Use Port Path Cost to set the Path Cost to a new value for the specified port in the common and internal spanning tree.

It takes a value in the range of 1 to 200000000. The default is 0.

12. Use External Port Path Cost to set the External Path Cost to a new value for the specified port in the spanning tree.

It takes a value in the range of 1 to 200000000. The default is 0.

13. Use BPDU Filter to configure the BPDU Filter, which filters the BPDU traffic on this port when STP is enabled on this port.

The possible values are Enable or Disable . The default value is Disable.

14. Use BPDU Flood to configure the BPDU Flood, which floods the BPDU traffic arriving on this port when STP is disabled on this port.


15. Use Auto Edge to configure the auto edge mode of a port, which allows the port to become an edge port if it does not see BPDUs for some duration.

The possible values are Enable or Disable . The default value is Enable.

16. Use Root Guard to configure the root guard mode, which sets a port to discard any superior information received by the port and thus protect against root of the device from changing.

The port gets put into discarding state and does not forward any packets. The possible values are Enable or Disable . The default value is Disable .


237


17. Use Loop Guard to enable or disable the loop guard on the port to protect Layer 2 forwarding loops.

If loop guard is enabled, the port moves into the STP loop inconsistent blocking state instead of the listening/learning/forwarding state. The default value is Disable

18. Use TCN Guard to configure the TCN guard for a port restricting the port from propagating any topology change information received through that port.


19. Use Port Mode to enable or disable Spanning Tree Protocol Administrative mode associated with the port or port channel.

The possible values are Enable or Disable . The default value is Disable .





Table 88. CST Port Configuration

Field

Auto Calculated Port Path Cost

Port Forwarding State

Description

Displays whether the path cost is automatically calculated (Enabled) or not (Disabled). Path cost is calculated based on the link speed of the port if the configured value for Port Path Cost is zero.

The value of the parameter for the CST.

Hello Timer

Auto Calculated External Port Path

Cost

Displays whether the external path cost is automatically calculated

(Enabled) or not (Disabled). External Path cost is calculated based on the link speed of the port if the configured value for External Port Path

Cost is zero.

BPDU Guard Effect Display the BPDU Guard Effect, it disables the edge ports that receive

BPDU packets. The possible values are Enable or Disable.

The Forwarding State of this port.

View CST Port Status

You can view the Common Spanning Tree (CST) and Internal Spanning Tree on a specific port on the switch.

 To view the CST port status:




238



4.









7.

Select

Switching > STP > Advanced > CST Port Status

.


The following table describes the CST Status information displayed on the screen.

Table 89. CST Port Status

Field

Interface

Port ID


Description

Identify the physical or port channel interfaces associated with VLANs associated with the CST.

The port identifier for the specified port within the CST. It is made up from the port priority and the interface number of the port.



239


Table 89. CST Port Status (continued)


Port Role

Designated Root

Designated Cost

Designated Bridge

Each MST Bridge Port that is enabled is assigned a Port Role for each spanning tree. The port role is one of the following values:

Root Port

,

Designated Port , Alternate Port , Backup Port , Master Port or

Disabled Port

.

Root Bridge for the CST. It is made up using the bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.

Path Cost offered to the LAN by the Designated Port.

Bridge Identifier of the bridge with the Designated Port. It is made up using the bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.

Designated Port

Topology Change Acknowledge

Port Identifier on the Designated Bridge that offers the lowest cost to the LAN. It is made up from the port priority and the interface number of the port.

Identifies whether the topology change acknowledgement flag is set for the next BPDU to be transmitted for this port. It is either True or False.

Edge port Indicates whether the port is enabled as an edge port. It takes the value

Enabled or Disabled.

Derived value of the point-to-point status.

Point-to-point MAC

CST Regional Root Bridge Identifier of the CST Regional Root. It is made up using the bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.

Path Cost to the CST Regional Root.

CST Path Cost

Port Up Time Since Counters Last

Cleared

Time since the counters were last cleared, displayed in Days, Hours,

Minutes, and Seconds.

Loop Inconsistent State This parameter identifies whether the port is in loop inconsistent state or not.

Transitions Into Loop Inconsistent

State

The number of times this interface transitioned into loop inconsistent state.

Transitions Out Of Loop

Inconsistent State

The number of times this interface transitioned out of loop inconsistent state.

Configure MST Settings

You can configure Multiple Spanning Tree (MST) on the switch.

 To configure an MST instance:




240



4.









7.

Select

Switching > STP > Advanced > MST Configuration

.

8. Configure the MST values:

• MST ID . Specify the ID of the MST to create. The valid values for this are 1 to 4094.

This is only visible when the select option of the MST ID select box is selected.

• Priority . The bridge priority value for the MST. When switches or bridges are running

STP, each is assigned a priority. After exchanging BPDUs, the switch with the lowest priority value becomes the root bridge. The bridge priority is a multiple of 4096. If you specify a priority that is not a multiple of 4096, the priority is automatically set to the next lowest priority that is a multiple of 4096. For example, if the priority is attempted to be set to any value between 0 and 4095, it is set to 0. The default priority is

32768.The valid range is 0–61440.

• VLAN ID

. This gives a combo box of each VLAN on the switch. These can be selected or unselected for re-configuring the association of VLANs to MST instances.

9. Click the Add button

This creates the new MST that you configured.

10.

To modify an MST instance: a.

Select the check box next to the instance (You can select multiple check boxes to apply the same setting to all selected ports.) b.

Update the values c. click the Apply button.

11.

To delete an MST instance, select the check box for the instance and click the

Delete button.



241


For each configured instance, the information described in the following table displays on the screen.

Table 90. MST Configuration

Field

Bridge Identifier

Time Since Topology Change

Topology Change Count

Topology Change

Designated Root

Root Path Cost

Root PortIdentifier

Description

The bridge identifier for the selected MST instance. It is made up using the bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.

The time n seconds since the topology of the selected MST instance last changed.

Number of times topology changed for the selected MST instance.

The value of the topology change parameter for the switch indicating if a topology change is in progress on any port assigned to the selected

MST instance. It takes a value if True or False.

The bridge identifier of the root bridge. It is made up from the bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge

Path Cost to the Designated Root for this MST instance.

Port to access the Designated Root for this MST instance.

View the Spanning Tree MST Port Status

You can configure and display Multiple Spanning Tree (MST) settings on a specific port on the switch.

A port can become

Diagnostically Disabled

(D-Disable) when DOT1S experiences a severe error condition. The most common cause is when the DOT1S software experiences BPDU flooding. The flooding criteria is such that DOT1S receives more than 15 BPDUs in a

3-second interval. The other causes for DOT1S D-Disable are extremely rare.

 To view the Spanning Tree MST port status:











242



7. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > MST Port Status .

Note: If no MST instances were configured on the switch, the screen displays a

No MSTs Available

message and does not display the fields shown in the field description table that follows.

8. Use MST ID to select one MST instance from existing MST instances.

9. Use Interface to select one of the physical or port channel interfaces associated with VLANs associated with the selected MST instance.

10. Use Port Priority to specify the priority for a particular port within the selected MST instance.

The port priority is set in multiples of 16. For example if the priority is attempted to be set to any value between 0 and 15, it is set to 0. If it is tried to be set to any value between 16 and (2*16-1) it is set to 16 and so on.

11. Use Port Path Cost to set the Path Cost to a new value for the specified port in the selected

MST instance.

It takes a value in the range of 1 to 200000000.




243


The following table describes the read-only MST port configuration information displayed on the Spanning Tree CST Configuration screen.

Table 91. MST Port Status

Field

Auto Calculated Port Path Cost

Port ID

Port Uptime Since Last Clear

Counters

Port Mode


Port Role

Designated Root

Designated Cost

Designated Bridge

Designated Port

Description

Displays whether the path cost is automatically calculated ( Enable ) or not (

Disable

). Path cost is calculated based on the link speed of the port if the configured value for Port Path Cost is zero.

The port identifier for the specified port within the selected MST instance. It is made up from the port priority and the interface number of the port.

Time since the counters were last cleared, displayed in Days, Hours,

Minutes, and Seconds.

Spanning Tree Protocol Administrative mode associated with the port or port channel. The possible values are Enable or Disable .


Each MST Bridge Port that is enabled is assigned a Port Role for each spanning tree. The port role is one of the following values:

Root Port

,

Designated Port , Alternate Port , Backup Port , Master Port or

Disabled Port

.

Root Bridge for the selected MST instance. It is made up using the bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.

Path Cost offered to the LAN by the Designated Port.

Bridge Identifier of the bridge with the Designated Port. It is made up using the bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.

Port Identifier on the Designated Bridge that offers the lowest cost to the LAN. It is made up from the port priority and the interface number of the port.

View STP Statistics

You can view information about the number and type of bridge protocol data units (BPDUs) transmitted and received on each port.

 To view Spanning Tree statistics:







244








7.

Select

Switching

>

STP

>

Advanced

>

STP Statistics

.


The following table describes the information available on the STP Statistics screen.

Table 92. STP Statistics

Field

Interface

STP BPDUs Received

STP BPDUs Transmitted

RSTP BPDUs Received

RSTP BPDUs Transmitted

MSTP BPDUs Received

MSTP BPDUs Transmitted

Description

Selects one of the physical or port channel interfaces of the switch.

Number of STP BPDUs received at the selected port.

Number of STP BPDUs transmitted from the selected port.

Number of RSTP BPDUs received at the selected port.

Number of RSTP BPDUs transmitted from the selected port.

Number of MSTP BPDUs received at the selected port.

Number of MSTP BPDUs transmitted from the selected port.

Configure PVST VLAN Settings

You can view and configure Per VLAN Spanning Tree Protocol (PVST)/Per VLAN Rapid

Spanning Tree Protocol (RPVST) VLAN settings for the device.

 To configure PVST/RPVST VLAN settings for the device:



245











7. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > PVST VLAN in the navigation menu.

8. Select a VLAN ID , a unique VLAN identifier, from the list of VLANs with enabled STP Admin mode and PVST or RPVST.

9. In the Root list, select None , Primary , or Secondary .

The default value is None. This setting configures the switch to become the root bridge or standby root bridge by modifying the bridge priority from the default value of 32768 to a lower value calculated to ensure the bridge is the root (or standby) bridge.

10. In the Hello Time field, configure the spanning tree hello time interval for the specified

VLAN

The hello time is the interval between sending successive BPDUs. Allowed values range from 1 to 10 seconds. The default value is 2 seconds.

11. In the Forward Time field, configure the spanning tree forward delay time for a specified

VLAN.


246


The range is 4 to 30 seconds. The default value is 15 seconds. This interval is a time for listening and learning states before transitioning a port to the forwarding state.

12.

Use the

Max Age

field to configure the spanning tree maximum age time for a specified

VLAN.

Max age is the maximum age time before a bridge port saves its configuration information. The range is 6 to 40 seconds. The default value is 20 seconds.

13.

Configure the bridge

Priority

of a VLAN.

The allowed values are between 0 and 61440. The valid values are listed in the following table.

Table 93. PVST/RPVST VLAN Configuration - VLAN Bridge Priority

0

12288

24576

36864

49152

61440

4096

16384

28672

40960

53248

–

8192

20480

32768 (default)

45056

57344

–

The default value is 32768. If the value configured is not among the specified values, then it is rounded off to the nearest valid value.

14.

Click the

Add

button.

PVST/RPVST is enabled for the selected VLAN.

15. To disable PVST/RPVST for the specified VLAN entry, click the Delete button.

16.

Click the

Apply

button.


Configure the PVST Interface Settings


Spanning Tree Protocol (RPVST) Interface settings for the device.

 To configure the PVST/RPVST Interface settings:


2.



4.




247







7. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > PVST Interface .

8. Select a VLAN ID from the list of VLANs with enabled STP Admin mode and PVST or

RPVST.

Note: The Other option is used for configuring a VLAN which is not yet created. Specify the required value for VLAN ID and click the Apply button to observe actual values.

9. Configure the Priority value used to allow the operator to select the relative importance of the port in the selection process for forwarding.

Set this value to a lower number to prefer a port for forwarding of frames. This priority configuration is used when the port is configured as a point-to-point link type. The allowed values are between 0 and 240. The priority values are listed in the following table. All other values are rounded off. The default value is 128.

Note: The value must be a multiple of 16.T.

Table 94. PVST/RPVST Interface Configuration Priority Values

0

48

96

16

64

112

32

80

128 (default)


248


Table 94. (continued)PVST/RPVST Interface Configuration Priority Values

144

192

240

160

208

–

176

224

–

10.

The Per VLAN

Cost

is the path cost from the port to the root bridge.

The values allowed are between 1 and 200,000,000. By default, cost is not configured.

Use the value 0 to unconfigure the setting. If per VLAN cost is not configured, the path cost value is set based on Link Speed.



The following table describes the nonconfigurable data that the PVST/RPVST Interface

Configuration screen displays.

Table 95. PVST/RPVST Interface Configuration

Field

Interface

Role

Status

Description

The list of physical interfaces and LAGs.

Indicates the role of the interface. Possible values are as follows:

Disabled, Root, Designated, Alternate, Backup, and Master.

Note: The blank field is displayed for the interface which is not included for the specified VLAN.

Indicates the status of the interface. Possible values are as follows:

Discarding, Learning, Forwarding, and Disabled.

Note: The blank field is displayed for the interface which is not included for the specified VLAN.

View PVST Statistics


Spanning Tree Protocol (RPVST) Statistics settings for the device.

 To view the PVST/RPVST statistics:


2.



4.




249







7. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > PVST Statistics .


The Status field displays Neither PVST nor Rapid-PVST is enabled.

To display statistic information, change STP mode to PVST or to RPVST.

Multicast

Multicast IP traffic is traffic that is destined to a host group. Host groups are identified by class D IP addresses, which range from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255.

View the MFDB Table

The Multicast Forwarding Database holds the port membership information for all active multicast address entries. The key for an entry consists of a VLAN ID and MAC address pair.

Entries can contain data for more than one protocol.

 To view the MFDB Table:



250



3.





5.



6.

Click the

Login

button.


7. Select Switching > Multicast > MFDB > MFDB Table .

8. Use Search by MAC Address to enter a MAC address.

Enter six two-digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons, for example

00:01:23:43:45:67.

9. Click the GO button.

If the address exists, that entry is displayed. An exact match is required.

Table 96. MFDB Table

Field

MAC Address

VLAN ID

Type

Component

Description

The multicast MAC address for which you requested data.

The VLAN ID to which the multicast MAC address is related.

This displays the type of the entry. Static entries are those that are configured by the end user. Dynamic entries are added to the table as a result of a learning process or protocol.

This is the component that is responsible for this entry in the Multicast

Forwarding Database. Possible values are IGMP snooping, GMRP,

Static Filtering and MLD snooping.


251


Table 96. MFDB Table

Field

Description

Forwarding Interfaces

Description

The text description of this multicast table entry. Possible values are

Management Configured, Network Configured and Network Assisted.

The resultant forwarding list is derived from combining all the forwarding interfaces and removing the interfaces that are listed as the static filtering interfaces.

View the MFDB Statistics

 To view the MFDB statistics:











7. Select Switching > Multicast > MFDB > MFDB Statistics .


252


The following table describes the MFDB Statistics fields.

Table 97. MFDB Statistics

Field

Max MFDB Table Entries

Most MFDB Entries Since Last

Reset

Current Entries

Description

The maximum number of entries that the Multicast Forwarding

Database table can hold.

The largest number of entries that were present in the Multicast

Forwarding Database table since last reset. This value is also known as the MFDB high-water mark.

The current number of entries in the Multicast Forwarding Database table.

IGMP Snooping

Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping is a feature that allows a switch to forward multicast traffic intelligently on the switch. Multicast IP traffic is traffic that is destined to a host group. Host groups are identified by class D IP addresses, which range from

224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Based on the IGMP query and report messages, the switch forwards traffic only to the ports that request the multicast traffic. This prevents the switch from broadcasting the traffic to all ports and possibly affecting network performance.

A traditional Ethernet network can be separated into different network segments to prevent placing too many devices onto the same shared media. Bridges and switches connect these segments. When a packet with a broadcast or multicast destination address is received, the switch forwards a copy into each of the remaining network segments in accordance with the

IEEE MAC Bridge standard. Eventually, the packet is made accessible to all nodes connected to the network.

This approach works well for broadcast packets that are intended to be seen or processed by all connected nodes. In the case of multicast packets, however, this approach could lead to less efficient use of network bandwidth, particularly when the packet is intended for only a small number of nodes. Packets are flooded into network segments where no node is receptive to the packet. While nodes rarely incur any processing overhead to filter packets addressed to unrequested group addresses, they cannot transmit new packets onto the shared media for the period of time that the multicast packet is flooded. The problem of wasting bandwidth is even worse when the LAN segment is not shared, for example in full-duplex links.

Allowing switches to snoop IGMP packets is a creative effort to solve this problem. The switch uses the information in the IGMP packets as they are being forwarded throughout the network to determine which segments receive packets directed to the group address.


253


Configure IGMP Snooping

You can configure the parameters for IGMP snooping, which is used to build forwarding lists for multicast traffic.

Note: You must log in as the admin user, which has read/write access privileges to change the data on this screen.

 To configure IGMP snooping:














> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > Configuration .

8. Select the Admin mode Enable or Disable radio button

This specifies the administrative mode for IGMP snooping for the switch. The default is

Disable.


254


9. Use the Validate IGMP IP header option to Enable or Disable header validation for all

IGMP versions.

If Validate IGMP IP Header is enabled, then IGMP IP header checks for Router Alert option, ToS and TTL. The default value is Enable.

10. Select the Proxy Querier Mode Enable or Disable radio button.

This enables or disables IGMP proxy querier on the system. If disabled, then the IGMP proxy query with source IP 0.0.0.0 is not sent in response to IGMP leave packet. the default value is Enable.

11.

Click the

Apply

button.



Update

button.

The following table displays information about the global IGMP snooping status and statistics on the screen.

Table 98. IGMP Snooping Configuration

Field

Multicast Control Frame Count

Interfaces Enabled for IGMP

Snooping

VLAN IDs Enabled For IGMP

Snooping

Description

The number of multicast control frames that are processed by the CPU.

A list of all the interfaces currently enabled for IGMP snooping.

Displays VLAN IDs enabled for IGMP snooping.

Configure IGMP Snooping for Interfaces

 To configure IGMP snooping for interfaces:

1.



3.





5.



6.

Click the

Login

button.


255






> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > Interface Configuration .

The screen lists all physical, VLAN, and LAG interfaces.

8.

Use the

Interface

check boxes to select interfaces.

9. In the Admin Mode field, select Disable or Enable .

This specifies the interface mode for the selected interface for IGMP snooping for the switch. The default is Disable.

10. Use Group Membership Interval to specify the amount of time the switch waits for a report for a particular group on a particular interface before it deletes that interface from the group.

Enter a value between 1 and 3600 seconds. The default is 260 seconds.

11.

Use

Max Response Time to specify the amount of time the switch waits after sending a query on an interface because it did not receive a report for a particular group on that interface.

Enter a value greater or equal to 1 and less than the Group Membership Interval in seconds. The default is 10 seconds. The configured value must be less than the Group

Membership Interval.

12. Use Present Expiration Time to specify the amount of time the switch waits to receive a query on an interface before removing it from the list of interfaces with multicast routers attached.

Enter a value between 0 and 3600 seconds. The default is 0 seconds. A value of zero indicates an infinite time-out, i.e. no expiration.

13. Use Fast Leave Admin Mode to select the fast leave mode for a particular interface.


14.

Use

Proxy Querier Mode

to select the proxy querier mode for a particular interface.

If it is disabled, then IGMP proxy query with source IP 0.0.0.0 is not sent in response to

IGMP leave packet. The default value is Enable.

15.

Click the

Apply

button.


256


The settings are applied to the switch. Configuration changes take effect immediately.

Configure IGMP Snooping for VLANs

 To configure IGMP snooping settings for VLANs:

1.



3.





5.



6.

Click the

Login

button.





> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > IGMP VLAN Configuration .

8. To enable IGMP snooping on a VLAN, enter the VLAN ID and configure the IGMP snooping values:

• Use Admin Mode to enable or disable IGMP snooping for the specified VLAN ID.

• Use Fast Leave Admin Mode to enable or disable the IGMP snooping fast leave mode for the specified VLAN ID.

• Use Group Membership Interval to set the value for group membership interval of

IGMP snooping for the specified VLAN ID. The valid range is Maximum Response

Time + 1 to 3600 seconds.

• Use Maximum Response Time to set the value for maximum response time of IGMP snooping for the specified VLAN ID. The valid range is 1 to Group Membership

Interval - 1. Its value must be greater than group membership interval value.

• Use Multicast Router Expiry Time to set the value for multicast router expiry time of

IGMP snooping for the specified VLAN ID. The valid range is 0 to 3600 seconds.


257


• Use Report Suppression Mode to enable or disable IGMP snooping report suppression mode for the specified VLAN ID. IGMP snooping report suppression allows the suppression of the IGMP reports sent by the multicast hosts by building a

Layer 3 membership table, thereby sending only the very needed reports to the IGMP

Routers to receive the multicast traffic. As a result, the multicast report traffic being sent to the IGMP Routers is reduced.

• Enable or Disable the Proxy Querier Mode for the specified VLAN ID. If proxy querier mode is disabled, then IGMP proxy query with source IP 0.0.0.0 is not sent in response to an IGMP leave packet. The default is Enable.

9. To disable IGMP snooping on a VLAN and remove it from the list: a.

Select the check box next to the VLAN ID b. Click the Delete button.

10. To modify IGMP snooping settings for a VLAN: a.

Select the check box next to the VLAN ID b. Update the values c. Click the Apply button.

The settings are sent to the switch.

Configure a Multicast Router

You can configure the interface as the one the multicast router is attached to. All IGMP packets snooped by the switch are forwarded to the multicast router reachable from this interface. The configuration is not needed most of the time since the switch automatically detects the multicast router and forwards IGMP packets accordingly. It is needed only if you want to make sure that the multicast router always receives IGMP packets from the switch in a complex network.

 To configure a multicast router:











258






> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > Multicast Router Configuration .

8. Use Interface to select the physical interface.

9. In the Multicast Router field, select Enable or Disable .



Configure a Multicast Router VLAN

You can configure the interface to only forward the snooped IGMP packets that come from

VLAN ID (<VLANID>) to the multicast router attached to this interface. The configuration is not needed most of the time since the switch automatically detects a multicast router and forwards the IGMP packets accordingly. It is needed only when you want to make sure that the multicast router always receives IGMP packets from the switch in a complex network.

 To configure a multicast router VLAN:











259






> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > Multicast Router VLAN

Configuration .

8. Use Interface to select the interface.

9. Use VLAN ID to select the VLAN ID.

10. In the Multicast Router field, select Enable or Disable .



IGMP Snooping Querier Overview

IGMP snooping requires that one central switch or router periodically query all end-devices on the network to announce their multicast memberships. This central device is the IGMP querier. The IGMP query responses, known as IGMP reports, keep the switch updated with the current multicast group membership on a port-by-port basis. If the switch does not receive updated membership information in a timely fashion, it stops forwarding multicasts to the port where the end device is located.

You can configure and display information on IGMP snooping queriers on the network and, separately, on VLANs.

Configure IGMP Snooping Querier

You can configure the parameters for IGMP snooping querier. Only a user with read/write access privileges can change the data on this screen.

 To configure IGMP snooping querier settings:




260



4.









7.

Select

Switching

 >

Multicast

>

IGMP Snooping

>

Querier Configuration

.

8. Use Querier Admin Mode to select the administrative mode for IGMP snooping for the switch.


9. In the Snooping Querier IP Address field, type an IP address.

This specifies the snooping querier address to be used as the source address in periodic

IGMP queries. This address is used when no address is configured on the VLAN on which query is being sent.

10. Use IGMP Version to specify the IGMP protocol version used in periodic IGMP queries.


11. Use Query Interval(secs) to specify the time interval in seconds between periodic queries sent by the snooping querier.

The query Interval must be a value in the range of 1 and 1800. The default value is 60.

12. Use Querier Expiry Interval(secs) to specify the time interval in seconds after which the last querier information is removed.

The querier expiry Interval must be a value in the range of 60 and 300. The default value is 125.


261




The screen displays the VLAN IDs enabled for IGMP snooping querier.

Configure IGMP Snooping Querier for VLANs

You can configure IGMP queriers for use with VLANs on the network.

 To configure querier VLAN settings:














> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > Querier VLAN Configuration .

8. To create a new VLAN ID for IGMP snooping, select New Entry from the VLAN ID field and complete the following fields.

You can also set pre-configurable snooping querier parameters.

• VLAN ID . The VLAN ID for which the IGMP snooping querier is to be enabled.

• Querier Election Participate Mode . Enable or disable querier Participate mode.

Disabled . Upon seeing another querier of the same version in the VLAN, the snooping querier moves to the non-querier state.


262


Enabled . The snooping querier participates in querier election, in which the least

IP address operates as the querier in that VLAN. The other querier moves to non-querier state.

• Snooping Querier VLAN Address

. Specify the snooping querier IP address to be used as the source address in periodic IGMP queries sent on the specified VLAN.


The settings are applied to the switch. Configuration changes take effect immediately

10.

To disable snooping querier on a VLAN, select the VLAN ID and click the

Delete

button.


Table 99. Querier VLAN Configuration


Operational State

Operational Version

Last Querier Address

The operational state of the IGMP snooping querier on a VLAN. It can be in any of the following states:

• Querier : The snooping switch is the querier in the VLAN. The snooping switch sends out periodic queries with a time interval equal to the configured querier query interval. If the snooping switch finds a better querier in the VLAN, it moves to non-querier mode.

• Non-Querier

: The snooping switch is innNon-querier mode in the

VLAN. If the querier expiry interval timer expires, the snooping switch moves into querier mode.

• Disabled : The snooping querier is not operational on the VLAN.

The snooping querier moves to disabled mode when IGMP snooping is not operational on the VLAN or when the querier address is not configured or the network management address is also not configured.

The operational IGMP protocol version of the querier.

The IP address of the last querier from which a query was snooped on the VLAN.

Last Querier Version The IGMP protocol version of the last querier from which a query was snooped on the VLAN.

Operational Max Response Time Displays maximum response time to be used in the queries that are sent by the snooping querier.

Configure MLD Snooping

You can configure the parameters for MLD snooping, which is used to build forwarding lists for multicast traffic. Only a user with read/write access privileges can change the data on this screen.

 To configure MLD snooping:

1.



263














> Multicast > MLD Snooping > Configuration .

8. Use MLD Snooping Admin Mode to select the administrative mode for MLD snooping for the switch.


9. Select the Proxy Querier Mode Enable or Disable radio button.

This enables or disables an MLD proxy querier on the system. If it is disabled, then an

MLD proxy query with source IP 0::0 is not sent in response to an MLD leave packet. If it is enabled, then MLD proxy queries are sent. The default value is Enable.





264


The following table describes the nonconfigurable MLD Snooping Configuration fields.

Table 100. MLD Snooping Configuration

Field

Multicast Control Frame Count

Interfaces Enabled for MLD

Snooping

VLAN IDs Enabled For MLD

Snooping

Definition

The number of multicast control frames that are processed by the CPU.

A list of all the interfaces currently enabled for MLD snooping.

Displays VLAN IDs enabled for MLD snooping.

Configure a MLD Snooping Interface

 To configure a MLD snooping interface:

1.



3.





5.



6.

Click the

Login

button.





> Multicast > MLD Snooping > Interface Configuration .


265


All physical, VLAN, and LAG interfaces are displayed.

8. Use the Interface check boxes to select the interface.

9. Use Admin Mode to select the interface mode for the selected interface for MLD snooping for the switch.


10. Use Group Membership Interval(secs) to specify the amount of time the switch waits for a report for a particular group on a particular interface before it deletes that interface from the group.

The valid range is from 2 to 3600 seconds. The configured value must be greater than

Max Response Time. The default is 260 seconds.

11. Use Max Response Time (secs) to specify the amount of time the switch waits after sending a query on an interface because it did not receive a report for a particular group on that interface.

Enter a value greater or equal to 1 and less than the group membership interval in seconds. The default is 10 seconds. The configured value must be less than the group membership interval.

12. Use Present Expiration Time to specify the amount of time the switch waits to receive a query on an interface before removing it from the list of interfaces with multicast routers attached.

Enter a value between 0 and 3600 seconds. The default is 0 seconds. A value of zero indicates an infinite time-out, that is, no expiration.

13. Use Fast Leave Admin Mode to select the fast leave mode for a particular interface. The default is Disable.

14. Select the Proxy Querier Mode to Enable or Disable MLD proxy querier on the system.

If it is disabled, then an MLD proxy query with source IP 0::0 is not sent in response to an

MLD leave packet. If it is enabled, then MLD proxy queries are sent. The default value is

Enable.

Configure MLD VLAN Settings

 To configure MLD VLAN settings:








266







7.

Select

Switching



> Multicast > MLD Snooping > MLD VLAN Configuration

.

8. Use VLAN ID to set the VLAN IDs for which MLD snooping is enabled.

9. Use Admin Mode to enable MLD snooping for the specified VLAN ID.

10. Use Fast Leave Admin Mode to enable or disable the MLD snooping fast leave mode for the specified VLAN ID.

11. Use Group Membership Interval to set the value for group membership interval of MLD snooping for the specified VLAN ID.

The valid range is (Maximum Response Time + 1) to 3600.

12. Use Maximum Response Time to set the value for the maximum response time of MLD snooping for the specified VLAN ID.

The valid range is 1 to (Group Membership Interval –1). Its value must be less than group membership interval value.

13. Use Multicast Router Expiry Time to set the value for the multicast router expiry time of

MLD snooping for the specified VLAN ID.

The valid range is 0 to 3600.


The updated configuration is sent to the switch.

Enable or Disable a Multicast Router on an Interface

 To enable or disable a multicast router on an interface:






267











> Multicast > MLD Snooping > Multicast Router Configuration .

8. Interface : Select the interface.

9. Use Multicast Router to enable or disable s multicast router on the selected interface.



Configure Multicast Router VLAN Settings

 To configure multicast router VLAN settings:









268



6.

Click the

Login

button.





> Multicast > MLD Snooping > Multicast Router VLAN Configuration .


9. Use VLAN ID to select the VLAN ID.

10. Use Multicast Router to enable or disable the multicast router for the VLAN ID.



Configure MLD Snooping Querier

You can configure the parameters for an MLD snooping querier. Only a user with read/write access privileges can change the data on this screen.

 To configure an MLD snooping querier:











269






> Multicast > MLD Snooping > Querier Configuration .

8. Use Querier Admin Mode to select the administrative mode for MLD snooping for the switch.


9. Use Querier Address to specify the snooping querier address to be used as source address in periodic MLD queries.

This address is used when no address is configured on the VLAN on which query is being sent. The supported IPv6 formats are x:x:x:x:x:x:x:x and x::x.

10. Use MLD Version to specify the MLD protocol version used in periodic MLD queries.

11. Use Query Interval(secs) to specify the time interval in seconds between periodic queries sent by the snooping querier.

The query interval must be a value in the range of 1 to 1800. The default value is 60.

12. Use Querier Expiry Interval(secs) to specify the time interval in seconds after which the last querier information is removed.

The querier expiry Interval must be a value in the range of 60 to 300. The default value is

60.

The screen displays VLAN IDs enabled for the MLD snooping querier.


270


Configure MLD Snooping Querier VLAN Settings

 To configure MLD snooping querier VLAN settings:


2.



4.









7.

Select

Switching



> Multicast > MLD Snooping > Querier VLAN Configuration

.

8. Use VLAN ID to select the VLAN ID on which the MLD snooping querier is administratively enabled and a VLAN exists in the VLAN database.

9. Use Querier Election Participate Mode to enable or disable the MLD snooping querier participation in election mode.

When this mode is disabled, on detecting another querier of same version in the VLAN, the snooping querier moves to a non-querier state. When this mode is enabled, the snooping querier participates in querier election where the lowest IP address wins the querier election and operates as the querier in that VLAN. The other querier moves to non-querier state.

10. Use Querier VLAN Address to specify the snooping querier address to be used as the source address in periodic MLD queries sent on the specified VLAN.


271



Table 101. Querier VLAN Configuration

Field

Operational State

Description

The operational state of the MLD snooping querier on a VLAN. It can be in any of the following states:

• Querier

: Snooping switch is the querier in the VLAN. The snooping switch sends out periodic queries with a time interval equal to the configured querier query interval. If the snooping switch sees a better querier in the VLAN, it moves to non-querier mode.

• Non-Querier

: Snooping switch is in non-querier mode in the VLAN. If the querier expiry interval timer is expired, the snooping switch moves into querier mode.

• Disabled : Snooping querier is not operational on the VLAN. The snooping querier moves to disabled mode when MLD snooping is not operational on the VLAN or when the querier address is not configured or the network management address is also not configured.

Operational Version

Last Querier Address

Last Querier Version

The operational MLD protocol version of the querier.

The IP address of the last querier from which a query was snooped on the

VLAN.

The MLD protocol version of the last querier from which a query was snooped on the VLAN.

Operational Max Response Time Displays maximum response time to be used in the queries that are sent by the snooping querier.

Configure MVR

You can configure basic, advanced, group, interface or group membership settings.

Configure Basic MVR Settings

 To configure basic MVR settings:









272



6.

Click the

Login

button.


7. Select Switching > MVR > Basic > MVR Configuration .

8. Use MVR Running to Enable or Disable the MVR feature.

The factory default is Disable .

9. Use MVR Multicast VLAN to specify the VLAN on which MVR multicast data is received.

All source ports belong to this VLAN. The value can be set in a range of 1 to 4093. The default value is 1.

10. Use MVR Global Query Response Time to set the maximum time to wait for the IGMP reports membership on a receiver port.

This time applies only to receiver-port leave processing. When an IGMP query is sent from a receiver port, the switch waits for the default or configured MVR query time for an

IGMP group membership report before removing the port from the multicast group membership. The value is equal to the tenths of a second. The range is from 1 to 100 tenths. The factory default is 5 tenths or one-half.

11. Use MVR Mode to specify the MVR mode of operation.

Possible values are compatible or dynamic. The factory default is compatible.





273



Table 102. MVR Configuration

Field

MVR Max Multicast Groups

MVR Current Multicast Groups

Definition

The maximum number of multicast groups that MVR supports.

Displays current number of the MVR groups allocated.

Configure Advanced MVR Settings

 To configure advanced MVR settings:











7. Select Switching > MVR > Advanced > MVR Configuration .

8. Select the MVR Running Enable or Disable radio button.



274


9. Use the MVR Multicast VLAN to specify the VLAN on which MVR multicast data is received.

All source ports belong to this VLAN. The value can be set in a range of 1 to 4094. The default value is 1.

10. Use the MVR Global query response time to set the maximum time to wait for the IGMP reports membership on a receiver port. This time applies only to receiver-port leave processing. When an IGMP query is sent from a receiver port, the switch waits for the default or configured MVR query time for an IGMP group membership report before removing the port from the multicast group membership. The value is equal to the tenths of second. The range is from 1 to 100 tenths. The factory default is 5 tenths or one-half.

11.

Select a

MVR Mode radio button to specify the MVR mode of operation.

The factory default is compatible.





Table 103. Advanced MVR Configuration

Field

MVR Max Multicast Groups

MVR Current Multicast Groups

Definition

The maximum number of multicast groups that MVR supports.

Displays the current number of MVR groups allocated.

Configure an MVR Group

 To configure an MVR group:

1.



3.





5.



6.

Click the

Login

button.


275



7. Select Switching > MVR > Advanced > MVR Group Configuration .

8. Use the MVR Group IP to specify the IP address for the new MVR group.

9. Use the Count to specify the number of contiguous MVR groups.

This helps you to create multiple MVR groups through a single click of the Add button. If the field is empty, then clicking the button creates only one new group. The field is displayed as empty for each particular group. The range is from 1 to 256.


The MVR group is added.

11. T delete a selected MVR group, click the Delete button.


Table 104. MVR Group Configuration

Field

Status

Members

Definition

The status of the specific MVR group.

The list of ports that participate in the specific MVR group.

Configure an MVR Interface

 To configure an MVR interface:









276



6.

Click the

Login

button.


7. Select Switching > MVR > Advanced > MVR Interface Configuration .

The status of each port displays.


9. Use Admin Mode to Enable or Disable MVR on a port.


10. Use Type to configure the port as an MVR receiver port or a source port.

The default port type is none .

11. Use Immediate Leave to Enable or Disable the Immediate Leave feature of the MVR on a port.





Configure MVR Group Membership

 To configure MVR group membership:






277








7. Select Switching > MVR > Advanced > MVR Group Membership .

8.

Use the

Group IP to specify the IP multicast address of the MVR group.

9. Use the Port List to view the configured list of members of the selected MVR group.

You can use this port list to add the ports you selected to this MVR group.

10.

Click the

Apply

button.


View MVR Statistics

 To view MVR statistics:


2.



4.






278



6.

Click the

Login

button.


7. Select Switching > MVR > Advanced > MVR Statistics .



Table 105. MVR Statistics

Field

IGMP Query Received

IGMP Report V1 Received

IGMP Report V2 Received

IGMP Leave Received

IGMP Query Transmitted

IGMP Report V1 Transmitted

IGMP Report V2 Transmitted

IGMP Leave Transmitted

IGMP Packet Receive Failures

IGMP Packet Transmit Failures

Definition

The number of received IGMP queries.

The number of received IGMP reports V1.

The number of received IGMP reports V2.

The number of received IGMP leaves.

The number of transmitted IGMP queries.

The number of transmitted IGMP reports V1.

The number of transmitted IGMP reports V2.

The number of transmitted IGMP leaves.

The number of IGMP packet receive failures.

The number of IGMP packet transmit failures.


279


MAC Address Table

You can view or configure the MAC Address Table. This table contains information about unicast entries for which the switch has forwarding or filtering information. This information is used by the transparent bridging function in determining how to propagate a received frame.

Configure the MAC Address Table

 To configure the MAC Address Table:











7. Select Switching > Address Table> Basic > Address Table .

8. Use Search By to search for MAC addresses by MAC address, VLAN ID, or port:

• Searched by MAC Address . Select MAC Address , enter the 6-byte hexadecimal

MAC address in two-digit groups separated by colons, for example,

01:23:45:67:89:AB. Then click the Go button. If the address exists, that entry is


280

M6100, M5300, and M7100 Series Managed Switches displayed as the first entry followed by the remaining (greater) MAC addresses. An exact match is required.

• Searched by VLAN ID . Select VLAN ID , enter the VLAN ID, for example, 100. Then click the

Go

button. If the address exists, the entry is displayed as the first entry followed by the remaining (greater) MAC addresses.

• Searched by Port

. Select

Port

, enter the port ID in Unit/Slot/Port format, for example,

2/1/1. Then click the Go button. If the address exists, the entry is displayed as the first entry followed by the remaining (greater) MAC addresses.


Table 106. Basic Address Table

Field

Total MAC Address

MAC Address

VLAN ID

Port

Status

Description

Displaying the number of total MAC addresses learned or configured.

A unicast MAC address for which the switch has forwarding and/or filtering information. The format is a 6 byte MAC address that is separated by colons, for example 01:23:45:67:89:AB.

The VLAN ID associated with the MAC address.

The port upon which this address was learned.

The status of this entry. The meanings of the values are as follows:

• Static. The value of the corresponding instance was added by the system or a user and cannot be relearned.

• Learned. The value of the corresponding instance was learned, and is being used.

• Management. The value of the corresponding instance is also the value of an existing instance of dot1dStaticAddress.

Set the Dynamic Address Aging Interval

You can set the address aging interval for the specified forwarding database.

 To set the address aging interval,

1.



3.





5.



281





7. Select Switching > Address Table> Advanced > Dynamic Addresses .

8. Use Address Aging Timeout (seconds) to specify the time-out period in seconds for aging out dynamically learned forwarding information.

802.1D-1990 recommends a default of 300 seconds. The value can be specified as any number between 10 and 1000000 seconds. The factory default is 300.

Configure a Static MAC Address

 To configure a static MAC address:











7. Select Switching > Address Table> Advanced > Static MAC Address .


282


8. Use Interface to select the physical interface/LAGs.

9. In the Static MAC Address field, type the MAC address.

10. Select the VLAN ID associated with the MAC address.


The static MAC address is added to the switch.

12. To delete a existing static MAC address from the switch, click the Delete button.

Port Settings

You can view and monitor the physical port information for the ports available on the switch.

Configure Port Settings

You can configure the physical interfaces on the switch.

 To configure port settings:











283



7. Select Switching > Ports > Port Configuration .

8. Use Port to select the interface.

9. Use STP Mode to select the Spanning Tree Protocol administrative mode for the port or

LAG.

The possible values are as follows:

• Enable . Select this to enable the Spanning Tree Protocol for this port.

• Disable . Select this to disable the Spanning Tree Protocol for this port.

The default is Enable.

10. In the Admin Mode list, select Enable or Disable .

This sets the port control administrative mode.For the port to participate in the network, you must select Enable . The factory default is Enable.

11. From the LACP Mode list, select Enable or Disable .

This selects the Link Aggregation Control Protocol administrative mode. The mode must be enabled in order for the port to participate in link aggregation. The factory default is

Enable.

12. From the Auto-negotiation list, select Enable or Disable .

This specifies the auto-negotiation mode for this port. The default is Enable.

Note: After you change the auto-negotiation mode, the switch might be inaccessible for a number of seconds while the new settings take effect.

13. From the Speed list, select the speed value for the selected port.

Possible field values are as follows:

• Auto . All supported speeds.

• 100 . 100 Mbits/second

• 10G . 10 Gbits/second.

The delimiter characters for setting different speed values are a comma (,), a period (.) and a space ( ). For you to set the auto-negotiation speed, the auto-negotiation mode must be set to Enable . The default is Auto .


284


Note: After you change the speed value, the switch might be inaccessible for a number of seconds while the new settings take effect.

14.

From the

Duplex Mode

list, select the duplex mode for the selected port.


• Auto . Indicates that speed is set by the auto-negotiation process.

• Full

. Indicates that the interface supports transmission between the devices in both directions simultaneously.

• Half

. Indicates that the interface supports transmission between the devices in only one direction at a time.

The default is Auto .

Note: After you change the duplex mode, the switch might be inaccessible for a number of seconds while the new settings take effect.

15.

Use the

Link Trap object

to determine whether to send a trap when link status changes.

The factory default is enabled.

16. Use Frame Size to specify the maximum Ethernet frame size the interface supports or is configured to use , including Ethernet header, CRC, and payload.

The range is 1518 to 12288. The default maximum frame size is 1518.

17.

Use

Debounce Time

to specify the timer value for port debouncing in a multiple of 100 milliseconds (msec) in the range to 100 to 5000.

The default debounce timer value is 0, which means that debounce is disabled.

18. From the Flow Control list, select to Enable or Disable IEEE 802.3 flow control.

The default is Disable. The switch does not send pause frames if the port buffers become full. Flow control helps to prevent data loss when the port cannot keep up with the number of frames being switched. When enabled, the switch can send a pause frame to stop traffic on a port if the amount of memory used by the packets on the port exceeds a preconfigured threshold and responds to pause requests from partner devices. The paused port does not forward packets for the period of time specified in the pause frame.

When the pause frame time elapses, or the utilization returns to a specified low threshold, the switch enables the port to again transmit frames. For LAG interfaces, flow control mode is displayed as

blank

because flow control is not applicable.

19.

Click the

Apply

button.

The switch is updated with the values you entered. For the switch to retain the new values across a power cycle, you must save the configuration.


285



Table 107. Port Configuration

Field

Media Type

Port Type

Admin Status

Physical Status

Link Status ifIndex

Description

The media type.

For normal ports this field is

Normal

. Otherwise the possible values are as follows:

• Mirrored

. The port is a mirrored port on which all the traffic is copied to the probe port.

• Probe

. Use this port to monitor a mirrored port.

• Trunk Member . The port is a member of a link aggregation trunk.

Look at the LAG screens for more information.

When the port’s admin mode is D-Disable, this field indicates the reason. Possible reasons are as follows:

• STP

. Spanning Tree Protocol violation.

• UDLD . UDLD protocol violation.

• XCEIVER

. Unsupported SFP/SFP+ inserted.

Indicates the port speed and duplex mode.

Indicates whether the link is up or down.

The ifIndex of the interface table entry associated with this port.

Configure Port Descriptions

 To configure and display the description for all ports in the device:











7. Select Switching > Ports > Port Description .


286


8.

Use

Port Description

to enter the description string to be attached to a port.

It can be up to 64 characters in length.


Table 108. Port Description

Field

Port

MAC Address

PortList Bit Offset ifIndex

Description

Selects the interface for which data is to be displayed or configured.

The physical address of the specified interface.

The bit offset value that corresponds to the port when the MIB object type PortList is used to manage in SNMP.

The interface index associated with the port.

View Port Transceiver Information

You can view the transceiver information for all fiber ports in the box.

 To view port transceiver information:

1.



3.





5.



6.

Click the

Login

button.


287



7. Select Switching > Ports > Port Transceiver .

8. Select Unit ID to display physical ports of the selected unit or select All to display physical ports of all units.


The following describes the nonconfigurable data that is displayed.

Table 109. Port Transceiver

Field

Port

Vendor Name

Link Length 50 μ m

Link Length 62, 5 μ m

Serial Number

Part Number

Nominal Bit Rate

Revision

Compliance

Description

The interface for which data is to be displayed.

Vendor name of the SFP.

Link length supported for 50 μ m fiber.

Link length supported for 62, 5 μ m fiber.

Serial number of the SFP.

Part number of the SFP.

Nominal signalling rate for SFP.

Vendor revision of the SFP.

Compliance of the SFP.

Link Aggregation Groups

Link aggregation groups (LAGs), which are also known as port-channels, allow you to combine multiple full-duplex Ethernet links into a single logical link. Network devices treat the aggregation as if it were a single link, which increases fault tolerance and provides load sharing. You assign the LAG VLAN membership after you create a LAG. The LAG by default becomes a member of the management VLAN.

A LAG interface can be either static or dynamic, but not both. All members of a LAG must participate in the same protocols. A static port-channel interface does not require a partner system to be able to aggregate its member ports.


288


Static LAGs are supported. When a port is added to a LAG as a static member, it neither transmits nor receives LACPDUs.

Configure LAG Settings

You can group one or more full-duplex Ethernet links to be aggregated together to form a link aggregation group, which is also known as a port-channel. The switch treats the LAG as if it were a single link.

 To configure LAG settings:

1.



3.





5.



6.

Click the

Login

button.



 > LAG > LAG Configuration .

8. Use LAG Name to enter the name to be assigned to the LAG.

You can enter any string of up to 15 alphanumeric characters. A valid name must be specified for you to create the LAG.

9. Use Admin Mode to select enable or disable.

When the LAG is disabled, no traffic flows and LACPDUs are dropped, but the links that form the LAG are not released. The factory default is Enable.

10. Use Hash Mode to select the load-balancing mode used on a port-channel (LAG).

Traffic is balanced on a port-channel (LAG) by selecting one of the links in the channel over which to transmit specific packets. The link is selected by creating a binary pattern from selected fields in a packet, and associating that pattern with a particular link:


289


• Src MAC, VLAN, EType, incoming port . Source MAC, VLAN, EtherType, and incoming port associated with the packet.

• Dest MAC, VLAN, EType, incoming port . Destination MAC, VLAN, EtherType, and incoming port associated with the packet.

• Src/Dest MAC, VLAN, EType, incoming port . Source/Destination MAC, VLAN,

EtherType, and incoming port associated with the packet. Src/Dest MAC , VLAN ,

EType , incoming port is the default.

• Src IP and Src TCP/UDP Port fields. Source IP and Source TCP/UDP fields of the packet.

• Dest IP and Dest TCP/UDP Port fields. Destination IP and Destination TCP/UDP Port fields of the packet.

• Src/Dest IP and TCP/UDP Port Fields . Source/Destination IP and source/destination

TCP/UDP Port fields of the packet.

• Enhanced hashing Mode . Features MODULO-N operation based on the number of ports in the LAG, non-unicast traffic and unicast traffic hashing using a common hash algorithm, excellent load balancing performance, and packet attributes selection based on the packet type:

• For L2 packets, source and destination MAC address are used for hash computation.

• For L3 packets, source IP, destination IP address, TCP/UDP ports are used.

11. Use STP Mode to enable or disable the Spanning Tree Protocol administrative mode associated with the LAG.


• Disable . Spanning tree is disabled for this LAG.

• Enable . Spanning tree is enabled for this LAG. Enable is the default.

12. Use Static Mode to select Enable or Disable .

When the LAG is enabled, it does not transmit or process received LACPDUs that is, the member ports do not transmit LACPDUs and all the LACPDUs it can receive are dropped. The factory default is Disable.

13. Use Link Trap to specify whether to send a trap when the link status changes.

The factory default is Enable, which causes the trap to be sent.

14. Use Local Preference Mode to Enable or Disable the LAG interface’s local preference mode.


15. Click the Delete button to remove the currently selected configured LAG.

All ports that were members of this LAG are removed from the LAG and included in the default VLAN.



290


The switch is updated with the values you entered. Configuration changes take effect immediately.


Table 110. LAG Configuration

Field

LAG Description

LAG ID

LAG State

Configured Ports

Active Ports

Description

Enter the description string to be attached to a LAG. It can be up to 64 characters in length.

Identification of the LAG.


Indicate the ports that are members of this port-channel

Indicates the ports that are actively participating in the port-channel.

Configure LAG Membership

You can select two or more full-duplex Ethernet links to be aggregated together to form a link aggregation group (LAG), which is also known as a port-channel. The switch can treat the port-channel as if it were a single link.

 To configure LAG membership:


2.



4.









7.

Select

Switching

 >

LAG

>

LAG Membership

.


291


8. Use LAG ID to select the identification of the LAG.

9. Use LAG Name to enter the name to be assigned to the LAG.

You can enter any string of up to 15 alphanumeric characters. A valid name must be specified for you to create the LAG.

10. Use LAG Description to enter the description string to be attached to a LAG.

It can be up to 64 characters in length.

11. Use Admin Mode to select Enable or Disable .

When the LAG is disabled, no traffic flows and LACPDUs are dropped, but the links that form the LAG are not released. The factory default is Enable.

12. Use Link Trap to specify whether to send a trap when the link status changes.

The factory default is Enable, which causes the trap to be sent.

13. Use STP Mode to enable or disable the Spanning Tree Protocol administrative mode associated with the LAG.


• Disable . Spanning tree is disabled for this LAG.

• Enable . Spanning tree is enabled for this LAG. Enable is the default.

14. Use Static Mode to select enable or disable.

When the LAG is enabled, it does not transmit or process received LACPDUs that is, the member ports do not transmit LACPDUs and all the LACPDUs it can receive are dropped. The factory default is Disable.

15. Use Hash Mode to select the load-balancing mode used on a port-channel (LAG).

Traffic is balanced on a port-channel (LAG) by selecting one of the links in the channel over which to transmit specific packets. The link is selected by creating a binary pattern from selected fields in a packet, and associating that pattern with a particular link:


292


• Src MAC,VLAN,EType,incoming port . Source MAC, VLAN, EtherType, and incoming port associated with the packet.

• Dest MAC,VLAN,EType,incoming port . Destination MAC, VLAN, EtherType, and incoming port associated with the packet.

• Src/Dest MAC,VLAN,EType,incoming port . Source/Destination MAC, VLAN,

EtherType, and incoming port associated with the packet. This option is the default.

• Src IP and Src TCP/UDP Port fields. Source IP and Source TCP/UDP fields of the packet.

• Dest IP and Dest TCP/UDP Port fields. Destination IP and Destination TCP/UDP Port fields of the packet.

• Src/Dest IP and TCP/UDP Port fields. Source/Destination IP and source/destination

TCP/UDP Port fields of the packet.

• Enhanced Hashing Mode . Features MODULO-N operation based on the number of ports in the LAG, non-unicast traffic and unicast traffic hashing using a common hash algorithm, excellent load balancing performance, and packet attributes selection based on the packet type:

For L2 packets, source and destination MAC address are used for hash computation.

For L3 packets, source IP, destination IP address, TCP/UDP ports are used.

16. Use the Port Selection Table to select the ports as members of the LAG.

Configure the Virtual Port-Channel Global Settings

Note: Only switch series M6100 and M7100 support this feature.

You can view and manage global virtual port-channel (VPC) settings on the device. VPCs are also known as multichassis or multiswitch link aggregation groups (MLAGs). Like port-channels (also known as link aggregation groups or LAGs), VPCs allow one or more

Ethernet links to be aggregated together to increase speed and provide redundancy. With port-channels, the aggregated links must be on the same physical device, but VPCs do not share that requirement. The VPC feature allows links on two different switches to pair with links on a partner device. The partner device is unaware that it is pairing with two different devices to form a port channel.

Note: Virtual port-channel configuration is supported by the M6100 and

M7100 platforms.

 To configure the virtual port-channel global settings:

1.



293











7. Select Switching > MLAG > Basic > VPC Global Configuration .

Note: You can navigate to the same screen by selecting Switching > MLAG

> Advanced > VPC Global Configuration .

8. In the VPC Mode field, select Enable or Disable to globally enable or disable the VPC feature.

By default, the VPC feature is disabled.

9. In the Domain ID field, enter the ID of the VPC domain.

Possible values are 1 to 255. The VPC domain ID must be equal to the domain ID of the peer for a VPC pair to be formed. The domain IDs are exchanged during role election and, if they are different, VPC does not become operational.

10. If you select the Remove Domain ID option, the current VPC domain ID is deleted.


294


11. Select Auto or Manual in the VPC MAC Mode field to indicate the administrative mode of

VPC on the system.

The default is Auto.

12.

Use the

VPC MAC

field to configure the MAC address of the VPC domain.

The VPC MAC must be the same on both the MLAG peer devices. The MAC address must be a unicast MAC address in the format XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX and must not be equal to the physical MAC address of either the primary or secondary VPC system device. A VPC MAC is auto-generated using the VPC domain ID or it can be configured manually. The configured VPC domain MAC address is exchanged during role election and, if configured differently on the peer device, then VPC does not become operational.

The configured domain MAC address is present in the LACP PDUs and STP BPDUs that are sent on VPC member ports if VPC primary device election takes place after the VPC

MAC address is configured. When the VPC MAC address is configured after the VPC primary device is elected, the already agreed upon operational VPC MAC address is used in the LACP PDUs and STP BPDUs, instead of the configured VPC MAC address.

By default, the domain uses a preconfigured MAC address. The VPC MAC address range is C0:FF:D4:A7:DA:00 to C0:FF:D4:A7:DA:FF.

13. Configure the VPC System Priority for the VPC domain.

The system priority must be the same on both peer devices for VPC to become operational. If the configured VPC system priority is different on VPC peers, then VPC does not come up. The system priority is present in the LACP PDUs that are sent out on

VPC member ports if the VPC primary device election takes place after the VPC system priority is configured. When VPC system priority is configured after the VPC primary device is elected, the already agreed upon operational VPC system priority is used in the

LACP PDUs, instead of the configured VPC system priority. By default, the VPC system priority is 32767. The possible range is 1–65535.


295


The following table describes the nonconfigurable VPC Global Configuration fields.

Table 111. VPC Channel Global Configuration

Field

Operational VPC MAC

VPC State

Operational VPC MAC

Operational VPC System Priority

Self Role

Local System MAC

Description

The VPC MAC address agreed upon by both peers during role election.

This field is present in the keep-alive message only if the transmitting peer is either primary or secondary.

The global MLAG state, which is one of the following:

• Disable . The VPC mode is not operational.

• Listen

. The keep-alive component does not advertise any packets.

It listens for advertisements from a peer.

• Ready

. The keep-alive component starts sending periodic keep-alive messages.

• Primary

. Traffic over VPC interfaces is allowed to be forwarded in this state. The keep-alive component continues to advertise keep-alive messages with the state as primary and monitors the health of the secondary device.

• Secondary

. Traffic over VPC interfaces is allowed to be forwarded in this state. The keep-alive component continues to advertise keep-alive messages with the state as secondary and monitors the health of the primary device.

The VPC MAC address agreed upon by both peers during role election.

This field is present in the keep-alive message only if the transmitting peer is either primary or secondary.

The VPC system priority agreed upon by both peers during role election. This field is present in the keep-alive message only if the transmitting peer is either primary or secondary.

The role of the local device in the VPC domain, which is either Primary ,

Secondary

, or

None

. The default is None. The role is determined by an election between the two devices after a keep-alive link is established. The primary device owns the VPC member ports on the secondary device and handles the control plane functionality of supported protocols for the VPC member ports on the secondary device.

The MAC address of the local system.

Configure the Keep-Alive Parameters

The VPC feature sends periodic keep-alive messages over the peer link between the primary and secondary devices in the VPC domain to determine the device roles (primary and secondary) and to monitor the health of the link.

 To configure the keep-alive parameters:



296



3.





5.



6.

Click the

Login

button.


7. Select Switching > MLAG > Basic > VPC Global Configuration > Keepalive

Parameters .

8.

Enter the

Keepalive Priority

.

Use this field to configure the priority value that is used on a switch for primary and secondary role selection. The primary switch is responsible for maintaining and propagating the spanning tree and link aggregation states to the secondary switch. The range is 1 to 255 seconds. The default is 100. The device with a lower priority value becomes the primary device in the VPC role election.

9. Enter the Keepalive Timeout .

Use this field to configure the number of seconds that must pass without receiving a keep-alive message before the peer device is considered to be down. If an MLAG switch does not receive keep-alive messages from the peer for this time-out value, it then transitions its role (if required). The range is 2 to 15 seconds. The default is 5 seconds.

10. Use the Keepalive Admin Mode field to Enable or Disable the administrative mode of the keep-alive component on the device.

If a VPC switch does not receive keep-alive messages from the peer within the time-out value, it begins the process of transitioning its role to primary (if standby). By default, the keep-alive admin mode is disabled.

11.

Click the

Apply

button.



297


View the VPC Peer Link Settings

 To configure the peer settings:











7. Select > VPC Global Configuration


Note: You can also navigate to this screen by selecting Switching > MLAG

> Advanced > VPC Global Configuration .

The following table describes the nonconfigurable VPC peer settings.

Table 112. VPC Peer Settings

Field

Domain ID

VPC MAC

Description

The ID of the peer VPC domain.

The MAC address of the peer VPC domain.


298


Table 112. VPC Peer Settings

Field

Operational VPC MAC

Description

The VPC MAC address agreed upon by both peers during the role election.

VPC System Priority

Peer Role

The system priority of the peer VPC domain.

Operational VPC System Priority The VPC system priority agreed upon by both peers during role election.

The role of the peer device in the VPC domain, which is Primary,

Secondary, or None.

Local System MAC The MAC address of the peer system.

Configure the Peer Link Settings

The peer link is a port-channel that serves as the link between the two devices in the VPC domain. Using a multimember port-channel as the peer link helps protect it from link-level failures. The peer link is used to do the following:

•

Carry the keep-alive messages between the two peer devices.

• Carry the BPDUs and LACPDUs between the secondary and primary VPC devices.

•

Carry control messages like VPC member port-related events, FDB/MFDB entries, and configuration details.

•

Carry data traffic over the peer’s VPC member ports when the member ports of the VPC interface on the local device are all down.

 To configure the peer link settings:

1.



3.





5.



6.

Click the

Login

button.


7. Select >


299



The VPC Global Configuration screen displays.

9. Scroll down to the Peer Link section.

10. Select the Enable Modification option to enable port-channel modification.

11. Use the Port Channel list to configure a LAG interface as the VPC peer link and enable/disable the peer link protocol.

The peer link protocol is disabled by default. Select None to remove the lag from a port channel. The port channel cannot be changed or reset when the operational VPC mode is

Enabled.



The following table describes the nonconfigurable Peer Link fields.

Table 113. Peer Link

Field

Peer Link Status

Peer Keepalive Priority

Peer Link STP Mode

Description

The operational status of the peer link, which is either Up or Down.

The peer keep-alive priority.

The Spanning Tee Protocol (STP) administrative mode of the port channel. When enabled, the port channel participates in the STP operation to help prevent network loops.

Configure the Peer Detection Settings

The peer detection feature uses the Dual Control Plane Detection Protocol (DCPDP), a

UDP-based protocol, to detect peer links. You must configure peer detection on an IP interface with a VLAN that is not shared by any of the VPC interfaces.


300


 To configure the peer detection settings:


2.



4.









7.

Select

Switching > MLAG > Basic > VPC Global Configuration

.

The VPC Global Configuration screen displays.

8. Scroll down to the Peer Detection section.

9. Select the Peer Detection Mode option to Enable or Disable the Dual Control Plane

Detection Protocol (DCPDP).

The mode is disabled by default. This configuration is used to enable the detection of peer VPC switches (and suppress state transitions out of the secondary state) in the presence of peer link failure.

10. In the Peer IP Address field, enter the IP address of the peer VPC device.

This is the destination IP address in the DCPDP messages. The default value is 0.0.0.0.

11. Enter the local Source IP Address to be used by DCPDP.


12. Enter the local UDP Port number that is used to listen for peer DCPDP packets.


301


The range is 1 to 65535 seconds. The default is 50000.

13. Configure the Tx Interval in milliseconds between the DCPDP messages transmitted.

The range is 200 to 4000 milliseconds.

14. Configure the Rx Timeout , which is the DCPDP reception time-out in milliseconds.

The range is 700 to 14000 milliseconds.



The following table describes the nonconfigurable Peer Detection field.

Table 114. Peer Detection

Field

Peer Detection Status

Operational Tx Interval

Operational Rx Timeout

Description

Displays whether peer detection is enabled or disabled.

The operational transmit interval in milliseconds.

The operational time-out value in milliseconds.

Configure the Virtual Port Channel Interface

You can configure the VPC interfaces on the device. You create a VPC interface by combining a port channel on the local device with a port channel on the peer device. The

VPC interface on the local and peer devices share a common VPC identifier. You can configure multiple instances of VPC interfaces on each peer device in the VPC domain.

 Configure the VPC interface:












302


7. Select Switching > MLAG > Advanced > VPC Interface Configuration .

8. From the LAG Interface list, select the ID of the local port channel to configure as a VPC interface.

9. Enter a VPC interface identifier value in the VPC Identifier field.

The possible range is 1 to 63. To form a VPC interface with a port channel on the peer device, the port channel on the peer device must use the same VPC identifier.


The interface configuration is added.

11. To delete the selected interface configuration, click the Delete button.



The following table describes the nonconfigurable VPC Interface Configuration fields.

Table 115. VPC Interface Configuration

Field

State

Description

The VPC interface’s operational mode, which is one of the following:

• Disabled

. VPC functionality is operationally disabled on the VPC interface.

• Wait

. The port channel is waiting for VPC functionality to be enabled on a port channel on the peer device.

• Error

. VPC functionality is enabled on a port channel on both peer devices, but not all entry criteria are met for the port channel to be operational. For example, if the combined number of member ports for the VPC interface is more than the maximum allowed, then the state is set to Error on both devices.

• Active . VPC functionality is enabled on a port channel on both peer devices, and all entry criteria are satisfied. The VPC interface is operationally enabled, and traffic is allowed to flow through the

VPC member ports.

• Inactive . The links connected to the VPC member ports are down, but the VPC interface on the peer remains active.


303


View Virtual Port Channel Interface Details

 To view the virtual port channel interface details:











7. Select Switching > MLAG > Advanced > VPC Interface Details .

8. From the list of LAG Interface s, select the ID of the local port channel that is configured as a VPC interface.


Update

button.


304


The following table describes the nonconfigurable VPC details that are displayed.

Table 116. VPC Interface Details

Field

Status

State

VPC Identifier

Configured VLANs

Egress Tagging

Peer Link STP Mode

Description

The status of the VPC identifier.

The VPC interface’s operational mode, which is one of the following:

• Disabled

. VPC functionality is operationally disabled on the VPC interface.

• Wait

. The port channel is waiting for VPC functionality to be enabled on a port channel on the peer device.

• Error

. VPC functionality is enabled on a port channel on both peer devices, but not all entry criteria are met for the port channel to be operational. For example, if the combined number of member ports for the VPC interface is more than the maximum allowed, then the state is set to Error on both devices.

• Active . VPC functionality is enabled on a port channel on both peer devices, and all entry criteria are satisfied. The VPC interface is operationally enabled, and traffic is allowed to flow through the

VPC member ports.

• Inactive . The links connected to the VPC member ports are down, but the VPC interface on the peer remains active.

The VPC interface identifier value. The range is 1 to 63.

The VLAN ID or list of VLAN IDs in which the LAG is a member.

Note:

If the VLAN Member or the VLAN Tag field exceeds the maximum number of displayable VLANs, an Exceeded data limit to display

message is shown. Editing the values of these fields is prevented when at least one port reaches the maximum limit of VLANs during port multiselection.

The VLAN ID or list of VLAN IDs on which the LAG is tagged.

The Spanning Tree Protocol administrative mode associated with the

LAG.

View Virtual Port Channel Interface Details

 To configure virtual port channel interface details:

1.



3.






305






7. To view self members, select an ID in the Self Port field, which lists the ID of each port that is a member of the port channel configured as a VPC interface on the current switch.

The operational status of the self port is displayed in the Status field. The Self Member fields on the VPC Interface Details screen, provide information about the VPC member ports on the local device


8. To view peer members, select an ID in the Peer Port list.

This list includes the ID of each port that is a member of the port channel configured as a

VPC interface.

The operational status of the peer port is displayed in the Status field. The Peer Member fields, on the VPC Interface Details screen, provide information about the VPC member ports on the peer device


View Virtual Port Channel Keep-Alive Statistics

The VPC feature sends periodic keep-alive messages over the peer link between the primary and secondary devices in the VPC domain to determine the device roles (primary and secondary) and to monitor the health of the link.

 To view the virtual port channel keep-alive statistics:



306



3.





5.



6.

Click the

Login

button.


7. Select Switching > MLAG > Advanced > VPC Keepalive Statistics .

To clear all the counters and reset all switch summary statistics to the default values, click the

Clear button.


The following table describes the nonconfigurable VPC Keepalive Statistics that are displayed.

Table 117. VPC Keepalive Statistics

Field

Total Transmitted

Tx Successful

Description

The total number of keep-alive messages that the local device sent to the peer device.

The number of keep-alive messages transmitted from the local device.


307


Table 117. VPC Keepalive Statistics (continued)

Field

Tx Errors

Total Received

Rx Successful

Rx Errors

Timeout Counter

Description

The number of keep-alive messages that the local device attempted to send to the peer device that were not transmitted due to an error.

The total number of keep-alive messages that the local device received from the peer device.

The number of successful keep-alive messages that the local device received from the peer device.

The number of keep-alive messages that the local device received from the peer device that contained errors.

The number of times the keep-alive time-out timer expired.

View Virtual Port Channel Peer Link Statistics

In addition to keep-alive messages, the peer link is used to send and receive control messages, data messages, BPDUs, and LACPDUs between the peer devices.

 To view the virtual port channel peer link statistics:











7. Select Switching > MLAG > Advanced > VPC Peer Link Statistics .


308



To clear all the counters and reset all switch summary statistics to the default values, click the

Clear button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable VPC peer link statistics that are displayed.

Table 118. VPC Peer Link Statistics

Field

Peer Link Control Messages

Transmitted

Peer Link Control Messages Tx

Errors

Description

The total number of control messages successfully sent from the local device to the peer device over the peer link.

The total number of errors encountered when sending peer ink control messages from the local device to the peer device over the peer link.

Peer Link Control Messages Tx

Timeout

The total number of peer link control messages that did not receive an

ACK from the peer device.

Peer Link Control Messages ACK

Transmitted

The total number of ACKs sent to the peer device in response to peer link control messages that were received.

Peer Link Control Messages ACK

Tx Errors

The total number of errors encountered when sending ACKs in response to peer link control messages.

Peer Link Control Messages

Received

Peer Link Data Messages

Transmitted

The total number of control messages successfully received by the local device from the peer device over the peer link.

The total number of data messages successfully sent from the local device to the peer device over the peer link.


309


Table 118. VPC Peer Link Statistics (continued)


Peer Link Data Messages Tx

Errors

Peer Link Data Messages Tx

Timeout

Peer Link Data Messages

Received

The total number of error encountered when sending peer link data messages from the local device to the peer device over the peer link.

The total number of peer link data messages that did not receive an

ACK from the peer device.

The total number of data messages successfully received by the local device from the peer device over the peer link.

Peer Link BPDU’s Transmitted To

Peer

The total number of BPDUs successfully sent to the peer device over the peer link.

Peer Link BPDU’s Tx Errors

Peer Link BPDU’s Received From

Peer

The total number of BPDUs successfully received from the peer device over the peer link.

Peer Link BPDU’s Rx Errors

The total number of errors encountered when sending BPDUs to the peer device.

The total number of errors encountered when receiving BPDUs from the peer device.

Peer Link LACPDU’s Transmitted

To Peer

The total number of LACPDUs successfully sent to the peer device over the peer link.

Peer Link LACPDU’s Tx Errors

Peer Link LACPDU’s Received

From Peer

Peer Link LACPDU’s Rx Errors

The total number of errors encountered when sending LACPDUs to the peer device.

The total number of LACPDUs successfully received from the peer device over the peer link.

The total number of errors encountered when receiving LACPDUs from the peer device.

Multiple Registration Protocol Overview

Note: Only M6100 series switches support this feature.

Like 802.1AS, Multiple Registration Protocol (MRP) is an audio video bridging (AVB) feature that is available on some FASTPATH platforms. MVR is a base registration protocol that enables devices running an MRP application to register attributes to other devices in a network. MRP provides an application to register attributes such as bandwidth for a given AV stream and MAC address information. It is used by various applications to propagate the registration. Blade switches support the following MRP applications:

• Multiple MAC Registration Protocol (MMRP)

• Multiple Stream Reservation Protocol (MSRP)

• Multiple VLAN Registration Protocol (MVRP)


310


MMRP allows for the propagation MAC address information in the network, and allows for the registration and deregistration of both individual MAC address information and group MAC address membership. End stations can request to join or leave a multicast group, or to register an individual MAC address with a specific VLAN. MAC address entries can be dynamically registered and deregistered if MMRP is administratively enabled on the switch.

MSRP reserves necessary resources in the network to facilitate time-sensitive traffic to flow end to end. In a typical network, there are multiple talkers (those who transmit streams) and multiple Listeners (those who receive streams from one or many talkers). Each flow requires specific bandwidth, frame rate, and time sync values . With the use of MSRP these resources are guaranteed through all intermediate devices that are between any talker and listener.

MVRP registers VLANs in the network, enabling automatic VLAN configuration on the switch.

In a typical network, VLAN tagging is common. Many nodes require ingress traffic to be tagged with a specific VLAN ID, and other nodes require egress traffic to be transmitted with a specific VLAN ID. With the use of MVRP on both ingress and egress, no manual VLAN configuration is required to pass tagged traffic through the network.

Note: MRP framework must be available and enabled in all intermediate devices to ensure that the propagation of the attributes occurs throughout the network.

With MRP, network attributes are declared, registered, withdrawn, and removed completely dynamically without any user intervention. This dynamic nature is especially useful in networks where the following is true:

•

Network attributes are likely to change frequently, requiring reconfiguration of the intermediate devices.

•

Recipients of these attributes frequently increase or decrease in number.

• Each of these changes without a dynamic self-adjusting framework would require constant attention from the network administrator.

Configure Global MRP Settings

You can configure global MRP settings for the switch.

 To configure global MRP settings:

1.



3.





311







7. Select Switching > MRP > Basic > MRP Configuration .

Note: The fields available on the MRP Configuration screen vary based on the platform and its supported features.

8. Select the MVRP Mode Enable or Disable radio button.

This specifies the global administrative mode of MVRP on the device. The default is

Disable.

Multiple VLAN Registration Protocol (MVRP) registers VLANs in the network, enabling automatic VLAN configuration on the device. In a typical network, VLAN tagging is common. Many nodes require ingress traffic to be tagged with a specific VLAN ID, and other nodes require egress traffic to be transmitted with a specific VLAN ID. With the use of MVRP on both ingress and egress, no manual VLAN configuration is required to pass tagged traffic through the network.

9. Select the MMRP Enable or Disable radio button.

This specifies the global administrative mode of MMRP on the device. The default is

Disable.

Multiple MAC Registration Protocol (MMRP) allows the propagation of MAC address information in the network, and allows for the registration and deregistration of both individual MAC address information and group MAC address membership. End stations can request to join or leave a multicast group, or to register an individual MAC address with a specific VLAN. MAC address entries can be dynamically registered and deregistered if MMRP is administratively enabled on the device.

10. Select the Periodic State Machine (MVRP) Enable or Disable radio button.


312


When enabled, the state machine can help limit the effect of topology changes and reduce the number of protocol data units (PDUs) transmitted between devices. The default is Disable.

11. Select the Periodic State Machine (MMRP) Enable or Disable radio button.

When enabled, the state machine can help limit the effect of topology changes and reduce the number of protocol data units (PDUs) transmitted between devices. The default is Disable.

12.

Click the

Apply

button.



Update

button.

Configure MRP Port Settings

You can configure the per-port MRP mode and timer settings. The timers control when and how often various messages are transmitted on each interface.

 To configure MRP port settings:


2.



4.









7.

Select

Switching

 >

MRP

>

Advanced > Port Settings

.


313


8. To configure one or more ports or LAGs, select the check box next to each port or LAG to configure.

You can select multiple ports to apply the same settings to the selected interfaces.

9. In the MVRP Mode field, select Enable or Disable .

This specifies the administrative mode of Multiple VLAN Registration Protocol (MVRP) on the interface. MVRP registers VLANs in the network, enabling automatic VLAN configuration on the device.

10. In the MMRP Mode field, select Enable or Disable .

This specifies the administrative mode of Multiple MAC Registration Protocol (MMRP) on the interface. MMRP allows the propagation of MAC address information in the network and allows for the registration and deregistration of both individual MAC address information and group MAC address membership.

11. Use the MRP Join Timer field to configure the amount of time in centiseconds to wait for

JoinIn messages from other MRV participants after the interface sends a Join message.

If the amount of time specified in this field passes before the interface receives a JoinIn message, the interface resends the Join message. The range is 10 to 100 centiseconds.


12. Use the MRP Leave Timer field to configure the amount of time in centiseconds to wait before the interface deregisters attributes from other MRV participants.

If the interface receives Join messages from other participants before the Leave timer expires, the attributes are not deregistered. The range is 20 to 600 centiseconds. The default value is 300.

13. Use the MRP Leave All Timer field to configure the amount of time to wait, after the interface starts the MRP registration process, before the participants refresh and reregister their attributes.

The range is 200 to 6000 centiseconds. The default value is 2000.




314


View MMRP Statistics

You can view information regarding the MMRP frames transmitted and received by the switch and by each interface.

 To view MMRP statistics:


2.



4.









7.

Select

Switching > MRP

>

Advanced

>

MMRP Statistics

.


To clear the statistics for one or more ports, select the check box next to the interface or interfaces, and click the Clear button.


315


The following table describes the nonconfigurable data that the MMRP Global Statistics screen displays.

Table 119. MMRP Global Stastics

Field

Interface

Frames Received

Bad Header

Bad Format

Frames Transmitted

Transmission Failures

Description

In the MMRP Statistics table, this field identifies the interface associated with the rest of the data in the row.

The number of MMRP frames that were received on the device or on the particular interface.

The number of MMRP frames with bad headers that were received on the switch.

The number of MMRP frames with bad PDUs body formats that were received on the switch.

The number of MMRP frames that were transmitted on the switch.

The number of MMRP frames that the switch failed to transmit.

View MVRP Statistics

You can view information about the MVRP frames transmitted and received by the switch and by each interface.

 To view MVRP statistics:











7. Select Switching > MRP > MVRP Statistics .


316


To clear the statistics for one or more ports, select the check box next to the interface or interfaces, and click the Clear button.


The following table describes the nonconfigurable data that the MVRP Global Statistics screen displays.

Table 120. MVRP Statistics

Field

Interface

Frames Received

Bad Header

Bad Format

Frames Transmitted

Transmission Failures

Message Queue Failures

Registration Failures

Description

In the MVRP Statistics table, this field identifies the interface associated with the rest of the data in the row.

The number of MVRP frames that were received on the switch.

The number of MVRP frames with bad headers that were received on the switch.

The number of MVRP frames with bad PDUs body formats that were received on the switch.

The number of MVRP frames that were transmitted on the switch.

The number of MVRP frames that the switch failed to transmit.

The number of messages that failed to be added to the queue.

The number of MVRP frames that failed to register on a device or particular interface.


317

5.

Routing


•

Manage Routes

•

Configure the Router IP

•

Configure Routing Parameters for the Switch

•

IPv6

•

VLAN Overview

•

Address Resolution Protocol Overview

•

Configure RIP

•

Configure Router Discovery

•

Configure Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol

5

318


Manage Routes

The Routing Table collects routes from multiple sources: static routes and local routes. The

Routing Table can learn multiple routes to the same destination from multiple sources. The

Routing Table lists all routes.

Configure a Basic Route

 To configure a basic route:

1.



3.





5.



6.

Click the

Login

button.


7. Select Routing

 > Routing Table > Basic > Route Configuration .

8. In the Route Type list, select one of the following route types.

• Default . To create a default route, all that must be specified is the next hop address, and preference.

• Static . To create a static route, specify the network address, subnet mask, next hop address, and preference.

• Static Reject . To create a static reject route, specify the network address, subnet mask, and preference.

9. Network Address displays the IP route prefix for the destination.

Routing

319


10. Subnet Mask indicates the portion of the IP interface address that identifies the attached network.

This is also referred to as the subnet/network mask.

11. Next Hop IP Address displays the outgoing router IP address to use when forwarding traffic to the next router (if any) in the path toward the destination.

The next router is always one of the adjacent neighbors or the IP address of the local interface for a directly attached network.

12. Preference displays an integer value from 1 to 255.

You can specify the preference value (sometimes called administrative distance) of an individual static route. Among routes to the same destination, the route with the lowest preference value is the route entered into the forwarding database. By specifying the preference of a static route, the user controls whether a static route is more or less preferred than routes from dynamic routing protocols. The preference also controls whether a static route is more or less preferred than other static routes to the same destination.

13. Use Description to specify the description of this route that identifies the route.

Description must consist of alphanumeric, hyphen, or underscore characters and can be up to 31 characters in length.


The static route is added to the switch.

15. To delete an existing static route entry from the switch, click the Delete button.





Table 121. Routing Table Basic Route Configuration

Field

Network Address

Subnet Mask

Protocol

Route Type

Description

The IP route prefix for the destination.

Also referred to as the subnet/network mask, this indicates the portion of the IP interface address that identifies the attached network.

This field tells which protocol created the specified route. The possibilities are one of the following:

• Local

•

Static

This field can be

Connected

or

Static

or

Dynamic

based on the protocol.

Routing

320


Table 121. Routing Table Basic Route Configuration (continued)

Field

Next Hop Interface

Next Hop Address

Preference

Metric

Description

The outgoing router interface to use when forwarding traffic to the destination.

The outgoing router IP address to use when forwarding traffic to the next router (if any) in the path toward the destination. The next router is always one of the adjacent neighbors or the IP address of the local interface for a directly attached network.

The preference is an integer value from (0 to 255). The user can specify the preference value (sometimes called administrative distance

) of an individual static route. Among routes to the same destination, the route with the lowest preference value is the route entered into the forwarding database. By specifying the preference of a static route, the user controls whether a static route is more or less preferred than routes from dynamic routing protocols. The preference also controls whether a static route is more or less preferred than other static routes to the same destination.

Administrative cost of the path to the destination. If no value is entered, default is 1. The range is 0–255.

Configure Advanced Routes

 To configure advanced routes:

1.



3.





5.



6.

Click the

Login

button.





> Routing Table> Advanced > Route Configuration .

Routing

321


8. Use the Route Type field to specify Default or static reject route.

If you are creating a default route, all that must be specified is the next hop IP address; otherwise, each field must be completed.

9. Network Address displays the IP route prefix for the destination.

10. Subnet Mask indicates the portion of the IP interface address that identifies the attached network.

This is also referred to as the subnet/network mask.

11. Next Hop IP Address displays the outgoing router IP address to use when forwarding traffic to the next router (if any) in the path toward the destination.

The next router is always one of the adjacent neighbors or the IP address of the local interface for a directly attached network.

12. Preference displays an integer value from 1 to 255.

You can specify the preference value (sometimes called

administrative distance

) of an individual static route. Among routes to the same destination, the route with the lowest preference value is the route entered into the forwarding database. By specifying the preference of a static route, the user controls whether a static route is more or less preferred than routes from dynamic routing protocols. The preference also controls whether a static route is more or less preferred than other static routes to the same destination.

13. Use Description to specify the description of this route that identifies the route.

The description must consist of alphanumeric, hyphen or underscore characters and can be up to 31 characters in length.



15. To delete the selected static route entry from the switch, click the Delete button.


Routing

322



Table 122. Route Configuration - Learned Routes

Field

Network Address

Subnet Mask

Protocol

Route Type

Next Hop Interface

Next Hop IP Address

Preference

Metric

Description

The IP route prefix for the destination.

Also referred to as the subnet/network mask, this indicates the portion of the IP interface address that identifies the attached network.

This field tells which protocol created the specified route. The possibilities are one of the following:

•

Local

• Static

This field can be either default or static.

The outgoing router interface to use when forwarding traffic to the destination.

The outgoing router IP address to use when forwarding traffic to the next router (if any) in the path toward the destination. The next router is always one of the adjacent neighbors or the IP address of the local interface for a directly attached network.

The preference is an integer value from 0 to 255. The user can specify the preference value (sometimes called administrative distance) of an individual static route. Among routes to the same destination, the route with the lowest preference value is the route entered into the forwarding database. By specifying the preference of a static route, the user controls whether a static route is more or less preferred than routes from dynamic routing protocols. The preference also controls whether a static route is more or less preferred than other static routes to the same destination.

Administrative cost of the path to the destination. If no value is entered, default is 1. The range is 0–255.

Specify Route Preferences

You can configure the default preference for each protocol, for example, 60 for static routes,

120 for RIP. These values are arbitrary values in the range of 1 to 255 and are independent of route metrics. Most routing protocols use a route metric to determine the shortest path known to the protocol, independent of any other protocol.

The best route to a destination is chosen by selecting the route with the lowest preference value. When there are multiple routes to a destination, the preference values are used to determine the preferred route. If there is still a tie, the route with the best route metric is chosen. To avoid problems with mismatched metrics (such as RIP and Open Shortest Path

First [OSPF] metrics, which are not directly comparable) you must configure different preference values for each of the protocols.

Routing

323


 To specify route preferences














> Routing Table > Advanced > Route Preferences .

8. Use Static to specify the static route preference value in the router.

The default value is 1. The range is 1 to 255.

9. Specify the RIP route preference value in the router.

The default value is 120. The range is 1 to 255.

10. Specify the OSPF Intra route preference value in the router.

The default value is 110. The range is 1 to 255. The OSPF specification (RFC 2328) requires that preferences must be given to the routes learned through OSPF in the following order: intra < inter < type-1 < type-2.

11. Specify the OSPF Inter route preference value in the router.

The default value is 110. The range is 1 to 255. The OSPF specification (RFC 2328) requires that preferences must be given to the routes learned through OSPF in the following order: intra < inter < type-1 < type-2.

12. Specify the OSPF External route preference value in the router.

Routing

324


The default value is 110. The range is 1 to 255. The OSPF specification (RFC 2328) requires that preference value must be the same for all the OSPF external route types, such as type1/type2/nssa1/nssa2.



The Local field displays the local route preference value.

Configure the Router IP

You can configure routing parameters for the switch, as opposed to an interface.

 To configure the router IP:


2.



4.









7.

Select

Routing



> IP > Basic > IP Configuration

.

Routing

325


8. Use Routing Mode to select Enable or Disable .

You must enable routing for the switch before you can route through any of the interfaces.


9. Use ICMP Echo Replies to select Enable or Disable .

If you select Enable, then only the router can send ECHO replies. By default ICMP Echo

Replies are sent for echo requests.

10. Use ICMP Redirects to select Enable or Disable .

If this is enabled globally and on an interface level, then only the router can send ICMP

Redirects.

11. Use ICMP Rate Limit Interval to control the ICMP error packets by specifying the number of ICMP error packets that are allowed per burst interval.

By default, the rate limit is 100 packets/sec (the burst interval is 1000 msec). To disable

ICMP Rate limiting, set this field to 0. The valid rate Interval is from 0 to 2147483647.

12. Use ICMP Rate Limit Burst Size to control the ICMP error packets by specifying the number of ICMP error packets that are allowed per burst interval.

By default, burst size is 100 packets. When the burst interval is 0, then configuring this field is not a valid operation. The valid burst size range is 1 to 200.

13. Use Select to configure Global Default Gateway to edit the Global Default Gateway field.

14. Use Global Default Gateway to set the global default gateway to the manually configured value. A default gateway configured with this command is more preferred than a default gateway learned from a DHCP server. Only one default gateway can be configured. If you invoke this command multiple times, each command replaces the previous value.


Table 123. Routing IP Configuration

Field

Default Time to Live

Maximum Next Hops

Maximum Routes

Description

The default value inserted into the Time-To-Live field of the IP header of datagrams originated by the switch, if a TTL value is not supplied by the transport layer protocol.

The maximum number of hops supported by the switch. This is a compile-time constant.

The maximum number of routes (routing table size) supported by the switch. This is a compile-time constant.

Routing

326


View Statistics

The statistics reported on this screen are as specified in RFC 1213.

 To view statistics:

1.



3.





5.



6.

Click the

Login

button.





> IP > Basic > Statistics .

Routing

327



Table 124. IP Basic Statistics

Field

IpInReceives

IpInHdrErrors

IpInAddrErrors

IpForwDatagrams

IpInUnknownProtos

IpInDiscards

IpInDelivers

IpOutRequests

IpOutDiscards

IpOutNoRoutes

IpReasmTimeout

Description

The total number of input datagrams received from interfaces, including those received in error.

The number of input datagrams discarded due to errors in their IP headers, including bad checksums, version number mismatch, other format errors, time-to-live exceeded, errors discovered in processing their IP options, and so on.

The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in their IP header's destination field was not a valid address to be received at this entity. This count includes invalid addresses (for example, 0.0.0.0) and addresses of unsupported classes (Class E). For entities that are not IP gateways and therefore do not forward datagrams, this counter includes datagrams discarded because the destination address was not a local address.

The number of input datagrams for which this entity was not their final

IP destination, as a result of which an attempt was made to find a route to forward them to that final destination. In entities that do not act as IP gateways, this counter includes only those packets that were source-routed through this entity, and the source-route option processing was successful.

The number of locally addressed datagrams received successfully but discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol.

The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were encountered to prevent their continued processing, but that were discarded (for lack of buffer space). This counter does not include any datagrams discarded while awaiting re-assembly.

The total number of input datagrams successfully delivered to IP user protocols (including ICMP).

The total number of IP datagrams that local IP user protocols (including

ICMP) supplied to IP in requests for transmission. This counter does not include any datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams.

The number of output IP datagrams for which no problem was encountered to prevent their transmission to their destination, but that were discarded for reasons such as lack of buffer space. This counter would include datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams if any such packets met this (discretionary) discard criterion.

The number of IP datagrams discarded because no route could be found to transmit them to their destination. This counter includes any packets counted in ipForwDatagrams that meet this no-route criterion.

This includes any datagrams that a host cannot route because all of its default gateways are down.

The maximum number of seconds for which received fragments are held while they are awaiting reassembly at this entity.

Routing

328


Table 124. IP Basic Statistics (continued)

Field

IpReasmReqds

IpReasmOKs

IpReasmFails

IpFragOKs

IpFragFails

IpFragCreates

IpRoutingDiscards

IcmpInMsgs

IcmpInErrors

IcmpInDestUnreachs

IcmpInTimeExcds

IcmpInParmProbs

IcmpInSrcQuenchs

IcmpInRedirects

IcmpInEchos

IcmpInEchoReps

IcmpInTimestamps

IcmpInTimestampReps

IcmpInAddrMasks

IcmpInAddrMaskReps

IcmpOutMsgs

Description

The number of IP fragments received that were reassembled at this entity.

The number of IP datagrams successfully re-assembled.

The number of failures detected by the IP re-assembly algorithm (for whatever reason: timed out, errors, and so on). This is not necessarily a count of discarded IP fragments since some algorithms can lose track of the number of fragments by combining them as they are received.

The number of IP datagrams that were fragmented at this entity.

The number of IP datagrams that were discarded because they needed to be fragmented at this entity but could not be, for reasons such as their Don't Fragment flag was set.

The number of IP datagram fragments that were generated as a result of fragmentation at this entity.

The number of routing entries that were discarded even though they were valid. One possible reason for discarding such an entry could be to free up buffer space for other routing entries.

The total number of ICMP messages that the entity received. This counter includes all those counted by icmpInErrors.

The number of ICMP messages that the entity received but determined as having ICMP-specific errors (bad ICMP checksums, bad length, and so on).

The number of ICMP destination unreachable messages received.

The number of ICMP time exceeded messages received.

The number of ICMP parameter problem messages received.

The number of ICMP source quench messages received.

The number of ICMP redirect messages received.

The number of ICMP echo (request) messages received.

The number of ICMP echo reply messages received.

The number of ICMP timestamp (request) messages received.

The number of ICMP rimestamp reply messages received.

The number of ICMP address mask request messages received.

The number of ICMP address mask reply messages received.

The total number of ICMP messages that this entity attempted to send.

This counter includes all those counted by icmpOutErrors.

Routing

329


Table 124. IP Basic Statistics (continued)

Field

IcmpOutErrors

IcmpOutDestUnreachs

IcmpOutTimeExcds

IcmpOutParmProbs

IcmpOutSrcQuenchs

IcmpOutRedirects

IcmpOutEchos

IcmpOutEchoReps

IcmpOutTimestamps

IcmpOutTimestampReps

IcmpOutAddrMasks

Description

The number of ICMP messages that this entity did not send due to problems discovered within ICMP such as a lack of buffers. This value does not include errors discovered outside the ICMP layer such as the inability of IP to route the resultant datagram. In some implementations there might be no types of error that contribute to this counter's value.

The number of ICMP destination unreachable messages sent.

The number of ICMP time exceeded messages sent.

The number of ICMP parameter problem messages sent.

The number of ICMP source quench messages sent.

The number of ICMP redirect messages sent. For a host, this is always zero, since hosts do not send redirects.

The number of ICMP echo (request) messages sent.

The number of ICMP echo reply messages sent.

The number of ICMP timestamp (request) messages.

The number of ICMP timestamp reply messages sent.

The number of ICMP address mask request messages sent.

Configure Routing Parameters for the Switch

You can configure routing parameters for the switch as opposed to an interface.

 To configure routing parameters for the switch:










Routing

330






> IP > Advanced > IP Configuration .

8. Use Routing Mode to select Enable or Disable .

You must enable routing for the switch before you can route through any of the interfaces.


9. Use ICMP Echo Replies to select Enable or Disable .

If you select Enable, then only the router can send ECHO replies. By default ICMP echo replies are sent for echo requests.

10. Use ICMP Redirects to select Enable or Disable .

If it is enabled globally and on interface level then only the router can send ICMP redirects.

11. Use ICMP Rate Limit Interval to control the ICMP error packets by specifying the number of ICMP error packets that are allowed per burst interval.

By default, the rate limit is 100 packets/sec, (the burst interval is 1000 msec). To disable

ICMP Ratelimiting set this field to 0. The valid rate interval is in the range 0 to

2147483647.

12.

Use

ICMP Rate Limit Burst Size

to control the ICMP error packets by specifying the number of ICMP error packets that are allowed per burst interval.

By default, the burst size is 100 packets. When the burst interval is 0, then configuring this field is not a valid operation. The valid burst size is 1 to 200.

13.

Use

Select to Configure Global Default Gateway

to edit the Global Default Gateway field.

14. Use Global Default Gateway to set the global default gateway to the manually configured value.

A default gateway configured with this command is more preferred than a default gateway learned from a DHCP server. Only one default gateway can be configured. If you invoke this command multiple times, each command replaces the previous value.

Routing

331





Table 125. Routing IP Configuration

Field

Default Time to Live

Maximum Next Hops

Maximum Routes

Maximum Static Routes

Description

The default value inserted into the Time-To-Live field of the IP header of datagrams originated by the switch, if a TTL value is not supplied by the transport layer protocol.

The maximum number of hops supported by the switch. This is a compile-time constant.

The maximum number of routes (routing table size) supported by the switch. This is a compile-time constant.

The maximum number of static routes supported by the switch.

View IP Statistics

The statistics reported on this screen are as specified in RFC 1213.

 To view IP statistics:














> IP > Advanced > Statistics .

Routing

332



Table 126. IP Statistics

Field

IpInReceives

IpInHdrErrors

IpInAddrErrors

Description

The total number of input datagrams received from interfaces, including those received in error.

The number of input datagrams discarded due to errors in their IP headers, including bad checksums, version number mismatch, other format errors, time-to-live exceeded, errors discovered in processing their IP options, and so on

The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in their IP header's destination field was not a valid address to be received at this entity. This count includes invalid addresses (for example, 0.0.0.0) and addresses of unsupported classes (such as.,

Class E). For entities that are not IP gateways and therefore do not forward datagrams, this counter includes datagrams discarded because the destination address was not a local address.

Routing

333


Table 126. IP Statistics (continued)

Field

IpForwDatagrams

IpInUnknownProtos

IpInDiscards

IpInDelivers

IpOutRequests

IpOutDiscards

IpOutNoRoutes

IpReasmTimeout

IpReasmReqds

IpReasmOKs

IpReasmFails

IpFragOKs

IpFragFails

IpFragCreates

Description

The number of input datagrams for which this entity was not their final

IP destination, as a result of which an attempt was made to find a route to forward them to that final destination. In entities that do not act as IP gateways, this counter includes only those packets that were source-routed through this entity, and the source-route option processing was successful.

The number of locally-addressed datagrams received successfully but discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol.

The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were encountered to prevent their continued processing, but which were discarded for reasons such as lack of buffer space. This counter does not include any datagrams discarded while awaiting re-assembly.

The total number of input datagrams successfully delivered to IP user-protocols (including ICMP).

The total number of IP datagrams that local IP user-protocols (including

ICMP) supplied to IP in requests for transmission. This counter does not include any datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams.

The number of output IP datagrams for which no problem was encountered to prevent their transmission to their destination, but that were discarded for reasons such as lack of buffer space. This counter would include datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams if any such packets met this (discretionary) discard criterion.

The number of IP datagrams discarded because no route could be found to transmit them to their destination. This counter includes any packets counted in ipForwDatagrams that meet this no-route criterion.

This includes any datagrams that a host cannot route because all of its default gateways are down.

The maximum number of seconds for which received fragments are held while they are awaiting reassembly at this entity.

The number of IP fragments received that needed to be reassembled at this entity.

The number of IP datagrams successfully reassembled.

The number of failures detected by the IP reassembly algorithm (for whatever reason: timed out, errors, etc). This is not necessarily a count of discarded IP fragments since some algorithms can lose track of the number of fragments by combining them as they are received.

The number of IP datagrams that were fragmented at this entity.

The number of IP datagrams that were discarded because they needed to be fragmented at this entity but could not be, for example this can occur because their Don't Fragment flag was set.

The number of IP datagram fragments that were generated as a result of fragmentation at this entity.

Routing

334



Field

IpRoutingDiscards

IcmpInMsgs

IcmpInErrors

IcmpInDestUnreachs

IcmpInTimeExcds

IcmpInParmProbs

IcmpInSrcQuenchs

IcmpInRedirects

IcmpInEchos

IcmpInEchoReps

IcmpInTimestamps

IcmpInTimestampReps

IcmpInAddrMasks

IcmpInAddrMaskReps

IcmpOutMsgs

IcmpOutErrors

IcmpOutDestUnreachs

IcmpOutTimeExcds

IcmpOutParmProbs

IcmpOutSrcQuenchs

IcmpOutRedirects

IcmpOutEchos

IcmpOutEchoReps

Description

The number of routing entries that were discarded even though they are valid. One possible reason for discarding such an entry could be to free up buffer space for other routing entries.

The total number of ICMP messages that the entity received. This counter includes all those counted by icmpInErrors.

The number of ICMP messages that the entity received but determined as having ICMP-specific errors (bad ICMP checksums, bad length, and so on).

The number of ICMP destination unreachable messages received.

The number of ICMP time exceeded messages received.

The number of ICMP parameter problem messages received.

The number of ICMP source quench messages received.

The number of ICMP redirect messages received.

The number of ICMP echo (request) messages received.

The number of ICMP echo reply messages received.

The number of ICMP timestamp (request) messages received.

The number of ICMP timestamp reply messages received.

The number of ICMP address mask request messages received.

The number of ICMP address mask reply messages received.

The total number of ICMP messages that this entity attempted to send.


The number of ICMP messages that this entity did not send due to problems discovered within ICMP such as a lack of buffers. This value does not include errors discovered outside the ICMP Layer such as the inability of IP to route the resultant datagram. In some implementations there might be no types of error that contribute to this counter's value.

The number of ICMP destination unreachable messages sent.

The number of ICMP time exceeded messages sent.

The number of ICMP parameter problem messages sent.

The number of ICMP source quench messages sent.

The number of ICMP redirect messages sent. For a host, this is zero, since hosts do not send redirects.

The number of ICMP echo (request) messages sent.

The number of ICMP echo reply messages sent.

Routing

335



Field

IcmpOutTimestamps

IcmpOutTimestampReps

IcmpOutAddrMasks

IcmpOutAddrMaskReps

Description

The number of ICMP timestamp (request) messages.

The number of ICMP timestamp reply messages sent.

The number of ICMP address mask request messages sent.

The number of ICMP address mask reply messages sent.

Configure the IP Interface

You can update IP interface data for this switch.

 To configure the IP interface:












 > IP > Advanced > IP Interface Configuration .

The screen is shown in three parts.

Routing

336


8.

Use

Go To Interface

to enter the interface in unit/slot/port format and click the

Go

button.

The entry corresponding to the specified interface is selected.

9. Use Port to select the interface.

10.

Use

Description

to enter the description for the interface.

11. Use IP Address Configuration Method to enter the method by which an IP address is configured on the interface.

There are three methods:

None

,

Manual

, and

DHCP

. By default the method is None. Use the None method to reset the DHCP method.

Note: When the configuration method is changed from DHCP to None , there is a minor delay before the screen refreshes.

12.

Use

IP Address

to enter the IP address for the interface.

13. Use Subnet Mask to enter the subnet mask for the interface.

This is also referred to as the subnet/network mask, and defines the portion of the interface's IP address that is used to identify the attached network.

14. In the Routing Mode list, select Enable or Disable .


15.

Use

Administrative Mode

to enable or disable the administrative mode of the interface.

The default value is Enable. This mode is not supported for logical VLAN interfaces.

16. Use Forward Net Directed Broadcasts to select how network directed broadcast packets are handled.

If you select Enable, network directed broadcasts are forwarded.

If you select Disable, they are dropped. The default value is Disable.

Routing

337


17. Use Encapsulation Type to select the link layer encapsulation type for packets transmitted from the specified interface.

The possible values are Ethernet and SNAP . The default is Ethernet.

18. Use Proxy Arp to disable or enable proxy ARP for the specified interface.

19. Use Local Proxy Arp to disable or enable local proxy ARP for the specified interface.

20. Use Bandwidth (kbps) to specify the configured bandwidth on this interface.

This parameter communicates the speed of the interface to higher level protocols. OSPF uses bandwidth to compute link cost. The valid range is 1 to 10000000.

21. Use ICMP Destination Unreachables to specify the mode of sending ICMP destination unreachables on this interface.

If this is Disabled then this interface does not send ICMP destination unreachables. By default destination unreachables mode is enabled.

22. Use ICMP Redirects to enable or disable ICMP redirects mode.

The router sends an ICMP redirect on an interface only if redirects are enabled both globally and on the interface. By default ICMP redirects mode is enabled.

23. Use IP MTU to specify the maximum size of IP packets sent on an interface.

The valid range is 68 bytes to the link MTU. The default value is 0. A value of 0 indicates that the IP MTU is unconfigured. When the IP MTU is unconfigured, the router uses the link MTU as the IP MTU. The IP MTU is the maximum frame size minus the length of the

Layer 2 header.

24. To delete the IP address from the selected interface, click the Delete button.





Table 127. IP Interface Configuration

Field

VLAN ID

OSPF Admin Mode

Link State

Routing Interface Status

Description

The VLAN ID for the interface.

Displays the OSPF admin mode of the interface. The default value is

Disable.

The state of the specified interface is either Active or Inactive. An interface is considered active if it the link is up and it is in forwarding state.


Routing

338


Configure the Secondary IP Address

 To configure the secondary IP address:


2.



4.









7.

Select

Routing

 >

IP

>

Advanced

>

Secondary IP

.

8. In the Routing Interface list, select the interface.

9. In the Secondary IP Address field, add a secondary IP address to the selected interface.

10. In the Secondary IP Subnet Mask field, enter the subnet mask associated with the secondary IP address.

This is also referred to as the subnet/network mask, and defines the portion of the interface’s IP address that is used to identify the attached network. This value is read-only once configured.


The secondary IP address for the selected interface is added.

12. To delete the secondary IP address from the selected interface, click the Delete button.

Routing

339



Table 128. Secondary IP

Field

VLAN ID

Primary IP Address

Description

The VLAN ID associated with the displayed or configured interface.

The primary IP address for the interface.

IPv6

Only the following switches support IPv6:

• M6100

• M5300-28G3

• M5300-52G3

• M5300-28GF3

The following switches support IPv6 with an L3 license:

• M5300-28G

• M5300-52G

• M5300-28G-POE+

• M5300-52G-POE+

Configure IPv6 Global Settings

You can configure IPv6 routing parameters for the switch, as opposed to an interface.

 To configure IPv6 global settings:










Routing

340






> IPv6 > Basic > Global Configuration .

8. In the IPv6 Unicast Routing field, select the option to globally Enable or Disable IPv6 unicast routing.

9. In the Hop Limit field, enter a value for the unicast hop count used in IPv6 packets originated by the node.

The value is also included in router advertisements. The valid values for hops are 1 to

255, inclusive. The default is Not Configured, which means that a value of zero is sent in router advertisements.

10. In the ICMPv6 Rate Limit Error Interval field, specify the number of ICMP error packets allowed per burst interval.

This value controls the ICMPv6 error packets. The default rate limit is 100 packets per second, meaning that the burst interval is 1000 mseconds. To disable ICMP rate limiting, set this field to 0. The valid rate interval must be in the range 0 to 2147483647 mseconds.

11. In the ICMPv6 Rate Limit Burst Size field, specify the number of ICMP error packets allowed per burst interval.

This value controls the ICMP error packets. The default burst size is 100 packets. When the burst interval is 0, then configuring this field is not a valid operation. The valid burst size is 1 to 200.



View the IPv6 Route Table

 To view the IPv6 Route Table:






Routing

341








 > IPv6 > Basic > Route Table .

8. In the Routes Displayed list, select from the following:

• All Routes . Shows all active IPv6 routes.

• Best Routes Only . Shows only the best active routes.

• Configured Routes Only . Shows the routes configured by the user.



Table 129. IPv6 Route Table

Field

Number of Routes

IPv6 Prefix

Prefix Length

Protocol

Next Hop Interface

Next Hop IP Address

Preference

Description

The total number of active routes in the route table.

The network prefix for the active route.

The prefix length for the active route.

The type of protocol for the active route.

The interface over which the route is active. For a reject route, the next hop would be a

Null0

interface.

The next hop IPv6 address for the active route.

The route preference of the configured route.

Routing

342


Configure IPv6 Interface Settings

 Configure IPv6 interface settings:


2.



4.









7.

Select

Routing

 >

IPv6

>

Advanced

>

Interface Configuration

.

8. Use Go To Interface to enter the interface in unit/slot/port format and click the Go button.


9. Select the check box next to the interface to select it.

Routing

343


All physical interfaces are valid.

10. Select Enable or Disable in the IPv6 Mode list.

When IPv6 mode is enabled, the interface is capable of IPv6 operation without a global address. In this case, an EUI-64 based link-local address is used. The default value is

Disable.

11. In the DHCPv6 Client Mode list, select to Enable or Disable DHCPv6 client mode on an interface.

At any point in time, only one interface can act as a client. The default value is Disable.

12. In the Stateless Address AutoConfig Mode list, select to Enable or Disable Stateless

Address AutoConfig mode on an interface.


13. In the Routing Mode list, select to Enable or Disable the routing mode of an interface.


14. In the Admin Mode list, select to Enable or Disable IPv6 mode.

The default is Disable. When IPv6 mode is enabled, the interface is capable of IPv6 operation without a global address. In this case, an EUI-64 based link-local address is used.

15. In the MTU field, specify the maximum transmit unit on an interface.

If the value is 0, then this interface is not enabled for routing. It is not valid to set this value to 0 if routing is enabled. The MTU range 1280 to 1500. The default is 1500.

16. In the Duplicate Address Detection Transmits field, specify the number of duplicate address detection (DAD) transmits on an interface.

DAD transmits values must be in the range 0 to 600. The default is 1.

17. Specify the router advertisement Life Time Interval sent from the interface.

This value must be greater than or equal to the maximum advertisement interval. 0 means do not use the router as the default router. The range of router life time is 0 to

9000. The default is 1800.

18. In the Adv NS Interval field, specify the retransmission time field of router advertisements sent from the interface.

A value of 0 means the interval is not specified for the router. The range of the neighbor solicit interval is 1000 to 4294967295. The default is 0.

19. In the Adv Reachable Interval field, specify the router advertisement time.

This is the amount of time allocated to consider the neighbors reachable after ND confirmation. The range of reachable time is 0 to 3600000. The default is 0.

20. Use the Adv Interval field to specify the maximum time allowed between sending router advertisements from the interface.

The range of the maximum advertisement interval is 4 to 1800. The default value is 600.

Routing

344


21. In the Adv Other Config Flag list, select Enable or Disable to specify the router advertisement other stateful configuration flag.

Default value of other config flag is Disable.

22.

In the

Adv Suppress Flag list, select to

Enable

or

Disable

router advertisement suppression on an interface.

The default value of the suppress flag is Disable.

23. In the Destination Unreachables list, select to Enable or Disable the mode of sending

ICMPv6 destination unreachables on this interface.

If disabled, then this interface does not send ICMPv6 eestination unreachables. By default, the IPv6 destination unreachables mode is enabled.




Table 130. IPv6 Advanced Interface Configuration

Field

Operational Mode

Link State

Description

Specifies the operational state of an interface. The default value is

Disable.


IPv6 Prefix Configuration

 Configure IPv6 prefix configuration:


2.



4.









Routing

345



 > IPv6 > Advanced > Prefix Configuration .

8. From the Interface list, select the interface.

When the selection is changed, a screen update occurs, causing all fields to be updated for the newly selected port. All physical interfaces are valid.

9. In the IPv6 Prefix field, specify the IPv6 prefix for an interface.

10. In the Prefix Length field, specify the IPv6 prefix length for an interface.

11. In the EUI64 list, select to Enable or Disable the specified 64-bit unicast prefix.

12. In the Valid Life Time field, specify the router advertisement per prefix time.

This is the amount of time allowed to consider the prefix valid for the purpose of on-link determination. The valid life time is 0 to 4294967295.

13. In the Preferred Life Time field, specify the router advertisement per prefix time.

An autoconfigured address generated from this prefix is preferred. The preferred life time must be in the range 0 to 4294967295.

14. From the Onlink Flag list, select Enable or Disable .

This specifies whether the selected prefix can be used for on-link determination. The default is Enable.

15. In the Autonomous Flag list, select Enable or Disable.

This specifies whether the selected prefix can be used for autonomous address configuration. The default value is Enable.


The IPv6 address is added to the interface.

17. To delete a existing IPv6 address entry from the interface, click the Delete button.



The Current State field displays the state of the IPV6 address. The state is TENT if routing is disabled or DAD fails. The state is Active if the interface is active and DAD is successful.

Routing

346


View IPv6 Statistics

 To view IPv6 interface statistics:


2.



4.









7.

Select

Routing

 >

IPv6

>

Advanced

>

Statistics

.

8. From the Interface list, select the interface.

Routing

347


When the selection is changed, a screen refresh occurs, causing all fields to be updated for the newly selected port.



Table 131. IPv6 Advanced Interface Statistics


Total Datagrams Received

Received Datagrams Locally

Delivered

Received Datagrams Discarded

Due To Header Errors

The total number of input datagrams received by the interface, including those received in error.

The total number of datagrams successfully delivered to IPv6 user-protocols (including ICMP). This counter is incremented at the interface to which these datagrams were addressed, which might not be the input interface for some of the datagrams.

The number of input datagrams discarded due to errors in their IPv6 headers, including version number mismatch, other format errors, hop count exceeded, errors discovered in processing their IPv6 options, and so on


Due To MTU


Due To No Route

The number of input datagrams that could not be forwarded because their size exceeded the link MTU of outgoing interface.

The number of input datagrams discarded because no route could be found to transmit them to their destination

Received Datagrams With Unknown

Protocol

The number of locally-addressed datagrams received successfully but discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol. This counter is incremented at the interface to which these datagrams were addressed, which might not be the input interface for some of the datagrams.


Due To Invalid Address

Received Datagrams Discarded Dut

To Truncated Data

The number of input datagrams discarded because datagram frame didn't carry enough data.


Other

The number of input datagrams discarded because the IPv6 address in their IPv6 header's destination field was not a valid address to be received at this entity. This count includes invalid addresses (for example, ::0) and unsupported addresses (such as addresses with unallocated prefixes).For entities that are not IPv6 routers and therefore do not forward datagrams, this counter includes datagrams discarded because the destination address was not a local address.

Received Datagrams Reassembly

Required

The number of input IPv6 datagrams for which no problems were encountered to prevent their continued processing, but that were discarded for reasons such as lack of buffer space. This counter does not include any datagrams discarded while awaiting re-assembly.

The number of IPv6 fragments received that needed to be reassembled at this interface. This counter is incremented at the interface to which these fragments were addressed, which might not be the input interface for some of the fragments.

Routing

348


Table 131. IPv6 Advanced Interface Statistics (continued)

Field

Datagrams Successfully

Reassembled

Datagrams Failed To Reassemble The number of failures detected by the IPv6 reassembly algorithm (for whatever reason: timed out, errors, and so on). This is not necessarily a count of discarded IPv6 fragments since some algorithms (notably the algorithm in RFC 815) can lose track of the number of fragments by combining them as they are received. This counter is incremented at the interface to which these fragments were addressed, which might not be the input interface for some of the fragments.

Datagrams Forwarded The number of output datagrams that this entity received and forwarded to their final destinations. In entities that do not act as IPv6 routers, this counter includes only those packets that were source-routed through this entity, and the source-route processing was successful. For a successfully forwarded datagram the counter of the outgoing interface is incremented.

Datagrams Locally Transmitted

Description

The number of IPv6 datagrams successfully reassembled. This counter is incremented at the interface to which these datagrams were addressed, which might not be necessarily the input interface for some of the fragments.

Datagrams Transmit Failed

Datagrams Successfully

Fragmented

Datagrams Failed To Fragment

The number of datagrams that this entity successfully transmitted from this output interface.

The number of datagrams that this entity failed to transmit successfully.

The number of IPv6 datagrams that were fragmented at this output interface.

The number of output datagrams that could not be fragmented at this interface.

Datagrams Fragments Created

Multicast Datagrams Received

Multicast Datagrams Transmitted

The number of output datagram fragments that were generated as a result of fragmentation at this output interface.

The number of multicast packets received by the interface.

The number of multicast packets transmitted by the interface.


Table 132. ICMPv6 Statistics

Field

ICMPv6 Messages With Errors

Received

Description

Total ICMPv6 Messages Received The total number of ICMP messages received by the interface, which includes all those counted by IPv6IfIcmpInErrors. This interface is the interface to which the ICMP messages were addressed, which might not be the input interface for the messages.

The number of ICMP messages that the interface received but determined as having ICMP-specific errors (bad ICMP checksums, bad length, and so on).

ICMPv6 Destination Unreachable

Messages Received

The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages received by the interface.

Routing

349


Table 132. ICMPv6 Statistics (continued)


ICMPv6 Messages Prohibited

Administratively Received

The number of ICMP destination unreachable/communication administratively prohibited messages received by the interface.

ICMPv6 Time Exceeded Messages

Received

The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages received by the interface.

ICMPv6 Parameter Problem

Messages Received

The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages received by the interface.

ICMPv6 Packet Too Big Messages

Received

The number of ICMP Packet Too Big messages received by the interface.

The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages received by the interface.

ICMPv6 Echo Request Messages

Received

ICMPv6 Echo Reply Messages

Received

ICMPv6 Router Solicit Messages

Received

The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages received by the interface.

The number of ICMP Router Solicit messages received by the interface.

ICMPv6 Router Advertisement

Messages Received

The number of ICMP Router Advertisement messages received by the interface.

ICMPv6 Neighbor Solicit Messages

Received

The number of ICMP Neighbor Solicit messages received by the interface.

ICMPv6 Neighbor Advertisement

Messages Received

ICMPv6 Redirect Messages

Received

The number of ICMP Neighbor Advertisement messages received by the interface.

The number of ICMPv6 Redirect messaged received by the interface.

ICMPv6 Group Membership Query

Messages Received

The number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Query messages received by the interface.

ICMPv6 Group Membership

Response Messages Received


Reduction Messages Received

Total ICMPv6 Messages

Transmitted

The number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Response messages received by the interface.

The number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Reduction messages received by the interface.

The total number of ICMP messages that this interface attempted to send.


ICMPv6 Messages Not Transmitted

Due To Error

The number of ICMP messages that this interface did not send due to problems discovered within ICMP such as a lack of buffers. This value does not include errors discovered outside the ICMP layer such as the inability of IPv6 to route the resultant datagram. In some implementations there might be no types of error that contribute to this counter's value.

ICMPv6 Destination Unreachable

Messages Transmitted

The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages sent by the interface.

Routing

350


Table 132. ICMPv6 Statistics (continued)

Field

ICMPv6 Messages Prohibited

Administratively Transmitted

Description

Number of ICMP Destination Unreachable/Communication

Administratively Prohibited messages sent.

ICMPv6 Time Exceeded Messages

Transmitted

The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages sent by the interface.

ICMPv6 Parameter Problem


The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages sent by the interface.

ICMPv6 Packet Too Big Messages

Transmitted

The number of ICMP Packet Too Big messages sent by the interface.

The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages sent by the interface. ICMPv6 Echo Request Messages

Transmitted

ICMPv6 Echo Reply Messages

Transmitted

The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages sent by the interface.

ICMPv6 Router Solicit Messages

Transmitted

ICMPv6 Router Advertisement


The number of ICMP Neighbor Solicitation messages sent by the interface.

The number of ICMP Router Advertisement messages sent by the interface.

ICMPv6 Neighbor Solicit Messages

Transmitted

The number of ICMP Neighbor Solicitation messages sent by the interface.

ICMPv6 Neighbor Advertisement


ICMPv6 Redirect Messages

Transmitted

The number of ICMP Neighbor Advertisement messages sent by the interface.

The number of Redirect messages sent.

ICMPv6 Group Membership Query


The number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Query messages sent.


Response Messages Transmitted

The number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Response messages sent.


Reduction Messages Transmitted

The number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Reduction messages sent.

ICMPv6 Duplicate Address Detects The number of duplicate addresses detected by the interface.

View the IPv6 Neighbor Table

 To view the IPv6 Neighbor Table:


2.



Routing

351










 > IPv6 > Advanced > Neighbor Table .

8. Use the Search By field to search for IPv6 routes by IPv6 Address or Interface .

• To search by IPv6 address, select IPv6 Address from the Search By list. Enter the

128-byte hexadecimal IPv6 address in four-digit groups separated by colons, for example, 2001:231F:::1. Then click the Go button. If the address exists, that entry is displayed. An exact match is required.

• To search by Interface, select Interface from the Search By list, enter the interface ID in unit/slot/port format, for example, 2/1/1. Then click the Go button. If the address exists, that entry is displayed.

To clear the IPv6 neighbors on a selected interface or on all interfaces, click the Clear button.



Table 133. IPv6 Advanced Neighbor Table

Field

Interface

IPv6 Address

MAC Address isRtr

Description

The interface whose settings are displayed in the current table row.

The IPv6 address of the neighbor or interface.

Specifies MAC address associated with an interface.

Indicates whether the neighbor is a router. If the neighbor is a router, the value is

True

. If the neighbor is not a router, the value is

False

.

Routing

352


Table 133. IPv6 Advanced Neighbor Table (continued)

Field

Neighbor State

Last Updated

Description

The state of the neighbor cache entry. Following are the states for dynamic entries in the IPv6 neighbor discovery cache:

• Incmp

. Address resolution is being performed on the entry.A neighbor solicitation message was sent to the solicited-node multicast address of the target, but the corresponding neighbor advertisement message has not yet been received.

• Reach

. Positive confirmation was received within the last Reachable

Time milliseconds that the forward path to the neighbor was functioning properly. While in REACH state, the device takes no special action as packets are sent.

• Stale

. More than ReachableTime milliseconds elapsed since the last positive confirmation was received that the forward path was functioning properly. While in STALE state, the device takes no action until a packet is sent.

• Delay

. More than ReachableTime milliseconds elapsed since the last positive confirmation was received that the forward path was functioning properly. A packet was sent within the last

DELAY_FIRST_PROBE_TIME seconds. If no reachability confirmation is received within DELAY_FIRST_PROBE_TIME seconds of entering the DELAY state, send a neighbor solicitation message and change the state to PROBE.

• Probe . A reachability confirmation is actively sought by resending neighbor solicitation messages every RetransTimer milliseconds until a reachability confirmation is received.

Time since the address was confirmed to be reachable.

IPv6 Static Route Configuration

 Configure the IPv6 static route:

1.



3.





5.



6.

Click the

Login

button.


Routing

353



 > IPv6 > Advanced > Static Route Configuration .

8. In the IPv6 Prefix field, specify the IPv6 prefix for the configured route.

9. In the Prefix Length field, specify the IPv6 prefix length for the configured route.

10. In the Next Hop IPv6 Address Type list, select one of the following options:

• Global IPv6 Address .

• Link-Local IPv6 address. If the next hop IPv6 address specified is a link-local IPv6 address, then specify the interface for the link-local IPv6 next hop address.

• Static-Reject . Select Static-Reject to create a static-reject route for a destination prefix. No next hop address is specified in that case.

11. Enter the Next Hop IPv6 Address for the configured route.

12. Select from the Interface list to specify in unit/slot/port format, the link-local IPv6 next hop address.

This field is enabled only if Link-Local is selected.

13. Specify the route Preference of the configured route.


The route is added.

15. To delete the selected route, click the Delete button.

Configure the IPv6 Route Table

 To configure the IPv6 Route Table:









Routing

354




7.

Select

Routing

 >

IPv6

>

Advanced

>

Route Table

.

8. In the Routes Displayed field, select which routes to display from the following list:

• All Routes . Show all active IPv6 routes.

• Best Routes Only

. Show only the best active routes.

• Configured Routes Only . Show the routes configured by the user.



Table 134. IPv6 Advanced Route Table

Field

Number of Routes

IPv6 Prefix

Prefix Length

Protocol

Next Hop Interface

Next Hop IP Address

Preference

Description

The total number of active routes in the route table.

The network prefix for the active route.

The prefix length for the active route.

The type of protocol for the active route.

The interface over which the route is active. For a reject route, the next hop would be a

Null0

interface.

The next hop IPv6 address for the active route.

The route preference of the configured route.

IPv6 Route Preferences

Use this screen to configure the default preference for each protocol. These values are arbitrary values in the range of 1 to 255 and are independent of route metrics. Most routing protocols use a route metric to determine the shortest path known to the protocol, independent of any other protocol. The best route to a destination is chosen by selecting the route with the lowest preference value. When there are multiple routes to a destination, the preference values are used to determine the preferred route. If there is still a tie, the route with the best route metric is chosen. To avoid problems with mismatched metrics you must configure different preference values for each of the protocols.

Routing

355


 Configure the IPv6 route preferences:












 > IPv6 > Advanced > Route Preference .

8. In the Static field, specify the static route preference value for the router.


9. In the OSPFv3 Intra field, specify the OSPFv3 intra route preference value in the router.


10. In the OSPFv3 Inter field, specify the OSPFv3 inter route preference value in the router.


11. In the OSPFv3 External field, specify the OSPFv3 external route preference value in the router.




Routing

356


The Local field displays the local preference.

Configure IPv6 Tunnels

You can create, configure, and delete tunnels.

 To configure an IPv6 tunnel:


2.



4.









7.

Select

Routing

 >

IPv6

>

Advanced

>

Tunnel Configuration

.

8. In the Tunnel ID field, select from the list of available tunnel IDs.

9. In the Mode list, select a supported mode:

• 6-in-4-configured

• 6-to-4

10. Select the IPv6 Mode from the list.

11. Enable IPv6 on this interface using the IPv6 address.

This option is configurable only until you specify an explicit IPv6 address.

12. From the IPv6 Unreachables list, select to Enable or Disable .

This specifies the mode of sending ICMPv6 Destination Unreachables on this interface. If you select Disable, then this interface does not send ICMPv6 destination unreachables.

By default IPv6 destination unreachables mode is enabled.

13. In the IPv6 Address/Prefix Length field, enter a configured IPv6 address for the selected interface.

Routing

357


The address must be entered in the format prefix/length.

14. From the EUI64 list, select to Enable or Disable the 64-bit extended unique identifier

(EUI-64).

For 6to4 tunnels, configure the IPv6 address with first 48-bits in the format

2002:tunnel-source-IPv4-address::/48.

15. Specify the desired Source Address for this tunnel.

This value must be entered in dotted-decimal notation.

16. Select the Source Interface for this tunnel.

The address associated with the selected interface is used as the source address.

17. Enter the Destination Address for this tunnel in dotted-decimal notation.


The tunnel is added.

19. To delete the selected tunnel, click the Delete button.



The Interface Link Status field indicates whether the tunnel interface is up or down.

VLAN Overview

You can configure M6100/M7100/M5300 software with some ports supporting VLANs and some supporting routing. You can also configure the software to allow traffic on a VLAN to be treated as if the VLAN were a router port.

When a port is enabled for bridging (default) rather than routing, all normal bridge processing is performed for an inbound packet, which is then associated with a VLAN. Its MAC destination address (MAC DA) and VLAN ID are used to search the MAC address table. If routing is enabled for the VLAN, and the MAC DA of an inbound unicast packet is that of the internal bridge-router interface, the packet is routed. An inbound multicast packet is forwarded to all ports in the VLAN, plus the internal bridge-router interface, if it was received on a routed VLAN.

Since a port can be configured to belong to more than one VLAN, VLAN routing might be enabled for all of the VLANs on the port, or for a subset. VLAN routing can be used to allow more than one physical port to reside on the same subnet. It could also be used when a

VLAN spans multiple physical networks, or when additional segmentation or security is required. This section shows how to configure the NETGEAR switch to support VLAN routing. A port can be either a VLAN port or a router port, but not both. However, a VLAN port can be part of a VLAN that is a router port.

Routing

358


Use the VLAN Static Routing Wizard

The VLAN Static Routing Wizard creates a VLAN, adds selected ports to the VLAN. The

VLAN Static Routing Wizard gives you the option to add the selected ports as a link aggregation (LAG). The Wizard does the following:

• Creates a VLAN and generates a unique name for VLAN.

•

Adds selected ports to the newly created VLAN and removes selected ports from the default VLAN.

•

Creates a LAG, add selected ports to a LAG, then adds a LAG to the newly created

VLAN.

•

Enables tagging on selected ports if the port is in another VLAN. Disables tagging if a selected port does NOT exist in another VLAN.

•

Excludes ports NOT selected from the VLAN.

• Enables routing on the VLAN using the IP address and subnet mask entered.

 To use the VLAN Static Routing Wizard:

1.



3.





5.



6.

Click the

Login

button.



 > VLAN > VLAN Static Routing Wizard .

Routing

359


8. Use VLAN ID to specify the VLAN identifier (VID) associated with this VLAN.

The range of the VLAN ID is 1 to 4093.

9. Use Ports to display selectable physical ports and LAGs (if any).

Selected ports are added to the routing VLAN. Each port has three modes:

• T (Tagged) . Select the ports on which all frames transmitted for this VLAN are tagged.

The ports that are selected are included in the VLAN.

• U (Untagged) . Select the ports on which all frames transmitted for this VLAN are untagged. The ports that are selected are included in the VLAN.

• BLANK(Autodetect) . Select the ports that can be dynamically registered in this VLAN through GVRP. This selection has the effect of excluding a port from the selected

VLAN.

10. Use the LAG Enabled option to add selected ports to VLAN as a LAG.

The default is No.

11. Use IP Address to define the IP address of the VLAN interface.

12. Use Network Mask to define the subnet mask of the VLAN interface.



Configure VLAN Routing

 To configure VLAN routing:




Routing

360





5.



6.

Click the

Login

button.



 > VLAN > VLAN Routing .

8. Select the VLAN ID .

This field displays the IDs of all the VLANs configured on this switch.

9.

Use

IP Address

to enter the IP address to be configured for the VLAN routing interface.

10. Use Subnet Mask to enter the subnet mask to be configured for the VLAN routing interface.

11.

Click the

Add

button.

The VLAN routing interface is added for the selected VLAN ID.

12. To remove the VLAN routing interface selected in the VLAN ID field, click the Delete button.


Table 135. VLAN Routing Configuration

Field

Port

MAC Address

Description

The interface assigned to the VLAN for routing.

The MAC Address assigned to the VLAN routing interface

Address Resolution Protocol Overview

The Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) associates a Layer 2 MAC address with a Layer 3

IPv4 address. M6100/M7100/M5300 software features both dynamic and manual ARP configuration. With manual ARP configuration, you can statically add entries into the ARP table.

Routing

361


ARP is a necessary part of the Internet Protocol (IP) and is used to translate an IP address to a media (MAC) address, defined by a local area network (LAN) such as Ethernet. A station needing to send an IP packet must learn the MAC address of the IP destination, or of the next hop router, if the destination is not on the same subnet. This is achieved by broadcasting an

ARP request packet, to which the intended recipient responds by unicasting an ARP reply containing its MAC address. Once learned, the MAC address is used in the destination address field of the Layer 2 header prepended to the IP packet.

The ARP cache is a table maintained locally in each station on a network. ARP cache entries are learned by examining the source information in the ARP packet payload fields, regardless of whether it is an ARP request or response. Thus, when an ARP request is broadcast to all stations on a LAN segment or virtual LAN (VLAN), each recipient has the opportunity to store the sender’s IP and MAC address in its respective ARP cache. The ARP response, being unicast, is normally seen only by the requestor, who stores the sender information in its ARP cache. Newer information always replaces existing content in the ARP cache.

The number of supported ARP entries is platform dependent.

Devices can be moved in a network, which means that the IP address that was at one time associated with a certain MAC address is now found using a different MAC, or it disappeared from the network altogether (for example, it was reconfigured, disconnected, or powered off).

This leads to stale information in the ARP cache unless entries are updated in reaction to new information seen on the network, periodically refreshed to determine if an address still exists, or removed from the cache if the entry was identified as a sender of an ARP packet during the course of an ageout interval, usually specified through configuration.

Configure Basic ARP Cache

Use this screen to show ARP entries in the ARP cache.

 To display ARP entries in the ARP cache:











Routing

362



 > ARP > Basic > ARP Cache .

8. IP Address displays the IP address associated with the system’s MAC address.

It must be the IP address of a device on a subnet attached to one of the switch's existing routing interfaces.

9. The Port field displays the associated unit/slot/port of the connection.

MAC Address displays the unicast MAC address of the device. The address is six 2-digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons, for example, 00:06:29:32:81:40.


Pagination Navigation Menu

• Rows per screen — Select how many table entries are displayed per screen. Possible values are 50, 100, 500, 1000 and All.

Note: If you select All, the browser might be slow to display the information.

• < Display the previous screen of the table data entries.

• > Display the next screen of the table data entries.

Add an Entry to the ARP Table

You can add an entry to the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) table.

 To add an entry to the ARP table:








Routing

363






 > ARP > Advanced > ARP Create .

8. Use IP Address to enter the IP address to add.

It must be the IP address of a device on a subnet attached to one of the switch's existing routing interfaces.

9. Use MAC Address to specify the unicast MAC address of the device.

Enter the address as six 2-digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons, for example,

00:06:29:32:81:40.


The static ARP entry is added to the switch.

11. To delete the selected static ARP entry from the switch, click the Delete button.


The MAC address mapping to the IP changes. Configuration changes take effect immediately.



Table 136. ARP Cache

Field

Port

IP Address

Description

The associated unit/slot/port of the connection.

The IP address. It must be the IP address of a device on a subnet attached to one of the switch's existing routing interfaces.

Routing

364


Table 136. ARP Cache (continued)

Field

Port

MAC Address

Type

Age

Description

The associated unit/slot/port of the connection.

The unicast MAC address of the device. The address is six two-digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons, for example

00:06:29:32:81:40.

The type of ARP entry. Possible values are as follows:

• Local . An ARP entry associated with one of the switch’s routing interface’s MAC addresses.

• Gateway . A dynamic ARP entry whose IP address is that of a router.

• Static . An ARP entry configured by the user.

• Dynamic

. An ARP entry that was learned by the router.

Age since the entry was last refreshed in the ARP table (in seconds).

View or Configure the ARP Table

You can change the configuration parameters for the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) table. You can also use this screen to display the contents of the table.

 To configure the ARP rable:


2.



4.









7.

Select

Routing



> ARP > Advanced > ARP Table Configuration

.

Routing

365


8. Use Age Time to enter the value for the switch to use for the ARP entry age-out time.

You must enter a valid integer that represents the number of seconds it takes for an ARP entry to age out. The range for this field is 15 to 21600 seconds. The default value for Age

Time is 1200 seconds.

9. Use Response Time to enter the value for the switch to use for the ARP response time-out.

You must enter a valid integer that represents the number of seconds the switch waits for a response to an ARP request. The range for this field is 1 to 10 seconds. The default value is 1 second.

10. Use Retries to enter an integer that specifies the maximum number of times an ARP request is retried.

The range for this field is 0 to 10. The default value for Retries is 4.

11. Use Cache Size to enter an integer that specifies the maximum number of entries for the

ARP cache.

The range for this field is 64 to 512. The default value for Cache Size is 1664.

12. Use Dynamic Renew to control whether the ARP component automatically attempts to renew ARP entries of type Dynamic when they age out.

The default setting is Enable.

13. Use Remove from Table to remove certain entries from the ARP table.

The choices listed specify the type of ARP entry to be deleted:

• All Dynamic Entries

• All Dynamic and Gateway Entries

Routing

366


• Specific Dynamic/Gateway Entry . Selecting this allows the user to specify the required IP address.

• Specific Static Entry . Selecting this allows the user to specify the required IP address.

• None . Selected if the user does not want to delete any entry from the ARP Table.


Table 137. ARP Table Configuration

Field

Total Entry Count

Peak Total Entries

Active Static Entries

Configured Static Entries

Maximum Static Entries

Description

Total number of entries in the ARP table.

Highest value reached by Total Entry Count. This counter value is restarted whenever the ARP table Cache Size value is changed.

Total number of active static entries in the ARP table.

Total number of configured static entries in the ARP table.

Maximum number of static entries that can be defined.

Configure RIP

Only the following switches support RIP:

• M6100

•

M5300-28G3

• M5300-52G3

•

M5300-28GF3

The following switches support RIP with an L3 license:

•

M5300-28G

• M5300-52G

•

M5300-28G-POE+

• M5300-52G-POE+

Enable RIP

 To enable RIP:

1.



3.


Routing

367









7. Select Routing > RIP > Basic > RIP Configuration .

8. In the RIP Admin Mode field, select the Enable or Disable option.

If you select Enable , RIP is activated for the switch. The default is Enable.

Configure RIP Settings

 To configure advanced RIP settings:











7. Select Routing > RIP > Advanced > RIP Configuration .

Routing

368


8. Select the RIP Admin Mode Disable or Enable radio button.

If you select Enable , RIP is activated for the switch. By default, RIP is enabled.

9. Select a Split Horizon Mode radio button:

• None . No special processing for this case.

• Simple . A route is not included in updates sent to the router from which it was learned. The default is Simple.

• Poison Reverse . A route is included in updates sent to the router from which it was learned, but the metric is set to infinity.

Split horizon is a technique for avoiding problems caused by including routes in updates sent to the router from which the route was originally learned

10. In the Auto Summary Mode field, select the Enable or Disable option.

If you select Enable , groups of adjacent routes are summarized into single entries reduce the total number of entries. The default is Disable.

11. In the Host Routes Accept Mode field, select the Enable or Disable option.

If you select Enable, the router accepts host routes. The default is Enable.

12. In the Default Information Originate field, select to Enable or Disable default route advertisement.

13. In the Default Metric field, specify a default value for the metric of redistributed routes.

This field displays the default metric if one has already been set, or 0 if one was not configured earlier. The valid values are 1 to 15.



Routing

369



Table 138. RIP Advanced Configuration

Field

Global Route Changes

Global Queries

Description

The number of route changes made to the IP route database by RIP.

This does not include the refresh of a route's age.

The number of responses sent to RIP queries from other systems.

Configure Advanced RIP Interface Settings

 To configure advanced RIP interface settings:











7. Select Routing > RIP > Advanced > Interface Configuration .

Routing

370


8. Select the check box next to the Interface .

9. In the Go To Interface field, enter the Interface in unit/slot/port format and click the Go button.


10. From the Send Version list, select the version of RIP control packets that the interface will send.

The value is one of the following:

• None . No RIP control packets are sent.

• RIP-1 . Send RIP version 1 formatted packets through broadcast.

• RIP-1c . RIP version 1–compatibility mode. Send RIP version 2–formatted packets through broadcast.

• RIP-2 . Send RIP version 2 packets using multicast. The default is RIP-2.

11. From the Receive Version list, select which RIP control packets the interface accepts.

The value is one of the following:

• RIP-1 . Accept only RIP version 1–formatted packets.

• RIP-2 . Accept only RIP version 2–formatted packets.

• Both . Accept packets in either format. The default is Both.

• None . No RIP control packets are accepted.

12. Select Enable or Disable from the RIP Mode list.

Before you enable RIP version 1 or version 1c on an interface, you must first enable network directed broadcast mode on the corresponding interface. The default value is

Disable.

13. Select the Authentication Type from the list.

The types are as follows:

• None . This is the initial interface state. If you select this option, no authentication protocols are run.

• Simple . If you select Simple , you are prompted to enter an authentication key. This key is included, in the clear, in the RIP header of all packets sent on the network. All routers on the network must be configured with the same key.

Routing

371


• Encrypt . If you select Encrypt , you are prompted to enter both an authentication key and an authentication ID. Encryption uses the MD5 Message-Digest algorithm. All routers on the network must be configured with the same key and ID.

14. Enter the RIP Authentication Key for the specified interface.

If you selected Authentication Type None , you are not prompted to enter a key. If you selected Simple or Encrypt , the key can be up to 16 octets long. The key value is displayed only if you are logged on with read/write privileges.





Table 139. RIP Advanced Interface Configuration

Field

Bad Packets Received

Bad Routes Received

Updates Sent

IP Address

Link State

Description

The number of RIP response packets received by the RIP process that were subsequently discarded for any reason.

The number of routes in valid RIP packets that were ignored for any reason (for example, unknown address family, or invalid metric).

The number of triggered RIP updates actually sent on this interface.

This explicitly does not

include full updates sent containing new information.

The IP address of the router interface.

Indicates whether the RIP interface is up or down.

Route Redistribution

Use this screen to configure the RIP route redistribution parameters. The allowable values for each field are displayed next to the field. If any invalid values are entered, an alert message is displayed with the list of all the valid values.

 To configure advanced RIP route redistribution settings:







Routing

372







7.

Select

Routing > RIP > Advanced > Route Redistribution

.

The Source list is populated by only those source routes that are already configured for redistribution by RIP. This allows you to configure another source route among the available source routes.

8. In the Source list, select a value.

The valid values are as follows:

• Connected

• Static

• OSPF

9. From the Redistribute Mode list, select to Enable or Disable RIP redistribute mode.


10. Enter the Metric of redistributed routes for the given source route.

The valid values are is 0 to 15; 0 means unconfigure.

11. Use the Distribute List field to set the access list that filters the routes to be redistributed by the destination protocol.

Only permitted routes are redistributed. If this command refers to a non-existent access list, all routes are permitted. The valid values for Access List IDs are 0 to 199. When used for route filtering, the only fields in an access list that get used are as follows:

• Source IP address and netmask

• Destination IP address and netmask

• Action (permit or deny)

All other fields (such as Source and Destination Port, Precedence, Tos, and so on) are ignored.

Routing

373


The source IP address is compared to the destination IP address of the route. The source

IP netmask in the access list rule is treated as a wildcard mask, indicating which bits in the source IP address must match the destination address of the route.

Note: A 1 in the mask indicates a

do not care

in the corresponding address bit.

When an access list rule includes a destination IP address and netmask (an extended access list), the destination IP address is compared to the network mask of the destination of the route. The destination netmask in the access list serves as a wildcard mask, indicating which bits in the route's destination mask are significant for the filtering operation.



The following table describes the RIP Route Redistribution nonconfigurable data that is displayed.

Table 140. RIP Route Redistribution Summary

Field

Source Protocol

Description

The source route to be redistributed by RIP. The valid values are as follows:

•

Connected

• Static

•

OSPF

Redistribute Mode

Metric

The route redistribution mode for a particular source protocol. By default this is disabled.

The metric of redistributed routes for the given source route. The field displays 0 when the metric is not configured.

Distribute List The access list that filters the routes to be redistributed by the destination protocol. The field displays 0 when not configured.

The following list of redistributed routes is valid when OSPF is selected as source. The list can include one or more of:

Match Internal

Match External Type 1

Match External Type 2

Match NSSA External Type 1

Match NSSA External Type 2

Sets internal OSPF routes to be redistributed.

Sets external type 1 OSPF routes to be redistributed.

Sets external type 2 OSPF routes to be redistributed.

Sets NSSA external type 1 OSPF routes to be redistributed.

Sets NSSA external type 2 OSPF routes to be redistributed.

Routing

374


Configure Router Discovery

 To configure router discovery:


2.



4.









7.

Select

Routing

 >

Router Discovery > Router Discovery Configuration

.

8.

Use

Interface

to select the router interface.

9. Use Advertise Mode to select Enable or Disable .

If you select

Enable

, router advertisements are transmitted from the selected interface.

10.

Use

Advertise Address

to select

Enable

or

Disable

.

If you select Enable , router advertisements are transmitted from the selected interface.

11. Use Maximum Advertise Interval to enter the maximum time (in seconds) allowed between router advertisements sent from the interface.

12.

Use

Minimum Advertise Interval to enter the minimum time (in seconds) allowed between router advertisements sent from the interface.

The value must be in the range of 3 to 1800. The default value is 450.000000.

13. Use Advertise Lifetime to enter the value (in seconds) to be used as the lifetime field in router advertisements sent from the interface.

Routing

375


This is the maximum length of time that the advertised addresses are to be considered as valid router addresses by hosts.

14. Use Preference Level to specify the preference level of the router as a default router relative to other routers on the same subnet.

Higher numbered addresses are preferred. You must enter an integer.

15. Use Apply to send the updated configuration to the switch. Configuration changes take effect immediately.

Configure Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol

Only the following switches support Virtual Redundancy Protocol (VRRP):

• M7100

• M6100

• M5300-28G3

• M5300-52G3

• M5300-28GF3

The following switches support VRRP with an L3 license:

• M5300-28G

• M5300-52G

• M5300-28G-POE+

• M5300-52G-POE+

Configure Global VRRP Settings

 To configure the global VRRP settings:










Routing

376



7. Select Routing > VRRP > Basic > VRRP Configuration .

8. In the Global Configuration Admin Mode field, set the administrative status of VRRP in the router to either Enable or Disable option.

By default, VRRP is disabled.

9. The VRID field is configurable only if you are creating a new virtual router.

Enter the VRID. The valid values are 1 to 255.

10. Select the unit/slot/port for the new virtual router from the Interface list.

11. Enter the Primary IP Address of the virtual router.

12. From the Mode list, select Active or Inactive mode for the new virtual router.


The virtual router is added to the switch configuration.

14. To delete the selected virtual router, click the Delete button.

Note: The router cannot be deleted if there are secondary addresses configured.




Table 141. VRRP Global Configuration

Field

Interface IP Address

State

Description

Indicates the IP address associated with the selected interface.

The current state of the virtual router. Possible values are as follows:

•

Initialize

•

Master

•

Backup

Routing

377


Configure Advanced VRRP Settings

 To configure the advanced VRRP global settings.











7. Select Routing > VRRP > Advanced > VRRP Configuration .

8. In the Global Configuration Admin Mode field, set the administrative status of VRRP in the router to either Enable or Disable .

By default, VRRP is disabled.

9. Enter the VRID .

Routing

378


The VRID field is configurable only if you are creating a new virtual router. The valid values are 1 to 255.

10.

Select the unit/slot/port for the new virtual router from the

Interface

list.

11. In the Preempt Mode field, select the Enable or Disable option.

If you select

Enable

, a backup router preempts the master router if it has a priority greater than the master virtual router's priority, provided the master is not the owner of the virtual router IP address. The default is Enable.

12.

In the

Accept Mode

field, select the

Enable

or

Disable

option.

If you select Enable , the VRRP master accepts all types of data packets addressed to IP addresses associated with the virtual router. If you select

Disable

, the VRRP master discards all types of data packets addressed to IP addresses associated with the virtual router, if it is not the IP address owner. The default is Disable.

13.

Enter the

Configured Priority value

to be used by the VRRP router in the election for the master virtual router.

The valid values are 1 to 254. If the virtual IP address is the same as the interface IP address, the priority gets set to 254, no matter what you enter.

14.

In the

Advertisement Interval field, enter the time, in seconds, between the transmission of advertisement packets by this virtual router.

Enter a number from 1 to 255. The default value is 1 second.

15. Enter the Primary IP Address , the IP address associated with the virtual router.

The default is 0.0.0.0.

16.

From the

Authentication Type

list, select the type of authentication for the virtual router.

The options are as follows:

• 0-None . No authentication is performed. The default is None.

• 1-Simple

. Authentication is performed using a text password.

17.

If you selected simple authentication, enter the password in the

Authentication Data field.

18. In the Status field, select the Active or Inactive option to start or stop the operation of the virtual router.

The default is inactive.

19.

Click the

Add

button.

The virtual router is added to the switch configuration.

20. To delete the selected virtual router, click the Delete button.

Note:

The router cannot be deleted if there are secondary addresses configured.


Routing

379




Table 142. Advanced VRRP Global Configuration

Field

Operational Priority

Interface IP Address

Owner

VMAC Address

State

Description

Indicates the priority to be used for the virtual router master election process. Higher values imply higher priority.

• A priority of 0 is sent by the master router to indicate that this router has ceased to participate in VRRP and a backup virtual router transitions to become a new master.

•

A priority of 255 is used for the router that owns the associated IP addresses.

Indicates the IP address associated with the selected interface.

Set to True if the virtual IP address and the interface IP address are the same, otherwise set to

False

. If this parameter is set to True, the virtual router is the owner of the virtual IP address, and always wins an election for master router when it is active.

The virtual MAC address associated with the virtual router, composed of a 24-bit organizationally unique identifier, the 16-bit constant identifying the VRRP address block and the 8-bit VRID.

The current state of the virtual router. Possible values are as follows:

• Initialize

•

Master

• Backup

Configure an Advanced VRRP Secondary IP Address

 To configure the advanced VRRP secondary IP address settings:










Routing

380



7. Select Routing > VRRP > Advanced > VRRP Secondary IP Address Configuration .

8. In the VRRP Interface - VRRP ID field, select one of the existing virtual routers, listed by interface number and VRRP ID.

9. In the Secondary IP Address field, enter the IP address for the interface.

This address must be a member of one of the subnets currently configured on the interface. This value is read-only once configured.


The secondary IP address is added to the selected VRRP interface.

11. To delete the selected secondary IP address interface., click the Delete button



The Primary IP Address field displays the primary IP address of the virtual router.

Configure an Advanced VRRP Tracking Interface

 To configure an advanced VRRP tracking interface:








Routing

381





7. Select Routing > VRRP > Advanced > VRRP Tracking Configuration .

8. In the VRRP Interface - VRRP ID field, select a virtual router.

The virtual routers are listed by interface number and VRRP ID.

9. Select a routing interface from the Tracked Interface field.

This lists all routing interfaces that are not yet tracked for this VRRP ID and interface configuration. The exceptions to this list are loopback and tunnels that could not be tracked.

10. Enter the Priority Decrement for the tracked interface.


The nonconfigurable field, Tracked Interface State , displays the state of the tracked interface.

11. In the Tracked Route Prefix field, enter the prefix of the route.

12. In the Tracked Route Prefix Length field, enter the prefix length of the route.

13. Enter the Priority Decrement for the route.


Routing

382


The nonconfigurable Reachable field displays the reachability of the tracked route.


The traced interface or tracked route is added to the VRRP.

15.

To delete the selected tracked interface or tracked route, click the

Delete

button.




Table 143. Advanced VRRP Tracking Configuration

Field

Tracked Interface State

Reachable

Description

The state of the tracked interface.

The reachability of the tracked route.

View Advanced VRRP Statistics

 To view advanced VRRP statistics:

1.



3.





5.



6.

Click the

Login

button.


7. Select Routing > VRRP > Advanced > VRRP Statistics .

Routing

383



Update

button.


Table 144. Advanced VRRP Statistics

Field

Global Statistics

Router Checksum Errors

Description

Router Version Errors

Router VRID Errors

The total number of VRRP packets received with an invalid VRRP checksum value.

The total number of VRRP packets received with an unknown or unsupported version number.

The total number of VRRP packets received with an invalid VRID for this virtual router.

Statistics

VRRP ID

Interface

Up Time

State Transitioned to Master

Advertisement Received

The VRID for the selected virtual router.

The unit/slot/port for the selected virtual router.

The time, in days, hours, minutes and seconds, that elapsed since the virtual router transitioned to the initialized state.

The total number of times that this virtual router's state transitioned to

Master.

The total number of VRRP advertisements received by this virtual router.

Routing

384


Table 144. Advanced VRRP Statistics (continued)

Field

Advertisement Interval Errors

Authentication Failure

IP TTL Errors

Zero Priority Packets Received

Zero Priority Packets Sent

Invalid Type Packets Received

Address List Errors

Invalid Authentication Type

Authentication Type Mismatch

Packet Length Errors

Description

The total number of VRRP advertisement packets received for which the advertisement interval was different from the one configured for the local virtual router.

The total number of VRRP packets received that did not pass the authentication check.

The total number of VRRP packets received by the virtual router with IP

Time-To-Live (TTL) not equal to 255.

The total number of VRRP packets received by the virtual router with a priority of 0.

The total number of VRRP packets sent by the virtual router with a priority of 0.

The number of VRRP packets received by the virtual router with an invalid value in the Type field.

The total number of packets received for which the address list does not match the locally configured list for the virtual router.

The total number of packets received with an unknown authentication type.

The total number of packets received with an authentication type different from the locally configured authentication method.

The total number of packets received with a packet length less than the length of the VRRP header.

Routing

385

6.

OSPF and OSPFv3


•

OSPF

•

OSPFv3

6

386


OSPF

Only the following switches support OSPF:

• M6100

•

M5300-28G3

• M5300-52G3

•

M5300-28GF3

The following switches support OSPF with an L3 license:

•

M5300-28G

• M5300-52G

•

M5300-28G-POE+

• M5300-52G-POE+

Configure Basic OSPF Settings

 To configure basic OSPF settings:

1.



3.





5.



6.

Click the

Login

button.


7. Select Routing > OSPF > Basic > OSPF Configuration .


OSPF and OSPFv3

387


If you select Enable, OSPF is activated for the switch. By default, OSPF is enabled. You must configure a router ID before OSPF can become operational. Use the IP

Configuration screen to configure a router ID or issue the CLI command config router id .

For more information, see


on page 325.

The Router ID displays the 32-bit integer in dotted-decimal format that uniquely identifies the router within the autonomous system (AS).

To change the router ID, you must first disable OSPF. After you set the new router ID, you must reenable OSPF for the change to take effect. The default value is 0.0.0.0, although this is not a valid router ID.



Configure the OSPF Default Route Advertise Settings

 To configure default route advertise settings:











7. Select Routing > OSPF > Advanced > OSPF Configuration .

OSPF and OSPFv3

388


8. In the Default Information Originate field, select the Enable or Disable option.

If you select Enable, OSPF originates an external LSA advertising a default route

(0.0.0.0/0.0.0.0). Default Information Originate is disabled by default.

9. In the Always field, select True or False .

If Default Information Originate is enabled, but the Always option is False, OSPF originates a default route only if a default route is already in the router’s routing table.

Set Always to True to force OSPF to originate a default route regardless of whether a default route already exists. The default is False.

10. In the Metric field, specify the metric of the default route.

The valid values range from 0 to 16777214. The default is 0.

11. In the Metric Type field, select the OSPF metric type of the default route.

Two types are supported: External Type 1 and External Type 2 . The default is External

Type 2.



OSPF and OSPFv3

389


??? Does this need to be a separate procedure? What should I put in for the navigation and screen shot?

Configure OSPF Settings

 To configure the OSPF settings:











OSPF and OSPFv3

390


7. Select Routing > OSPF > Advanced > OSPF Configuration .

8. In the Router ID field, enter the 32-bit integer in dotted-decimal format that uniquely identifies the router within the autonomous system (AS).

To change the router ID, you must first disable OSPF. After you set the new router ID, you must reenable OSPF for the change to take effect. The default value is 0.0.0.0, although this is not a valid router ID.

9. In the Admin Mode field, select Enable or Disable .

If you select Enable , OSPF is activated for the switch. The default value is Enable. You must configure a router ID before OSPF can become operational. You do this on the IP

Configuration screen, or by issuing the CLI command

config router id

. For more information, see


on page 325.

10. In the RFC 1583 Compatibility field, select Enable or Disable .

This specifies the preference rules that are used when choosing among multiple

AS-external-LSAs advertising the same destination. If you select Enable , the preference rules are those defined in Section 16.4.1 of the OSPF-2 standard (RFC 2328), which prevents routing loops when AS-external-LSAs for the same destination originated from different areas. The default value is Enable. All routers in the OSPF domain must be

OSPF and OSPFv3

391

M6100, M5300, and M7100 Series Managed Switches configured the same. If all OSPF routers are capable of operating according to RFC

2328, RFC 1583 Compatibility must be disabled.

11. Set the Opaque LSA Status to Enable if OSPF will store and flood opaque LSAs.

An opaque LSA is used for flooding user-defined information within an OSPF router domain.

12. When the number of nondefault external LSAs exceeds a configured limit, the router enters an overflow state as defined in RFC 1765.

Use the Exit Overflow Interval field to specify how long in seconds OSPF must wait before attempting to leave overflow state. In overflow state, OSPF cannot originate nondefault external LSAs. If the Exit Overflow Interval is 0, OSPF does not leave the overflow state until it is disabled and reenabled. The range is 0 to 2,147,483,647 seconds. The default is 0.

13. Configure the SPF Delay Time .

This is the number of seconds from when OSPF receives a topology change to the start of the next SPF calculation. Delay Time is an integer from 0 to 65535 seconds. The default is 5 seconds. A value of 0 means that there is no delay; that is, the SPF calculation is started upon a topology change.

14. Configure the SPF Hold Time .

This is the minimum time in seconds between two consecutive SPF calculations. The range is 0 to 65,535 seconds. The default time is 10 seconds. A value of 0 means that there is no delay; that is, two SPF calculations can be done, one immediately after the other.

15. Use the External LSDB Limit field to set the number of the external LSDB limit for OSPF.

If the value is –1, then there is no limit. When the number of nondefault AS-external-LSAs in a router’s link state database reaches the external LSDB limit, the router enters overflow state. The router never holds more than the external LSDB limit none-default

AS-external-LSAs in the database. The external LSDB limit must be set identically in all routers attached to the OSPF backbone and/or any regular OSPF area. The range for the

External LSDB Limit field is –1 to 2147483647. The default value is –1.

16. Use the Default Metric field to set a default for the metric of redistributed routes.

This field is blank if a default metric was not configured. The range of valid values is 1 to

16777214. The default value is 0.

17. Use the Maximum Paths field to set the number of paths that OSPF can report for a given destination.

The range of valid values is 1 to 16. The default value is 4.

18. Configure the AutoCost Reference Bandwidth to control how OSPF calculates link cost.

Specify the reference bandwidth in megabits per second. Unless a link cost is configured, the link cost is computed by dividing the reference bandwidth by the interface bandwidth.


OSPF and OSPFv3

392


19. In the Default Passive Setting field, select Enable or Disable from the list to configure the global passive mode setting for all OSPF interfaces.

Configuring this field overwrites any present interface level passive mode setting. OSPF does not form adjacencies on passive interfaces, but does advertise attached networks as stub networks. The default is Disabled.

20.

Click the

Apply

button.



Table 145. OSPF Configuration

Field

ASBR Mode

ABR Status

External LSA Count

External LSA Checksum

AS_OPAQUE LSA Count

AS_OPAQUE LSA Checksum

New LSAs Originated

LSAs Received

Description

The router is an autonomous system boundary router if it is configured to redistribute routes from another protocol, or if it is configured to originate an external LSA advertising the default route.

The router is an autonomous system boundary router if it is configured to redistribute routes from another protocol, or if it is configured to originate an external LSA advertising the default route.

The number of external (LS type 5) LSAs (link state advertisements) in the link state database.

The sum of the LS checksums of the external LSAs (link state advertisements) contained in the link state database. This sum can be used to determine if there was a change in a router's link state database, and to compare the link state databases of two routers. This value is in hexadecimal.

The number of opaque LSAs with domain-wide flooding scope.

The sum of the LS checksums of the opaque LSAs with domain wide flooding scope. This sum can be used to determine if there was a change in a router's link state database, and to compare the link state databases of two routers. This value is in hexadecimal.

In any given OSPF area, a router originates several LSAs. Each router originates a router-LSA. If the router is also the designated router for any of the area's networks, it originates network LSAs for those networks. This value represents the number of LSAs originated by this router.

The number of LSAs (link state advertisements) received that were determined to be new instantiations. This number does not include newer instantiations of self-originated LSAs.

OSPF and OSPFv3

393


Configure the OSPF Common Area ID

 To configure the area ID:











7. Select Routing > OSPF > Advanced > Common Area Configuration .

8. Enter the OSPF Area ID.

An area ID is a 32-bit integer in dotted-decimal format that uniquely identifies the area to which a router interface connects.


The area ID is added.

10. To delete a selected area ID, click the Delete button.

OSPF and OSPFv3

394



Table 146. OSPF Common Area Configuration

Field

External Routing

SPF Runs

Area Border Router Count

Area LSA Count

Area LSA Checksum

Flood List Length

Import Summary LSAs

Description

A definition of the router's capabilities for the area, including whether or not AS-external-LSAs are flooded into/throughout the area. If the area is a stub area, then these are the possible options for which you can configure the external routing capability; otherwise, the only option is

Import External LSAs .

•

Import External LSAs. Import and propagate external LSAs.

• Import No LSAs. Do not import and propagate external LSAs.

The number of times that the intra-area route table was calculated using this area's link state database. This is typically done using

Dijkstra's algorithm.

The total number of area border routers reachable within this area. This is initially zero, and is calculated in each SPF pass.

The total number of link state advertisements in this area's link state database, excluding AS external LSAs.

The 32-bit unsigned sum of the link state advertisements' LSA checksums contained in this area's link state database. This sum excludes external (LSA type 5) link state advertisements. The sum can be used to determine if there was a change in a router's link state database, and to compare the link state database of two routers.

This is the number of LSAs on this area's flood list.

The summary LSAs are imported into this area.

Configure the OSPF Stub Area

 To configure the OSPF stub area:

1.



3.





5.



6.

Click the

Login

button.

OSPF and OSPFv3

395



7. Select Routing > OSPF > Advanced > Stub Area Configuration .



9. Configure the Import Summary LSAs by selecting Enable or Disable from the list.

If you select Enable , summary LSAs are imported into stub areas.

10. Configure the Default Cost by entering the metric value to be applied for the default route advertised to the stub area.

The valid values range from 1 to 16,777,215.


The area is configured as a stub area.

12. To delete the stub area designation, click the Delete button.

The area is returned to normal state.




Table 147. OSPF Stub Area Configuration

Field

SPF Runs


Area LSA Count

Description





OSPF and OSPFv3

396


Table 147. OSPF Stub Area Configuration (continued)

Field

Area LSA Checksum

Type of Service

Description


This field is the normal ToS associated with the stub metric.

Configure the OSPF NSSA Area

 To configure the NSSA area:


2.



4.









7.

Select

Routing > OSPF > Advanced > NSSA Area Configuration

.

OSPF and OSPFv3

397





If you select

Enable

, summary LSAs are imported into NSSA areas.

10.

Configure the

Default Information Originate

.

This option permits you to advertise a default route into the NSSA when Import Summary

LSAs is disabled. This can also be applied by the CLI command area (area-id) NSSA default-info-originate in the IP router OSPF config mode.

a.

In the Admin Mode list, select to Enable or Disable the default information originate. b.

In the

Metric Value

field, set the default metric value for default information originate. The value range of values is 1 to 16777214.

c. In the Metric Type field, select the type of metric specified in the Metric Value field.

Options are as follows:

• Comparable Cost . External type 1 metrics that are comparable to the OSPF metric.

• Non-comparable Cost . External type 2 metrics that are assumed to be larger than the cost of the OSPF metric.

11.

Select the

Translator Role

of the NSSA.

Options are as follows: a. Always . Cause the router to assume the role of the translator the instant it becomes a border router.

b. Candidate

. Cause the router to participate in the translator election process when it attains border router status.

12. In the Translator Stability Interval field, configure the translator of the NSSA.

The value is the period of time that an elected translator continues to perform its duties after it determines that its translator status was deposed by another router. The valid range is 0 to 3600.

13.

In the

Redistribute Mode

field, select

Enable

or

Disable

from the list.

This configures the NSSA ABR so that learned external routes are redistributed to the

NSSA.

14.

Click the

Add

button.

The area is configured as an NSSA area.

OSPF and OSPFv3

398


15. To delete the NSSA area designation, click the Delete button.


16.

Click the

Apply

button.



Table 148. OSPF NSSA Area Configuration

Field

SPF Runs


Area LSA Count

Area LSA Checksum

Translator State

Description






This field displays if and how the NSSA border router translates Type 7 into Type 5. Possible options are as follows:

• Enabled

. The NSSA border router’s translator role is set to always.

• Elected . The candidate NSSA border router is translating Type 7

LSAs into Type 5.

• Disabled . The candidate NSSA border router is not translating

Type 7 LSAs into Type 5.

Configure the OSPF Area Range

 Configure the OSPF area range:


2.



4.





OSPF and OSPFv3

399





7. Select Routing > OSPF > Advanced > Area Range Configuration .



9. Enter the IP Address for the address range for the selected area.

10. Enter the Subnet Mask for the address range for the selected area.

11. From the list in the LSDB Type field, select the type of link advertisement associated with the specified area and address range.

Options are as follows: Network Summary or NSSA External . The default type is

Network Summary.

12. In the Advertise list, select Enable or Disabl .

If you select Enable , the address range is advertised outside the area through a network summary LSA. The default is Enable.


The new address range is added.

14. To remove the specified address range from the area configuration, click the Delete button.



Configure the OSPF Interface

 To configure the OSPF interface:





OSPF and OSPFv3

400









7.

Select

Routing > OSPF > Advanced > Interface Configuration

.

8. In the Go To Interface field, enter the interface in unit/slot/port format and click the Go button.


9. Select the check box next to the Interface .

10. In the OSPF Area ID field, enter the 32-bit integer in dotted-decimal format.

This ID uniquely identifies the OSPF area to which the selected router interface connects.

If you assign an area ID that does not exist, the area is created with default values.

OSPF and OSPFv3

401


11. In the Admin Mode list, select Enable or Disable .

The default value is Disable . You can configure OSPF parameters without enabling

OSPF admin mode, but the change does not take effect until you enable admin mode.

The following information is displayed only if admin mode is enabled:

• State

• Designated router

• Backup designated router

• Number of link events

• LSA Ack interval

• Metric cost

For OSPF to be fully functional, you must enter a valid ID address and subnet mask using either the IP Interface Configuration screen or the CLI command config ip interface network . For more information, see

Configure the IP Interface

on page 336.

Note: Once OSPF is initialized on the router, it remains initialized until the router is reset.

12. In the Router Priority field, enter the OSPF priority for the selected interface.

The priority of an interface is specified as an integer from 0 to 255. The default is 1, which is the highest router priority. A value of 0 indicates that the router is not eligible to become the designated router on this network.

13. Configure the Retransmit Interval by entering the OSPF retransmit interval for the specified interface.

This is the number of seconds between link state advertisements for adjacencies belonging to this router interface. This value is also used when retransmitting database descriptions and link state request packets. The valid values range from 1 to 3600 seconds (1 hour). The default is 5 seconds.

14. Configure the Hello Interval by entering the OSPF hello interval for the specified interface in seconds.

This parameter must be the same for all routers attached to a network. Values range from

1 to 65,535. The default is 10 seconds.

15. Enter the OSPF Dead Interval for the specified interface in seconds.

This specifies how long a router waits to see a neighbor router’s hello packets before declaring that the router is down. This parameter must be the same for all routers attached to a network. This value must be a multiple of the hello interval (for example, 4).

The valid values range from 1 to 65,535. The default is 40 seconds.

16. In the Iftransit Delay Interval field, enter the OSPF transit delay for the specified interface.

This specifies the estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit a link state update packet over the selected interface. The valid values range from 1 to 3600 seconds (1 hour). The default value is 1 second.

OSPF and OSPFv3

402


17. Configure MTU Ignore by selecting Enable or Disable from the list.

MTU Ignore disables OSPF MTU mismatch detection on received database description packets. The default value is Disable (MTU mismatch detection is enabled).

18. Configure Passive Mode by selecting Enable or Disable from the list.

Make an interface passive to prevent OSPF from forming an adjacency on an interface.

OSPF advertises networks attached to passive interfaces as stub networks. Interfaces are not passive by default, meaning that the passive mode default is Disable.

19.

IIn the OSPF

Network Type

list, select

Broadcast

or

Point-to-Point

.

OSPF selects a designated router and originates network LSAs only for broadcast networks. No more than two OSPF routers can be present on a point-to-point link. The default network type for Ethernet interfaces is broadcast .

20. Select an Authentication Type other than None by selecting from the list.

The choices are as follows:

• None

. This is the initial interface state. If you select this option from the list, no authentication protocols are run. The default is None.

• Simple

. You are prompted to enter an authentication key. This key is included, in the clear, in the OSPF header of all packets sent on the network. All routers on the network must be configured with the same key.

• Encrypt . You are prompted to enter an authentication key and an authentication ID.

Encryption uses the MD5 Message-Digest algorithm. All routers on the network must be configured with the same key and ID.

21. Enter the Authentication Key ID to be used for authentication.

You are prompted to enter an ID only if you select Encrypt as the authentication type. The

ID is a number between 0 and 255, inclusive.

22. In the Metric Cost field, enter the link cost.

OSPF uses this value in computing shortest paths. The range is from 1 to 65,535. The default is 1.




Table 149. OSPF Interface Configuration

Field

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Description

The IP address of the interface.

The network mask, indicating the portion of the IP address that identifies the attached network.

OSPF and OSPFv3

403


Table 149. OSPF Interface Configuration (continued)

Field

LSA Ack Interval (secs)

State

Designated Router

Backup Designated Router

Number of Link Events

Local Link LSAs

Local Link LSA Checksum

Description

The number of seconds to wait before sending a delayed acknowledgement.

The state of the selected router interface. State is one of the following:

• Down . This is the initial interface state. The lower-level protocols indicated that the interface is unusable. Interface parameters are set to their initial values. All interface timers are disabled, and there are no adjacencies associated with the interface.

• Loopback . The router's interface to the network is looped back either in hardware or software. The interface is unavailable for regular data traffic.You can get information on the quality of this interface by sending

ICMP pings to the interface or through something like a bit error test.

For this reason, IP packets can still be addressed to an interface in loopback state. To facilitate this, such interfaces are advertised in router- LSAs as single host routes, whose destination is the IP interface address.

• Waiting . The router is trying to determine the identity of the backup designated router for the network by monitoring received hello packets.

The router cannot elect a backup designated router or a designated router until it transitions out of the waiting state. This prevents unnecessary changes of the backup designated router.

• Designated Router

. This router is the designated router on the attached network. Adjacencies are established to all other routers attached to the network. The router must also originate a network LSA for the network node. The network LSA contains links to all routers

(including the designated router) attached to the network.

• Backup Designated Router . This router is the backup designated router on the attached network. It is promoted to designated router if the present designated router fails. The router establishes adjacencies to all other routers attached to the network. The backup designated router performs slightly different functions during the LSA flooding, as compared to the designated router.

• Other Designated Router . The interface is connected to a broadcast on which other routers are the designated router and backup designated router. The router attempts to form adjacencies to both the designated router and the backup designated router.

The identity of the designated router for this network, in the view of the advertising router. The designated router is identified here by its router ID.

The value 0.0.0.0 means that there is no designated router. This field displays only if the OSPF admin mode is enabled.

The identity of the backup designated router for this network, in the view of the advertising router. The backup designated router is identified here by its router ID. Set to 0.0.0.0 if there is no backup designated router.

The number of times the specified OSPF interface changed its state.

The number of opaque LSAs whose flooding scope is the link on this interface.

The sum of the checksums of local link LSAs for this link.

OSPF and OSPFv3

404


View OSPF Statistics for an Interface

If OSPF is enabled, you can view statistics for the selected interface.

 To view OSPF statistics for an interface:

1.



3.





5.



6.

Click the

Login

button.


7. Select Routing > OSPF > Advanced > Interface Statistics .

OSPF and OSPFv3

405


8. In the OSPF Interface Selection area of the screen, from the list in the Interface field, select the interface for which data is to be displayed.

To clear all the statistics of the OSPF interface, click the Clear button.


The following table describes the nonconfigurable OSPF Interface Statistics data that is displayed.

Table 150. OSPF Interface Statistics

Field

OSPF Area ID


AS Border Router Count

Area LSA Count

IP Address

Interface Events

Virtual Events

Neighbor Events

Sent Packets

Received Packets

Discards

Bad Version

Source Not on Local Subnet

Virtual Link Not Found

Description

The OSPF area to which the selected router interface belongs. An

OSPF area ID is a 32 bit integer in dotted-decimal format that uniquely identifies the area to which the interface connects.


The total number of autonomous system border routers reachable within this area. This is initially zero, and is calculated in each SPF pass.


The IP address of the interface.

The number of times the specified OSPF interface changed its state, or an error occurred.

The number of state changes or errors that occurred on this virtual link.

The number of times this neighbor relationship changed state, or an error occurred.

The number of OSPF packets transmitted on the interface.

The number of valid OSPF packets received on the interface.

The number of received OSPF packets discarded because of an error in the packet or an error in processing the packet.

The number of received OSPF packets whose version field in the

OSPF header does not match the version of the OSPF process handling the packet.

The number of received packets discarded because the source IP address is not within a subnet configured on a local interface.

The number of received OSPF packets discarded where the ingress interface is in a non-backbone area and the OSPF header identifies the packet as belonging to the backbone, but OSPF does not have a virtual link to the packet's sender.

OSPF and OSPFv3

406


Table 150. OSPF Interface Statistics (continued)

Field

Area Mismatch

Invalid Destination Address

Wrong Authentication Type

Authentication Failure

No Neighbor at Source Address

Invalid OSPF Packet Type

Hellos Ignored

Hellos Sent

Hellos Received

DD Packets Sent

DD Packets Received

Description

The number of OSPF packets discarded because the area ID in the

OSPF header is not the area ID configured on the ingress interface.

The number of OSPF packets discarded because the packet's destination IP address is not the address of the ingress interface and is not the AllDrRouters or AllSpfRouters multicast addresses.

The number of packets discarded because the authentication type specified in the OSPF header does not match the authentication type configured on the ingress interface.

The number of OSPF packets dropped because the sender is not an existing neighbor or the sender's IP address does not match the previously recorded IP address for that neighbor.

The number of OSPF packets dropped because the sender is not an existing neighbor or the sender's IP address does not match the previously recorded IP address for that neighbor.

The number of OSPF packets discarded because the packet type field in the OSPF header is not a known type.

The number of received hello packets that were ignored by this router from the new neighbors after the limit was reached for the number of neighbors on an interface or on the system as a whole.

The number of hello packets sent on this interface by this router.

The number of hello packets received on this interface by this router.

The number of database description packets sent on this interface by this router.

The number of database description packets received on this interface by this router.

LS Requests Sent

LS Requests Received

LS Updates Sent

LS Updates Received

The number of LS requests sent on this interface by this router.

The number of LS requests received on this interface by this router.

The number of LS updates sent on this interface by this router.

The number of LS updates received on this interface by this router.

LS Acknowledgements Sent The number of LS acknowledgements sent on this interface by this router.

LS Acknowledgements Received The number of LS acknowledgements received on this interface by this router.

OSPF and OSPFv3

407


View the OSPF Neighbor Table

You can view the OSPF neighbor table list. When a particular neighbor ID is specified, detailed information about a neighbor is given. The information is displayed only if OSPF is enabled.

 To view the OSPF Neighbor Table:











7. Select Routing > OSPF > Advanced > Neighbor Table .


To clear all the neighbors in the table, click the Clear button.


Table 151. OSPF Neighbor Table

Field

Interface

Description

The interface for which data is to be displayed or configured. Slot 0 is the base unit.

OSPF and OSPFv3

408


Table 151. OSPF Neighbor Table (continued)

Field

Neighbor IP Address

Neighbor Interface Index

Router ID

Area ID

Options

Router Priority

State

(continued on the following page)

Description

The IP address of the neighboring router's interface to the attached network. It is used as the destination IP address when protocol packets are sent as unicasts along this adjacency. Also used in router LSAs as the lik ID for the attached network if the neighboring router is selected to be designated router. The neighbor IP address is learned when hello packets are received from the neighbor. For virtual links, the neighbor IP address is learned during the routing table build process.

A unit/slot/port identifying the neighbor interface index.

A 32-bit integer in dotted-decimal format representing the neighbor interface.

The area ID of the OSPF area associated with the interface.

An integer value that indicates the optional OSPF capabilities supported by the neighbor. The neighbor's optional OSPF capabilities are also listed in its hello packets. This enables received hello packets to be rejected (for example, neighbor relationships do not even start to form) if there is a mismatch in certain crucial OSPF capabilities.

The OSPF priority for the specified interface. The priority of an interface is a priority integer from 0 to 255. A value of 0 indicates that the router is not eligible to become the designated router on this network.

The state of a neighbor can be the following:

• Down . This is the initial state of a neighbor conversation. It indicates that no recent information was received from the neighbor. On NBMA networks, hello packets can still be sent to Down neighbors, although at a reduced frequency.

• Attempt . This state is valid only for neighbors attached to NBMA networks.

It indicates that no recent information was received from the neighbor, but that a more concerted effort must be made to contact the neighbor. This is done by sending the neighbor hello packets at hello intervals.

• Init . A hello packet was recently seen from the neighbor. However, bidirectional communication was not yet established with the neighbor (for example, the router did not appear in the neighbor's hello packet). All neighbors in this state (or greater) are listed in the hello packets sent from the associated interface.

• 2-Way

. Communication between the two routers is bidirectional. This was assured by the operation of the hello protocol. This is the most advanced state short of beginning adjacency establishment. The backup designated router is selected from the set of neighbors in state 2-way or greater.

• Exchange Start

. This is the first step in creating an adjacency between the two neighboring routers. The goal of this step is to decide which router is the master, and to decide upon the initial DD sequence number. Neighbor conversations in this state or greater are called adjacencies.

• Exchange

. The router is describing its entire link state database by sending database description packets to the neighbor. The link state request packets can also be sent asking for the neighbor's more recent LSAs. All adjacencies in the exchange state or greater are used by the flooding procedure. These adjacencies are fully capable of transmitting and receiving all types of OSPF routing protocol packets.

OSPF and OSPFv3

409


Table 151. OSPF Neighbor Table (continued)

Field

State (continued)

Events

Permanence

Hellos Suppressed

Retransmission Queue

Length

Up Time

Dead Time

Description

• Loading . Link state request packets are sent to the neighbor asking for the more recent LSAs that were discovered (but not yet received) in the exchange state.

• Full

. The neighboring routers are fully adjacent. These adjacencies now appear in router LSAs and network LSAs.


This variable displays the status of the entry.

Dynamic

and

Permanent

refer to how the neighbor became known.

This indicates whether hellos are being suppressed to the neighbor.

An integer representing the current length of the retransmission queue of the specified neighbor router ID of the specified interface.

Neighbor uptime; how long since the adjacency last reached the Full state.

The amount of time, in seconds, to wait before the router assumes the neighbor is unreachable.

View the OSPF Link State Database

 To view the OSPF link state database:











7. Select Routing > OSPF > Advanced > Link State Database .

OSPF and OSPFv3

410




Table 152. OSPF Link State Database

Field

Router ID

Area ID

Description

The 32-bit integer in dotted-decimal format that uniquely identifies the router within the autonomous system (AS). The router ID is set on the

IP Configuration screen. To change the router ID you must first disable

OSPF. After you set the new router ID, you must reenable OSPF for the change to take effect. The default value is 0.0.0.0, although this is not a valid router ID.

The ID of an OSPF area to which one of the router interfaces is connected. An area ID is a 32-bit integer in dotted-decimal format that uniquely identifies the area to which an interface is connected.

OSPF and OSPFv3

411


Table 152. OSPF Link State Database (continued)

Field

LSA Type

LS ID

Age

Sequence

Checksum

Options

Description

The format and function of the link state advertisement. LSA Type is one of the following:

• Illegal

•

Router Links

• Network Links

•

Network Summary

• ASBR Summary

•

AS-external

• Group Member

•

NSSA

• TMP2

•

Link Opaque

• Area Opaque

•

AS Opaque

• Unknown

The link state ID identifies the piece of the routing domain that is being described by the advertisement. The value of the LS ID depends on the advertisement's LS type.

The time since the link state advertisement was first originated, in seconds.

The sequence number field is a signed 32-bit integer. It is used to detect old and duplicate link state advertisements. The larger the sequence number, the more recent the advertisement.

The checksum is used to detect data corruption of an advertisement.

This corruption can occur while an advertisement is being flooded, or while it is being held in a router's memory. This field is the checksum of the complete contents of the advertisement, except the LS age field.

The Options field in the link state advertisement header indicates which optional capabilities are associated with the advertisement. The options are as follows:

• Q

. This enables support for QoS traffic engineering.

• E . This describes the way AS external LSAs are flooded.

• MC

. This describes the way IP multicast datagrams are forwarded according to the standard specifications.

• O

. This describes whether opaque LSAs are supported.

• V . This describes whether OSPF++ extensions for VPN/COS are supported.

OSPF and OSPFv3

412


External Link State Database Table

The following table describes the nonconfigurable data that is displayed in the External Link

State Database (LSDB) table.

Table 153. OSPF External Link State Database Table

Field

Router ID

LSA Type

LS ID

Age

Sequence

Checksum

Description



OSPF. After you set the new router ID, you must reenable OSPF for the change to take effect. The default value is 0.0.0.0, although this is not a valid router ID.


•

ASBR Summary

• AS-external

•

NSSA

• TMP2






AS Opaque Link State Database Table

The following table describes the nonconfigurable data that is displayed in the AS Opaque

Link State Database (LSDB) table.

Table 154. OSPF AS Opaque Link State Database Table

Field

Router ID

Description



OSPF. After you set the new router ID, you must reenable OSPFfor the change to take effect. The default value is 0.0.0.0, although this is not a valid router ID.

OSPF and OSPFv3

413


Table 154. OSPF AS Opaque Link State Database Table (continued)

Field

LSA Type

LS ID

Age

Sequence

Checksum

Description


• Area Opaque

•

AS Opaque

• Link Opaque






Configure the OSPF Virtual Link

 To configure the OSPF virtual link:











7. Select Routing > OSPF > Advanced > Virtual Link Configuration .

OSPF and OSPFv3

414


8. In the Area ID field, enter the OSPF area ID.


Virtual links can be configured between any pair of area border routers having interfaces to a common (non-backbone) area.

9. Configure the Neighbor Router ID by entering the neighbor portion of a virtual link specification.


10. In the Hello Interval field, enter the OSPF hello interval for the specified interface in seconds.

This parameter must be the same for all routers attached to a network. The valid values range from 1 to 65,535. The default is 10 seconds.

11. In the Dead Interval field, enter the OSPF dead interval for the specified interface in seconds.

This specifies how long a router waits to see a neighbor router's hello packets before declaring that the router is down. This parameter must be the same for all routers attached to a network. This value must be a multiple of the hello interval (for example, 4).

The valid values range from 1 to 65,535. The default is 40.

12. In the Iftransit Delay Interval field , enter the OSPF transit delay for the specified interface.


13. In the Retransmit Interval field, enter the OSPF retransmit interval for the specified interface.


OSPF and OSPFv3

415


14. From the Authentication Type menu, select one of the following authentication types:

• None . This is the initial interface state.

• Simple . If you select Simple, you are prompted to enter an authentication key. This key is included, in the clear, in the OSPF header of all packets sent on the network. All routers on the network must be configured with the same key.

• Encrypt . If you select Encrypt you are prompted to enter both an authentication key and an authentication ID. Encryption uses the MD5 Message-Digest algorithm. All routers on the network must be configured with the same key and ID.

15. In the Authentication Key field, enter the OSPF authentication key for the specified interface.

If you do not select authentication, you are not prompted to enter a key.

• If you select Simple authentication, you cannot use a key of more than 8 octets.

• If you select Encrypt , the key can be up to 16 octets long.

The key value is displayed only if you are logged on with read/write privileges; otherwise, it is displayed as asterisks.

16. In the Authentication ID field, enter the ID to be used for authentication.

You are prompted to enter an ID only when you select Encrypt as the authentication type. The ID is a number between 0 and 255, inclusive.


The new virtual link is added.

18. To remove the specified virtual link from the switch configuration, click the Delete button.




Table 155. OSPF Virtual Link Configuration

Field

Neighbor State continued on the next page)

Description

The OSPF interface state can be one of these values:

• Down

. This is the initial interface state. The lower-level protocols indicated that the interface is unusable. Interface parameters are set to their initial values. All interface timers are disabled, and there are no adjacencies associated with the interface.

• Waiting

. The router is trying to determine the identity of the backup designated router by monitoring received hello packets. The router is not allowed to elect a backup designated router or a designated router until it transitions out of Waiting state. This prevents unnecessary changes of backup designated router.

OSPF and OSPFv3

416


Table 155. OSPF Virtual Link Configuration (continued)

Field

Neighbor State (continued)

State

(continued on the next page)

Description

• Point-to-Point

. The interface is operational, and is connected either to the virtual link. On entering this state the router attempts to form an adjacency with the neighboring router. hello packets are sent to the neighbor every hello interval seconds.


. This router is the designated router on the attached network. Adjacencies are established to all other routers attached to the network. The router must also originate a network-LSA for the network node. The network- LSA contain links to all routers (including the designated router) attached to the network.

• Backup Designated Router

. This router is the backup designated router on the attached network. It is promoted to designated router if the present designated router fails. The router establishes adjacencies to all other routers attached to the network. The backup designated router performs slightly different functions during the flooding procedure, as compared to the designated router.

• Other Designated Router . The interface is connected to a broadcast or NBMA network on which other routers were selected to be the designated router and backup designated router either.

The router attempts to form adjacencies to both the designated router and the backup designated router.

The state of the interface. It takes one the following values:

• Down


• Waiting

. The router is trying to determine the identity of the backup designated router by monitoring received hello packets. The router is not allowed to elect a backup designated router or a designated router until it transitions out of waiting state. This prevents unnecessary changes of backup designated router.

• Point-to-Point . The interface is operational, and is connected either to the virtual link. On entering this state the router attempts to form an adjacency with the neighboring router. hello packets are sent to the neighbor every hello interval seconds.

• Designated Router . This router is the designated router on the attached network. Adjacencies are established to all other routers attached to the network. The router must also originate a network-LSA for the network node. The network- LSA contain links to all routers (including the designated router) attached to the network.

• Backup Designated Router . This router is the backup designated router on the attached network. It is promoted to designated router if the present designated router fails. The router establishes adjacencies to all other routers attached to the network. The backup designated router performs slightly different functions during the flooding procedure, as compared to the designated router.

OSPF and OSPFv3

417


Table 155. OSPF Virtual Link Configuration (continued)

Field

State (continued)

Metric

Description

• Other Designated Router . The interface is connected to a broadcast or NBMA network on which other routers were selected to be the designated router and backup designated router either.


The metric value used by the Virtual Link.

Configure the OSPF Route Redistribution

You can configure the OSPF Route Redistribution parameters. The allowable values for each field are displayed next to the field. If any invalid values are entered, an alert message is displayed with the list of all the valid values.

 Configure the OSPF route redistribution:











7. Select Routing > OSPF > Advanced > Route Redistribution .

OSPF and OSPFv3

418


8. From the Source menu, select from the list of available source routes that were not previously configured for redistribution by OSPF.

The valid values are as follows:

•

BGP

• Connected

•

OSPF

• RIP

•

Static

9.

In the

Redistribute list, select to

Enable

or

Disable

the redistribution for the selected source protocol.

10. Set the Metric value to be used as the metric of redistributed routes.

This fields displays the metric if the source was preconfigured and can be modified. The valid values are 0 to 16777214.

11. From the Metric Type list, select the OSPF metric type of redistributed routes.

12.

Set the

Tag

field in routes redistributed.

This field displays the tag if the source was preconfigured; otherwise, the tag is 0 and can be modified. The valid values are 0 to 4294967295.

13.

From the

Subnets

list, select whether the subnetted routes will be redistributed (Enable) or not (Disable).

14. In the Distribute List field, set the access list that filters the routes to be redistributed by the destination protocol.

Only permitted routes are redistributed. If this command refers to a nonexistent access list, all routes are permitted. The valid values for access list IDs are 1 to 199.

When used for route filtering, the only fields in an access list that get used are as follows:

• Source IP address and netmask

•

Destination IP address and netmask

• Action (permit or deny)

All other fields (source and destination port, precedence, ToS, and so on) are ignored.

The source IP address is compared to the destination IP address of the route. The source

IP netmask in the access list rule is treated as a wildcard mask, indicating which bits in the source IP address must match the destination address of the route.

Note: A 1 in the mask indicates a

do not care

in the corresponding address bit.

When an access list rule includes a destination IP address and netmask (an extended access list), the destination IP address is compared to the network mask of the destination of the route. The destination netmask in the access list serves as a wildcard mask, indicating which bits in the route's destination mask are significant for the filtering operation.

OSPF and OSPFv3

419




View the NSF OSPF Summary

You can view the NSF OSPF summary. The allowable values for each field are displayed next to the field. If any invalid values are entered, an alert message is displayed with the list of all the valid values.

 To configure the NSF OSPF summary:











7. Select Routing > OSPF > Advanced > NSF OSPF Summary .

8.

From the

Support Mode list, configure how the unit performs graceful restarts by selecting from the following possible values:

OSPF and OSPFv3

420


• Always . Indicates that OSPF performs a graceful restart for all planned and unplanned warm restart events.

• Disabled . Disables OSPF performing graceful restarts.

• Planned

. Indicates that OSPF performs a graceful restart only when a restart is planned (for example, due to an initiate failover command).

The default is Disabled.

9. Configure the Restart Interval . The valid values are 0 to 1800 in seconds.

The default is 120 seconds.

10.

Use the

Helper Support Mode

field to configure how the unit acts when a neighbor performs a warm restart.


• Always . Indicates that OSPF helps a restarting neighbor only during all planned and unplanned warm restart events.

• Disabled . Disables OSPF acting as a helpful neighbor.

• Planned

. Indicates that OSPF helps a restarting neighbor only during planned events.

The default is Always.

11. Configure Helper Strict LSA Checking by selecting Enable or Disable .

When enabled, the unit exits helper mode whenever the topology changes.

12.

Click the

Apply

button.



Update

button.


Table 156. NSF OSPF Summary

Field

Restart Status

Description

The restart status of OSPF Helper feature. The possible values are as follows:

•

Not Restarting

• Planned Restart

•

Unplanned Restart

OSPF and OSPFv3

421


Table 156. NSF OSPF Summary (continued)

Field

Restart Age (seconds)

Restart Exit Reason

Description

The amount of time since the last restart occurred.

Displays how the master unit on the chassis last started up. The possible values are as follows:

• Not Attempted . Graceful restart was not attempted.

• In Progress

. Restart is in progress.

• Completed . The previous graceful restart completed successfully.

• Timed Out

. The previous graceful restart timed out.

• T opology Changed . The previous graceful restart terminated prematurely because of a topology change.

OSPFv3

Only the following switches support OSPFv3:

• M6100

• M5300-28G3

• M5300-52G3

• M5300-28GF3

The following switches support OSPFv3 with an L3 license:

• M5300-28G

• M5300-52G

• M5300-28G-POE+

• M5300-52G-POE+

Configure Basic OSPFv3 Settings

 To configure the basic OSPFv3 settings:








OSPF and OSPFv3

422



6.

Click the

Login

button.


7. Select Routing > OSPFv3 > Basic > OSPFv3 Configuration .


If you select Enable , OSPFv3 is activated for the switch. By default, OSPFv3 is enabled.

You must configure a router ID before OSPFv3 can become operational. This can also be done by issuing the CLI command config router id in IPv6 router OSPF mode. For more information, see


on page 325.

Note: Once OSPFv3 is initialized on the router, it remains initialized until the router is reset.

9. Enter the Router ID as a 32-bit integer in dotted-decimal format that uniquely identifies the router within the autonomous system (AS).

To change the router ID, you must first disable OSPFv3. After you set the new router ID, you must reenable OSPFv3 for the change to take effect. The default value is 0.0.0.0, although this is not a valid router ID.



Configure OSPFv3 Default Route Advertise Settings








OSPF and OSPFv3

423





7. Select Routing > OSPFv3 > Advanced > OSPFv3 Configuration .

8. Select the Default Information Originate Enable radio button.

Selecting Enable makes it possible to specify the other settings in this screen. Selecting

Disable returns the other fields in this screen to their default values.

9. Select the Always True or False radio button.

When set to True, this field sets the router advertise. The default is False.

10. In the Metric field, specify the metric of the default route.

The valid values range from 0 to 16777214. The default is 0.

11. Select th e Metric Type External Type 1 or External Type 2 radio button.

This sets the OSPFv3 metric type of the default route. The default is External Type 2.



Configure the Advanced OSPFv3 Settings

 To configure the advanced OSPFv3 settings:








OSPF and OSPFv3

424



6.

Click the

Login

button.


7. Select Routing > OSPFv3 > Advanced > OSPFv3 Configuration .

8. Enter the Router ID in 32-bit integer, dotted-decimal format that uniquely identifies the router within the autonomous system (AS).

To change the router ID you must first disable OSPFv3. After you set the new router ID, you must reenable OSPFv3 for the change to take effect. The default value is 0.0.0.0, although this is not a valid router ID.

9. In the Admin Mode field, select Enable or Disable .

If you select Enable , OSPFv3 is activated for the switch. The default value is Enable. You must configure a router ID before OSPFv3 can become operational. You do this on the IP

Configuration screen, or by issuing the CLI command config router id in IPv6 router

OSPF mode. For more information, see


on page 325.

Note: Once OSPFv3 is initialized on the router, it remains initialized until the router is reset.

10. In the Exit Overflow Interval field, specify the number of seconds that, after entering overflow state, the router must wait before attempting to leave overflow state.

Because OSPFv3 cannot originate nondefault external LSAs while in overflow state, this allows the router to again originate nondefault AS-external-LSAs. If you enter an exit overflow interval of 0, the router does not leave the overflow state until it is restarted. The range is 0 to 2,147,483,647 seconds. The default is 0.

OSPF and OSPFv3

425


When the number of nondefault external LSAs exceeds a configured limit, the router enters an overflow state as defined in RFC 1765.

11. Enter the External LSDB Limit . This is the maximum number of AS-external-LSAs that can be stored in the database.

A value of –1 implies there is no limit on the number that can be saved. The valid range of values is –1 to 2147483647. The default is –1 (no limit).

12. Use the Default Metric field to set a default for the metric of redistributed routes.

This field displays the default metric if one was already set, or blank if one was not configured earlier. The valid values are 1 to 16777214. The default is 0 (unconfigured).

13. Use the Maximum Paths field to configure the maximum number of paths that OSPFv3 can report to a given destination.

The valid values are 1 to 4.

14. Configure the AutoCost Reference Bandwidth to control how OSPF calculates default metrics for the interface.

The valid values are 1 to 4294967. The default is 100.

15. In the Default Passive Setting , select the Enable or Disable option to configure the global passive mode setting for all OSPF interfaces.

Configuring this field overwrites any present interface-level passive mode setting. OSPF does not form adjacencies on passive interfaces, but does advertise attached networks as stub networks.

16. Use Helper Support Mode to configure how the unit acts when a neighbor performs a warm restart.


• Planned . OSPF helps a restarting neighbor only during planned events.

• Always . OSPF helps a restarting neighbor during all planned and unplanned warm restart events.

• Disabled . OSPF does not act as a helpful neighbor.

17. Configure Helper Strict LSA Checking by selecting the Enable or Disable option.

When enabled, the unit exits helper mode whenever the topology changes.



OSPF and OSPFv3

426



Table 157. Advanced OSPFv3 Configuration

Field

ASBR Mode

ABR Status

External LSA Count

External LSA Checksum

New LSAs Originated

LSAs Received

Description

Reflects whether the ASBR mode is enabled or disabled. Enable implies that the router is an autonomous system border router. Router automatically becomes an ASBR when it is configured to redistribute routes learned from other protocol.

The values of this are Enabled or Disabled. Enabled implies that the router is an area border router. Disabled implies that it is not an area border router.

The number of external (LS type 5) link state advertisements (LSAs) in the link state database.

The sum of the LS checksums of the external LSAs contained in the link state database. This sum can be used to determine if there was a change in a router's link state database, and to compare the link state databases of two routers.

In any given OSPFv3 area, a router originates several LSAs. Each router originates a router-LSA. If the router is also the designated router for any of the area's networks, it originates network-LSAs for those networks.

This value represents the number of LSAs originated by this router.

The number of LSAs received that were determined to be new instantiations. This number does not include newer instantiations of self-originated LSAs.

Configure the OSPFv3 Common Area

 To configure the OSPFv3 common area settings:

1.



3.





5.



6.

Click the

Login

button.


OSPF and OSPFv3

427


7. Select Routing > OSPFv3 > Advanced > Common Area Configuration .




The area is configured as a common area.

10. To delete the common area designation, click the Delete button.



Table 158. Advanced OSPFv3 Common Area Configuration

Field

External Routing

SPF Runs


Area LSA Count

Area LSA Checksum

Import Summary LSAs

Description

A definition of the router's capabilities for the area, including whether or not AS-external-LSAs are flooded into or throughout the area.

The number of times that the intra-area route table was calculated using this area's link state database. This is done using Dijkstra's algorithm.




The summary LSAs are enabled or disabled imported into this area.

Configure an OSPFv3 Stub Area

 To configure the OSPFv3 stub area:



OSPF and OSPFv3

428



4.









7.

Select

Routing > OSPFv3 > Advanced > Stub Area Configuration

.



9. In the Import Summary LSAs list, select the Enable or Disable option.

If you select Enable , summary LSAs are imported into areas. The default is Enable.

10. In the Default Cost field, enter the metric value to be applied for the default route advertised into the stub area.

The valid values range from 1 to 16,777,215. This value is applicable only to stub areas.


The area is configured as a stub area.

12. To delete the stub area designation, click the Delete button.




OSPF and OSPFv3

429



Table 159. Advanced OSPFv3 Stub Area Configuration

Field

SPF Runs


Area LSA Count

Area LSA Checksum

Type of Service

Description

The number of times that the intra-area route table was calculated using this area's link state database. This is done using Dijkstra's algorithm.

The total number of area border routers reachable within this area. This is initially zero, and is calculated in each SPF Pass.

The total number of link state advertisements in this area's link state database, excluding AS External LSAs.


This field is the normal ToS associated with the stub metric.

Configure the OSPFv3 NSSA Area

 To configure the OSPFv3 NSSA area:











7. Select Routing > OSPFv3 > Advanced > NSSA Area Configuration .

OSPF and OSPFv3

430





If you select Enable , summary LSAs are imported into stub areas.

10. Configure the Default Information Originate .

This option permits you to advertise a default route into the NSSA when import summary

LSAs are disabled. This can also be applied by the CLI command area (area-id) NSSA default-info-originate in the IP router OSPF config mode.

a.

In the Admin Mode list, select to Enable or Disable the default information originate. b. In the Metric Value field, set the default metric value for default information originate. The value range of values is 1 to 16777214.

c. In the Metric Type field, select the type of metric specified in the Metric Value field.

Options are as follows:

• Comparable Cost. External type 1 metrics that are comparable to the OSPF metric.

• Non-comparable Cost . External type 2 metrics that are assumed to be larger than the cost of the OSPF metric.

11. Select the Translator Role of the NSSA.

Options are as follows: a. Always . Cause the router to assume the role of the translator the instant it becomes a border router.

b. Candidate . Cause the router to participate in the translator election process when it attains border router status.

12. In the Translator Stability Interval field, configure the translator of the NSSA.

OSPF and OSPFv3

431


The value is the period of time that an elected translator continues to perform its duties after it determines that its translator status was deposed by another router. The valid range is 0 to 3600.

13. In the Redistribute Mode field, select to Enable or Disable .

This configures the NSSA ABR so that learned external routes are redistributed to the

NSSA.


The area is configured as an NSSA area.

15. To delete the NSSA area designation, click the Delete button.





Table 160. Advanced OSPFv3 NSSA Area Configuration

Field

SPF Runs


Area LSA Count

Area LSA Checksum

Translator State

Description






The field tells you if and how the NSSA border router translates Type 7 into Type 5. Possible values are as follows:

• Enabled

. The NSSA border router's translator role was set to always.

• Elected

. The candidate NSSA border router is translating Type 7

LSAs into Type 5.

• Disabled

. The candidate NSSA border router is NOT translating

Type 7 LSAs into Type 5.

OSPF and OSPFv3

432


Configure the OSPFv3 Area Range

 To configure the OSPFv3 area range:


2.



4.









7.

Select

Routing > OSPFv3 > Advanced > Area Range Configuration

.

8.

Enter the OSPFv3

Area ID.


9.

Enter the

IPv6 Prefix for the address range for the selected area.

10. From the list in the LSDB Type field, select the type of link advertisement associated with the specified area and address range.

Options are:

Network Summary

or

NSSA External

. The default type is

Network

Summary .

11. In the Advertise field, select the Enable or Disable option.

If you select Enable, the address range is advertised outside the area through a network summary LSA. The default is Enable.


The new address range is added to the switch.

13.

To remove the specified address range from the area configuration, click the

Delete

button.

OSPF and OSPFv3

433


Configure the OSPFv3 Interface

 To configure the OSPFv3 interface:











7. Select Routing > OSPFv3 > Advanced > Interface Configuration .



9. Select the check box next to the Interface for which data is to be displayed or configured.

10. In the Area ID field, enter the 32-bit integer in dotted-decimal format that uniquely identifies the OSPFv3 area to which the selected router interface connects.

OSPF and OSPFv3

434


If you assign an area ID that does not exist, the area is created with default values.

11. Configure the Admin Mode by selecting the Enable or Disable option from the list.

The default value is Disable. You can configure OSPFv3 parameters without enabling

OSPFv3 admin mode, but the settings do not take effect until you enable admin mode.

The following information is displayed only if admin mode is enabled:

•

State

• Designated router

•

Backup designated router

• Number of link events

•

LSA Ack interval

• Metric cost

For OSPFv3 to be fully functional, you must enter a valid IPv6 prefix/prefix length. This can be done using the CLI

IPv6 address command.

Note:

Once OSPFv3 is initialized on the router, it remains initialized until the router is reset.

12. Configure the Router Priority by entering the OSPFv3 priority for the selected interface.

The priority of an interface is specified as an integer from 0 to 255. The default is

1

, which is the highest router priority. A value of 0 indicates that the router is not eligible to become the designated router on this network.

13.

Configure the

Retransmit Interval

by entering the OSPFv3 retransmit interval for the specified interface.


14.

Configure the

Hello Interval by entering the OSPFv3 hello interval for the specified interface in seconds.

This parameter must be the same for all routers attached to a network. Value values range from 1 to 65,535. The default is 10 seconds.

15.

Enter the OSPFv3

Dead Interval

for the specified interface in seconds.

This specifies how long a router waits to see a neighbor router’s hello packets before declaring that the router is down. This parameter must be the same for all routers attached to a network. This value is a multiple of the hello interval (for example, 4). The valid values range from 1 to 65,535. The default is 40 seconds.

16.

In the

Iftransit Delay Interval

field, enter the OSPFv3 transit delay for the specified interface.

OSPF and OSPFv3

435



17. Configure MTU Ignore by selecting Enable or Disable from the list.

MTU Ignore disables OSPF MTU mismatch detection on receiving database description packets. The default value is Disable (MTU mismatch detection is enabled).

18. Configure Passive Mode by selecting Enable or Disable from the list.

Make an interface passive to prevent OSPF from forming an adjacency on an interface.

OSPF advertises networks attached to passive interfaces as stub networks. Interfaces are not passive by default, meaning that the passive mode default is Disable.

19. Set the OSPFv3 Network Type on the interface by selecting either Broadcast or

Point-to-Point Mode from the list.

OSPFv3 selects a designated router and originates network LSAs only for broadcast networks. No more than two OSPFv3 routers can be present on a point-to-point link. The default network type for Ethernet interfaces is Broadcast.

20. In the Metric Cost field, enter the value for the cost Type of Service (TOS).

OSPF uses this value in computing shortest paths. The range is from 1 to 65,535. The default is 1 . Metric Cost is configurable only if OSPFv3 is initialized on the interface.




Table 161. Advanced OSPFv3 Interface Configuration

Field

IPv6 Address

LSA Ack Interval (secs)

State


Description

The IPv6 address of the interface.

The number of seconds between LSA acknowledgment packet transmissions, which must be less than the retransmit interval.

The current state of the selected router interface. State is one of the following:

• Down . This is the initial interface state. The lower-level protocols indicate that the interface is unusable. Interface parameters are set to their initial values. All interface timers are disabled, and there are no adjacencies associated with the interface.

OSPF and OSPFv3

436


Table 161. Advanced OSPFv3 Interface Configuration (continued)

Field

State (continued.)

Designated Router

Backup Designated Router

Number of Link Events

Description

• Loopback

. The router's interface to the network is looped back in either the hardware or software. The interface is unavailable for regular data traffic. However, you might want to gain information about the quality of this interface, either through sending ICMP pings to the interface or through something like a bit error test. For this reason, IP packets can still be addressed to an interface in loopback state. To facilitate this, such interfaces are advertised in router LSAs as single host routes, whose destination is the IP interface address.

• Waiting

. The router is trying to determine the identity of the backup designated router for the network by monitoring received hello packets.

The router is not allowed to elect a backup designated router or a designated router until it transitions out of waiting state. This prevents unnecessary changes of backup designated router.

• Designated Router . This router is the designated router on the attached network. Adjacencies are established to all other routers attached to the network. The router must also originate a network-LSA for the network node. The network-LSA contains links to all routers

(including the designated router) attached to the network.

• Backup Designated Router

. This router is the backup designated router on the attached network. It is promoted to designated router if the present designated router fails. The router establishes adjacencies to all other routers attached to the network. The backup designated router performs slightly different functions during the LSA flooding procedure, as compared to the designated router.

• Other Designated Router

. The interface is connected to a broadcast or NBMA network on which other routers were selected to be either the designated router or backup designated router. The router attempts to form adjacencies to both the designated router and the backup designated router.

Note:

The state is displayed only if the OSPFv3 Admin mode is enabled.

The identity of the designated router for this network, in the view of the advertising router. The designated router is identified here by its router ID.

The value 0.0.0.0 means that there is no designated router.

Note:

This field displays only if the OSPFv3 admin mode is enabled.

The identity of the backup designated router for this network, in the view of the advertising router. The backup designated router is identified here by its router ID. Set to 0.0.0.0 if there is no backup designated router.

Note:


This is the number of times the specified OSPF interface changed its state.

Note:


View OSPFv3 Interface Statistics

You can view statistics for the selected interface. The information is displayed only if OSPFv3 is enabled.

OSPF and OSPFv3

437


 To view the OSPFv3 interface statistics:











7. Select Routing > OSPFv3 > Advanced > Interface Statistics .

OSPF and OSPFv3

438


8. In the OSPFv3 Interface Selection area of the screen, in the Interface list, select the interface.

To clear all the statistics of the OSPFv3 interface, click the

Clear

button.


Update

button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable OSPF Interface Statistics data that is displayed.

Table 162. Advanced OSPFv3 Interface Statistics

Field

OSPFv3 Area ID


AS Border Router Count

Area LSA Count

IPv6 Address

Interface Events

Virtual Events

Neighbor Events

Sent Packets

Received Packets

Discards

Bad Version

Virtual Link Not Found

Area Mismatch

Description

The OSPFv3 area to which the selected router interface belongs. An

OSPFv3 area ID is a 32-bit integer in dotted-decimal format that uniquely identifies the area to which the interface connects.


The total number of autonomous system border routers reachable within this area. This is initially zero, and is calculated in each SPF pass.

The total number of link state advertisements in this area's link state database, excluding AS External LSAs.

The IPv6 address of the interface.

The number of times the specified OSPFv3 interface changed its state, or an error occurred.

The number of state changes or errors that occurred on this virtual link.


The number of OSPFv3 packets transmitted on the interface.

The number of valid OSPFv3 packets received on the interface.

The number of received OSPFv3 packets discarded because of an error in the packet or an error in processing the packet.

The number of received OSPFv3 packets whose version field in the

OSPFv3 header does not match the version of the OSPFv3 process handling the packet.

The number of received OSPFv3 packets discarded where the ingress interface is in a non-backbone area and the OSPFv3 header identifies the packet as belonging to the backbone, but OSPFv3 does not have a virtual link to the packet's sender.

The number of OSPFv3 packets discarded because the area ID in the

OSPFv3 header is not the area ID configured on the ingress interface.

OSPF and OSPFv3

439


Table 162. Advanced OSPFv3 Interface Statistics (continued)


Invalid Destination Address

No Neighbor at Source Address

Invalid OSPF Packet Type

Hellos Ignored

Hellos Sent

Hellos Received

DD Packets Sent

DD Packets Received

The number of OSPFv3 packets discarded because the packet's destination IP address is not the address of the ingress interface and is not the AllDrRouters or AllSpfRouters multicast address.

The number of OSPFv3 packets dropped because the sender is not an existing neighbor or the sender's IP address does not match the previously recorded IP address for that neighbor.

The number of OSPFv3 packets discarded because the packet type field in the OSPFv3 header is not a known type.

The number of received hello packets that were ignored by this router from the new neighbors after the limit was reached for the number of neighbors on an interface or on the system as a whole.

The number of hello packets sent on this interface by this router.

The number of hello packets received on this interface by this router.

The number of database description packets sent on this interface by this router.

The number of database description packets received on this interface by this router.

LS Requests Sent

LS Requests Received

LS Updates Sent

LS Updates Received

The number of LS requests sent on this interface by this router.

The number of LS requests received on this interface by this router.

The number of LS updates sent on this interface by this router.

The number of LS updates received on this interface by this router.

LS Acknowledgements Sent The number of LS acknowledgements sent on this interface by this router.

LS Acknowledgements Received The number of LS acknowledgements received on this interface by this router.

View the OSPFv3 Neighbor Table

This screen displays the OSPFv3 neighbor table list. This information is displayed only if

OSPFv3 is enabled, and there exists at least one OSPFv3-enabled interface having a valid neighbor.

 To view the OSPFv3 Neighbor Table:




OSPF and OSPFv3

440





5.



6.

Click the

Login

button.


7. Select Routing > OSPFv3 > Advanced > Neighbor Table .


To clear all the neighbors in the table, click the Clear button.


Table 163. Advanced OSPFv3 Neighbor Table

Field

Interface

Interface Identifier

Router ID

Area ID

Options

Router Priority

State

Dead Time

Description

The interface for which data is to be displayed or configured. Slot 0 is the base unit.

The interface ID that the neighbor advertises in its hello packets on this link.

A 32-bit integer in dotted-decimal format representing the router ID of the neighbor on the selected interface.

A 32-bit integer in dotted-decimal format representing the area common to the neighbor selected.

A bit mask corresponding to the neighbor's options field.

The priority of this neighbor in the designated router election algorithm.

A value of 0 signifies that the neighbor is not eligible to become the designated router on this particular network.

The state of the relationship with this neighbor.

The amount of time, in seconds, since the last hello was received from adjacent neighbors. Set to 0 for neighbors in a state less than or equal to Init.

OSPF and OSPFv3

441


Table 163. Advanced OSPFv3 Neighbor Table (continued)

Field

Events

Retransmission Queue Length

Description


An integer representing the current length of the selected neighbor's retransmit queue.

View the OSPFv3 Link State Database

 To view the OSPF link state database:











7. Select Routing > OSPFv3 > Advanced > Link State Database .


OSPF and OSPFv3

442



Table 164. Advanced OSPFv3 Link State Database

Field

Router ID

Area ID

LSA Type

LS ID

Age

Sequence

Checksum

Description


OSPFv3 Configuration screen. To change the router ID you must first disable OSPFv3. After you set the new router ID, you must reenable

OSPFv3 for the change to take effect. The default value is 0.0.0.0, although this is not a valid router ID.

The ID of an OSPFv3 area to which one of the router interfaces is connected. An area ID is a 32-bit integer in dotted-decimal format that uniquely identifies the area to which an interface is connected.


• Router LSA

. A router can originate one or more router LSAs for a given area. Each router LSA originated in an area describes the collected states of all the router's interfaces to the area.

• Network LSA . A network LSA is originated for every link having two or more attached routers, by the designated router. It lists all the routers attached to the link.

• Inter-Area Router LSA

. This type describes a prefix external to the area, yet internal to the autonomous system. It is originated by an area border router.

• AS-External LSA . This LSA type describes a path to a prefix external to the autonomous system and is originated by an autonomous system border router.

• Link LSA

. A router originates a separate Link LSA for each attached link. It provides router's link local address to routers attached to the link and also inform them of a list of IPv6 prefixes to associate with the link.

• Intra-Area-Prefix LSA

. A link's designated router originates one or more intra-area prefix lsas to advertise the link's prefixes throughout the area. A router can originate multiple intra-area-prefix lsas for a given area to advertise its own prefixes and those of its attached stub links.






OSPF and OSPFv3

443


Table 164. Advanced OSPFv3 Link State Database (continued)

Field

Options

Description

The Options field in the link state advertisement header indicates which optional capabilities are associated with the advertisement. The options are as follows:

• Q

. This enables support for QoS traffic engineering.

• E . This describes the way AS-external LSAs are flooded.

• MC

. This describes the way IP multicast datagrams are forwarded according to the standard specifications.

• O

. This describes whether opaque LSAs are supported.

• V . This describes whether OSPF++ extensions for VPN/COS are supported.

The router-specific options.

Router Options

The following table describes the nonconfigurable data that is displayed in the External Link

State Database (LSDB) table.

Table 165. Advanced OSPFv3 External Link State Database Table

Field

Router ID

LSA Type

Description


OSPFv3 Configuration screen. To change the router ID you must first disable OSPFv3. After you set the new router ID, you must reenable

OSPFv3 for the change to take effect. The default value is 0.0.0.0, although this is not a valid router ID.


• Router LSA . A router can originate one or more router LSAs for a given area. Each router LSA originated in an area describes the collected states of all the router's interfaces to the area.

• Network LSA

. A network LSA is originated for every link having two or more attached routers, by the designated router. It lists all the routers attached to the link.

• Inter-Area Router LSA . This type describes a prefix external to the area, yet internal to the autonomous system. It is originated by an area border router.

• AS-External LSA

. This LSA type describes a path to a prefix external to the autonomous system and is originated by an autonomous system border router.

• Link LSA . A router originates a separate link LSA for each attached link. It provides router's link local address to routers attached to the link and also inform them of a list of IPv6 prefixes to associate with the link.

• Intra-Area-Prefix LSA . A link's designated router originates one or more intraarea-prefix LSAs to advertise the link's prefixes throughout the area. A router can originate multiple intra-area-prefix LSAs for a given area to advertise its own prefixes and those of its attached stub links.

OSPF and OSPFv3

444


Table 165. Advanced OSPFv3 External Link State Database Table (continued)

Field

LS ID

Age

Sequence

Checksum

Description






Configure the OSPFv3 Virtual Link

 To configure the OSPFv3 virtual link:


2.



4.









7.

Select

Routing > OSPFv3 > Advanced > Virtual Link Configuration

.

8. Enter the Area ID of the OSPF area.

OSPF and OSPFv3

445


An area ID is a 32-bit integer in dotted-decimal format that uniquely identifies the area to which a router interface connects. Virtual links can be configured between any pair of area border routers with interfaces to a common (non-backbone) area.

9. Configure the Neighbor Router ID by entering the neighbor portion of a virtual link specification.


10. In the Hello Interval field, enter the OSPFv3 hello interval for the specified interface in seconds.

This parameter must be the same for all routers attached to a network. The valid values range from 1 to 65,535. The default is 10 seconds.

11. In the Dead Interval field, enter the OSPFv3 dead interval for the specified interface in seconds.

This specifies how long a router waits to see a neighbor router's hello packets before declaring that the router is down. This parameter must be the same for all routers attached to a network. This value is a multiple of the hello interval (for example, 4). The valid values range from 1 to 65,535. The default is 40.

12. In the Iftransit Delay Interval field, enter the OSPFv3 transit delay for the specified interface.


13. In the Retransmit Interval field, enter the OSPFv3 retransmit interval for the specified interface.



The new virtual link is added to the switch.

15. To remove the specified virtual link from the switch configuration, click the Delete button.



OSPF and OSPFv3

446



Table 166. Advanced OSPFv3 Virtual Link Configuration

Field

Neighbor State

State


Description

The state of the virtual neighbor relationship. The OSPFv3 interface state can be any of these values:

• Down . This is the initial interface state.The lower-level protocols indicated that the interface is unusable. Interface parameters are set to their initial values. All interface timers are disabled, and there are no adjacencies associated with the interface.

• Waiting . The router is trying to determine the identity of the

(backup) designated router by monitoring received hello packets.

The router is not allowed to elect a backup designated router or a designated router until it transitions out of the waiting state. This prevents unnecessary changes of the (backup) designated router.

• Point-to-Point

. The interface is operational, and is connected to the virtual link. On entering this state the router attempts to form an adjacency with the neighboring router. The interface sends hello packets to the neighbor at every hello interval seconds.


. This router is the designated router on the attached network. adjacencies are established to all other routers attached to the network. The router must also originate a network

LSA for the network node. The network- LSA contains links to all routers (including the designated router) attached to the network.

• Backup Designated Router . This router is the backup designated router on the attached network. It is promoted to designated router if the present designated router fails. The router establishes adjacencies to all other routers attached to the network. The backup designated router performs slightly different functions during the flooding procedure, compared to the designated router.

• Other Designated Router . The interface is connected to a broadcast or NBMA network on which other routers were selected to be the designated router and backup designated router. The router attempts to form adjacencies to both the designated router and the backup designated router.

The state of the interface. It takes one the following values:

• Down


• Waiting

. The router is trying to determine the identity of the backup designated router by monitoring received hello packets. The router is not allowed to elect a backup designated router or a designated router until it transitions out of waiting state. This prevents unnecessary changes of backup designated router.

• Point-to-Point . The interface is operational, and is connected either to the virtual link. On entering this state the router attempts to form an adjacency with the neighboring router. hello packets are sent to the neighbor every hello interval seconds.

OSPF and OSPFv3

447


Table 166. Advanced OSPFv3 Virtual Link Configuration (continued)

Field

State (continued)

Metric

Description

• Designated Router.

This router is the designated router on the attached network. Adjacencies are established to all other routers attached to the network. The router must also originate a network-LSA for the network node. The network- LSA contains links to all routers (including the designated router) attached to the network.

• Backup Designated Router . This router is the backup designated router on the attached network. It is promoted to designated router if the present designated router fails. The router establishes adjacencies to all other routers attached to the network. The backup designated router performs slightly different functions during the flooding procedure, as compared to the designated router.

• Other Designated Router

. The interface is connected to a broadcast or NBMA network on which other routers were selected to be the designated router and backup designated router either.


The metric value used by the virtual link.

Configure OSPFv3 Route Redistribution

You can configure the OSPFv3 Route Redistribution parameters. The allowable values for each field are displayed next to the field. If any invalid values are entered, an alert message is displayed with the list of all the valid values.

 To configure the OSPFv3 route redistribution:











7. Select Routing > OSPFv3 > Advanced > Route Redistribution .

OSPF and OSPFv3

448


8. From the Source menu, select from the list of available source routes that were not previously configured for redistribution by OSPFv3. The valid values are as follows:

• Connected

• Static

9. In the Redistribute Option list, select to Enable or Disable the redistribution for the selected source protocol.

10. Set the Metric value to be used as the metric of redistributed routes.

This fields displays the metric if the source was preconfigured; otherwise, the tag is 0 and can be modified. The valid values are 0 to 16777214.

11. From the Metric Type list, select the OSPFv3 metric type of redistributed routes.

12. Set the Tag field in routes redistributed.

This field displays the tag if the source was preconfigured; otherwise, the tag is 0 and can be modified. The valid values are 0 to 4294967295.




View the NSF OSPFv3 Summary

You can view the NSF OSPFv3 summary. The allowable values for each field are displayed next to the field. If any invalid values are entered, an alert message is displayed with the list of all the valid values.

 To view the NSF OSPF summary:






OSPF and OSPFv3

449







7. Select Routing > OSPFv3 > Advanced > NSF OSPFv3 Summary .

8. From the Support mode list, select one of the following alues:

• Always . OSPF performs a graceful restart for all planned and unplanned warm restart events.

• Disabled . Prevents OSPF from performing graceful restarts.

• Planned . OSPF performs a graceful restart only when a restart is planned (for example, due to an initiate failover command).

The default is Disabled. This setting configure how the unit performs graceful restarts.

9. Configure the Restart Interval .

The valid values are 0 to 1800 in seconds. The default is 120 seconds.




OSPF and OSPFv3

450



Table 167. Advanced NSF OSPFv3 Summary

Field

Restart Status

Restart Age (seconds)

Restart Exit Reason

Description

The restart status of OSPF helper feature. The possible values are as follows:

• Not Restarting

•

Planned Restart

• Unplanned Restart

The amount of time since the last restart occurred.

Displays how the master unit on the chassis last started up. The possible values are as follows:

• Not Attempted . Graceful restart was not been attempted.

• In Progress

. Restart is in progress.

• Completed . The previous graceful restart completed successfully.

• Timed Out

. The previous graceful restart timed out.

• Topology Changed . The previous graceful restart terminated prematurely because of a topology change.

OSPF and OSPFv3

451

7.

Multicast Routing


•

Multicast Overview

•

Configure Multicast IGMP Settings

•

Configure PIM Settings

•

Configure Multicast Static Routes

•

Configure the Multicast Admin Boundary

•

Configure IPv6 Multicast Settings

7

452


Multicast Overview

Only the following switches support multicast:

• M6100

•

M5300-28G3

• M5300-52G3

•

M5300-28GF3

The following switches support multicast with an L3 license:

•

M5300-28G

• M5300-52G

•

M5300-28G-POE+

• M5300-52G-POE+

The NETGEAR ProSafe Managed Multicast component is best suited for video and audio traffic requiring multicast packet control for optimal operation. The Multicast component includes support for IGMPv2 and IGMPv3. Communication from point to multipoint is called multicasting. The source host (point) transmits a message to a group of zero or more hosts

(multipoint) that are identified by a single IP destination address. Although the task can be accomplished by sending unicast (point-to-point) messages to each of the destination hosts, multicasting is the more desirable method for this type of transmission. A multicast message is delivered to all members of its destination host group with the same best-efforts reliability as regular unicast IP messages. The message is not guaranteed to arrive intact at all members of the destination group or in the same order relative to other messages.

View the Multicast Mroute Table

 To view the Mroute Table:


2.



4.









453



7. Select Routing > Multicast > Mroute Table .



Table 168. Multicast Mroute Table

Field

Group IP

Source IP

Incoming Interface

Outgoing Interfaces

Up Time (hh:mm:ss)

Expiry Time (hh:mm:ss)

RPF Neighbor

Protocol

Flags

Description

The destination group IP address.

The IP address of the multicast packet source to be combined with the group IP to fully identify a single route whose Mroute table entry.

The incoming interface on which multicast packets for this source/group arrive.

The list of outgoing interfaces on which multicast packets for this source/group are forwarded.

The time in seconds since the entry was created.

The time in seconds before this entry ages out and is removed from the table.

The IP address of the reverse path forwarding (RPF) neighbor.

The multicast routing protocol which created this entry. The possible values are as follows:

• PIM-DM

•

PIM-SM

• DVMRP

The value displayed in this field is valid if the multicast routing protocol running is PIM-SM. The possible values are

RPT

or

SPT

. For other protocols a “------” is displayed.

Configure Global Multicast Settings

 To configure global multicast settings:





454





5.



6.

Click the

Login

button.


7. Select Routing > Multicast > Global Configuration .

8. In the Admin Mode field, select the Enable or Disable option to set the administrative status of multicast forwarding in the router.

The default is Disable .





Table 169. Multicast Global Configuration

Field

Protocol State

Table Maximum Entry Count

Protocol

Table Entry Count

Description

The operational state of the multicast forwarding module.

The maximum number of entries in the IP multicast routing table.

The multicast routing protocol presently activated on the router, if any.

The number of multicast route entries currently present in the multicast route table.


455


Configure the Multicast Interface

 To configure the multicast interface:











7. Select Routing > Multicast > Interface Configuration .



9. Select the check box next to the routing interface.

10. Enter the TTL Threshold below which a multicast data packet is not forwarded from the selected interface.

Enter a number between 0 and 255. The default is 1. If you enter 0 , all multicast packets for the selected interface are forwarded. You must configure at least one router interface before you see this field.




456


Configure Global Multicast DVMRP Settings

 To configure global multicast DVMRP settings:


2.



4.









7.

Select

Routing



> Multicast > DVMRP > Global Configuration

.


This sets the administrative status of DVMRP to active or inactive. The default is Disable.




Table 170. DVMRP Global Configuration

Field

Version

Total Number of Routes

Reachable Routes

Description

The current value of the DVMRP version string.

The number of routes in the DVMRP routing table.

The number of routes in the DVMRP routing table that use a non-infinite metric.


457


Configure the DVMRP Interface

 To configure the multicast DVMRP interface:














> Multicast > DVMRP > Interface Configuration .



9. Select the check box next to the Interface for which data is to be displayed or configured.

10. In the Interface Mode field, select the Enable or Disable option to set the administrative mode of the selected DVMRP routing interface.


11. In the Interface Metric field, enter the DVMRP metric for the selected interface.

This value is sent in DVMRP messages as the cost to reach this network. Valid values are

1 to 31. The default value is 1.



458




Update

button.


Table 171. DVMRP Interface Configuration

Field

Protocol State

Local Address

Generation ID

Received Bad Packets

Received Bad Routes

Sent Routes

Description

The operational state of the DVMRP protocol on the selected interface, either Operational or Non-Operational.

The IP address used as a source address in packets sent from the selected interface.

The DVMRP generation ID used by the router for the selected interface. This value is reset every time an interface is started and is placed in prune messages. A change in generation ID informs the neighbor routers to discard any previous information about this router.

The number of invalid packets received on the selected interface.

The number of invalid routes received on the selected interface.

The number of routes sent on the selected interface.

View the DVMRP Neighbor

 To view the multicast DVMRP neighbor :

1.



3.





5.



6.

Click the

Login

button.



459





> Multicast > DVMRP > DVMRP Neighbor .

8. Use the Search menu to search for neighbor entries by MAC Interface or Neighbor IP .

• Select Search > Interface from the list , enter the interface in unit/slot/port format, for example 1/0/13, then click the Go button. If the neighbor entry exists, the entry is displayed as the first entry, followed by the remaining entries.

• Select Search > Neighbor IP from the list, enter the neighbor IP, then click the Go button. If the entry with the matching neighbor IP exists, that entry is displayed as the first entry, followed by the remaining entries. An exact match is required.



Table 172. DVMRP Neighbor

Field

Interface

Neighbor IP

State

Up Time

Expiry Time

Generation ID

Major Version

Minor Version

Capabilities

Received Routes

Description

Select the interface for which data is to be displayed, or all the interfaces are displayed.

The IP address of the neighbor whose information is displayed

The state of the specified neighbor router on the selected interface, either active or down.

The DVMRP uptime for the specified neighbor on the selected interface. This is the time since the neighbor entry was learned.

The DVMRP expiry time for the specified neighbor on the selected interface. This is the time left before this neighbor entry ages out, and is not applicable if the neighbor router's state is down.

The DVMRP generation ID for the specified neighbor on the selected interface.

The DVMRP major version for the specified neighbor on the selected interface.

The DVMRP minor version for the specified neighbor on the selected interface.

The DVMRP capabilities of the specified neighbor on the selected interface.

The number of routes received for the specified neighbor on the selected interface.


460


Table 172. DVMRP Neighbor (continued)

Field

Received Bad Packets

Received Bad Routes

Description

The number of invalid packets received for the specified neighbor on the selected interface.

The number of invalid routes received for the specified neighbor on the selected interface.

View the DVMRP Next Hop Settings

 To view the multicast DVMRP Next Hop settings:


2.



4.









7.

Select

Routing



> Multicast > DVMRP > DVMRP Next Hop

.



Table 173. DVMRP Next Hop

Field

Source IP

Source Mask

Description

The IP address used with the source mask to identify the source network for this table entry.

The network mask used with the source IP address.


461


Table 173. DVMRP Next Hop (continued)

Field

Next Hop Interface

Type

Description

The outgoing interface for this next hop.

The next hop type. Leaf means that no downstream dependent neighbors exist on the outgoing interface. Otherwise, the type is branch .

View the Multicast DVMRP Prune

 To view the multicast DVMRP prune:














> Multicast > DVMRP > DVMRP Prune .



462



Table 174. DVMRP Prune

Field

Group IP

Source IP

Source Mask

Expiry Time

Description

The group address that was pruned.

The IP address used with the source mask to identify the source network for this table entry.

The network mask used with the source IP address.

The amount of time remaining before this prune will expire at the upstream neighbor. If no prune messages were received from downstream neighbors, this is set to the value of the default prune lifetime timer; otherwise, it is set to the smallest received value or the default timer, whichever is less.

View the DVMRP Route

 To view the multicast DVMRP route:


2.



4.









7.

Select

Routing



> Multicast > DVMRP > DVMRP Route

.



463



Table 175. DVMRP Route

Field

Source Address

Source Mask

Upstream Neighbor

Interface

Metric

Expiry Time

Up Time

Description

The network address that is combined with the source mask to identify the sources for this entry.

The network subnet mask used with the source IP address to identify the sources for this entry.

The address of the upstream neighbor (for example, RPF neighbor) from which IP datagrams from these sources are received.

The interface on which IP datagrams sent by these sources are received. A value of 0 typically means the route is an aggregate for which no next-hop interface exists.

The distance in hops to the source subnet.

The amount of time remaining before this prune expires at the upstream neighbor. If no prune messages were received from downstream neighbors, this is set to value of the default prune lifetime timer, otherwise it is set to the smallest received value or the default timer, whichever is less.

The time since the route represented by this entry was learned by the router.

Configure Multicast IGMP Settings

You can configure IGMP settings and view IGMP statistics.

Configure IGMP Global Settings

 To configure the IGMP global settings:










464




7.

Select

Routing

 >

Multicast

>

IGMP

>

Global Configuration

.

8. In the Admin Mode field, select the Enable or Disable option.

This sets the administrative status of IGMP in the router to active or inactive. The default is Disable.



Configure the IGMP Routing Interface

 To configure the IGMP routing interface:











7. Select the Routing

 > Multicast > IGMP > Routing Interface Configuration .


465




9. Select the check box beside the interface for which data is to be displayed or configured.

10. In the Admin Mode field, select the Enable or Disable option to set the administrative status of IGMP on the selected routing interface.


11. In the Version field, enter the version of IGMP to configure for the selected interface.

Valid values are 1 to 3. The default value is 3. This field is configurable only when IGMP

Interface mode is enabled.

12. In the Robustness field, enter the robustness value.

This variable allows tuning for the expected packet loss on a subnet. If you expect the subnet to be lossy, enter a higher number for this parameter. IGMP is robust to robustness variable –1 packet losses. Valid values are 1 to 255. The default value is 2.

13. In the Query Interval field, enter the frequency in seconds at which IGMP host-query packets are to be transmitted on this interface.


14. In the Query Max Response Time field, enter the maximum query response time, in tenths of a second, to be advertised in IGMPv2 queries on this interface.

The default value is 100. Valid values are 0 to 255.

15. In the Startup Query Interval field, enter the number of seconds between the transmission of startup queries on the selected interface.


16. In the Startup Query Count field, enter the number of queries to be sent on startup.

The valid values are 1 to 20. The default value is 2.

17. In the Last Member Query Interval field, enter the last member query interval in tenths of a second.


466


This is the maximum response time to be inserted into group-specific queries sent in response to leave group messages, and is also the amount of time between group-specific query messages. Valid values are from 0 to 255. The default value is 10.

This value is not used for IGMP version 1.

18.

In the

Last Member Query Count

field, enter the number of queries to be sent on receiving a leave group report.

Valid values are from 1 to 20. The default value is 2.



View IGMP Routing Interface Statistics

 To view the IGMP routing interface statistics:

1.



3.





5.



6.

Click the

Login

button.



 > Multicast > IGMP > Routing Interface Statistics .


467




Table 176. Multicast IGMP Routing Interface Statistics

Field

Interface

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Protocol State

Querier IP

Querier Status

Querier Up Time

Description

The interface on which the IGMP is enabled.

The IP address of the selected interface.

The subnet mask for the IP address of the selected interface.

The operational state of IGMP on the selected interface, either

Operational or Non-Operational.

The address of the IGMP querier on the IP subnet to which the selected interface is attached.

Indicates whether the selected interface is in querier or non-querier mode.

The time in seconds since the IGMP interface querier was last changed.

Querier Expiry Time

Wrong Version Queries Received The number of queries that were received on the selected interface with an IGMP version that does not match the IGMP version configured for the interface, over the lifetime of the entry. IGMP requires that all routers on a LAN be configured to run the same version of IGMP.

Therefore, a configuration error is indicated if any queries are received with the wrong version number.

Number of Joins Received

The time in seconds remaining before the other querier present timer expires. If the local system is the querier, this is zero.

Number of Groups

The number of times a group membership was added on the selected interface; that is, the number of times an entry for this interface was added to the cache table. This gives an indication of the amount of

IGMP activity on the interface.

The current number of entries for the selected interface in the cache table.

View the IGMP Groups

 To view the IGMP groups:






468









7.

Select

Routing

 >

Multicast

>

IGMP

>

IGMP Groups

.

8. Use the Search menu to search for multicast entries by Interface or Group .

• Select Interface from the Search list, enter the interface in unit/slot/port format, for example 1/0/13, then click the Go button. If the entry exists, the entry is displayed as the first entry, followed by the remaining entries.

• Select Group from the Search list, enter the multicast group IP, then click the Go button. If the entry exists, that entry with the matching group is displayed as the first entry, followed by the remaining entries. An exact match is required.



Table 177. Multicast IGMP Groups

Field

Interface

Multicast Group IP

Last Reporter

Up Time

Expiry Time

Description

The interface for which data is to be displayed.

The IP multicast group address for which data is to be displayed.

The IP address of the source of the last membership report received for the IP multicast group address on the selected interface.

The time elapsed since this entry was created.

The minimum amount of time remaining before this entry is aged out.


469


Table 177. Multicast IGMP Groups (continued)

Field

Version 1 Host Timer

Version 2 Host Timer

Compatibility

Filter Mode

Description

The time remaining until the local router assumes that no IGMP version

1 members are on the IP subnet attached to this interface. When an

IGMPv1 membership report is received, this timer is reset to the group membership timer. While this timer is non-zero, the local router ignores any IGMPv2 leave messages for this group that it receives on the selected interface. This field is displayed only if the interface is configured for IGMP version 1.

The time remaining until the local router assumes that no IGMP version

2 members are on the IP subnet attached to this interface. When an

IGMPv2 membership report is received, this timer is reset to the group membership timer. While this timer is non-zero, the local router ignores any IGMPv1 and IGMPv3 leave messages for this group that it receives on the selected interface. This field is displayed only if the interface is configured for IGMP version 2.

This parameter shows group compatibility mode (v1, v2, and v3) for this group on the specified interface.

The source filter mode (

Include

,

Exclude

, or

NA

) for the specified group on this interface. When NA mode is active, the field is blank.

View the IGMP Membership

 To view the IGMP membership:












 > Multicast > IGMP > IGMP Membership .


470


8. Use the Search By list to search for multicast entries by Interface or Group IP .

• Select Interface from the Search list , enter the interface in unit/slot/port format, for example, 1/0/13, then click the Go button. If the entry exists, the entry is displayed as the first entry, followed by the remaining entries.

• Select Group IP from the Search list, enter the multicast hroup IP, then click the Go button. If the entry exists, that entry with the matching hroup IP is displayed as the first entry, followed by the remaining entries. An exact match is required.



Table 178. Multicast IGMP Membership

Field

Interface

Group IP

Compatibility Mode

Source Filter Mode

Source Hosts

Expiry Time

Description

The interface on which multicast packets are forwarded.

The IP multicast group address for which data is to be displayed.

This parameter shows group compatibility mode (v1, v2, and v3) for this group on the specified interface.

The source filter mode ( Include , Exclude , or NA ) for the specified group on this interface. When NA mode is active, the field is blank.

This parameter shows source addresses that are members of this multicast address.

This parameter shows expiry time interval against each source address that are members of this multicast group. This is the amount of time after which the specified source entry is aged out.

Configure the IGMP Proxy Interface

 To configure the IGMP proxy interface:






471









 > Multicast > IGMP > Proxy Interface Configuration .

8. Use the Interface list to select the port.

At least one router interface must be configured before you configure or display data for an IGMP proxy interface, and it must not be an IGMP routing interface.

9. Select Enable or Disable from the Admin Mode list.

This sets the administrative status of IGMP proxy on the selected interface. The default is

Disable. Routing, IGMP and Multicast global admin modes must be enabled to enable

IGMP proxy interface mode.

10. In the Unsolicited Report Interval field, enter the unsolicited time interval value in seconds.

The unsolicited report interval is the time between repetitions of a host's initial report of membership in a group. Valid values are from 1 to 260. The default value is 1.




472



Table 179. Multicast IGMP Proxy Interface Configuration

Field

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Operational Mode

Querier Address on Proxy

Interface

Number of Groups

Description

The IP address of the IGMP proxy interface.

The subnet mask for the IP address of the IGMP proxy interface.

The operational state of IGMP proxy interface.

The querier address on the proxy interface.

Version

Version 1 Querier Timeout

Version 2 Querier Timeout

Proxy Start Frequency

The current number of multicast group entries for the IGMP proxy interface in the cache table.

Enter the version of IGMP to configure on the selected interface. Valid values are 1 to 3; the default value is 3. This field is configurable only when IGMP proxy Interface mode is enabled.

The older IGMP version 1 querier time-out value in seconds. The older version querier Interval is the time-out for transitioning a host back to

IGMPv3 mode, once an older version query is heard. When an older version query is received, hosts set their older version querier present timer to older version querier Interval.

The older IGMP version 2 querier time-out value in seconds.

The number of times the proxy was brought up.

View the IGMP Proxy Interface Statistics

 To view the IGMP proxy interface statistics:


2.



4.










473





> Multicast > IGMP > Proxy Interface Statistics .



Table 180. Multicast IGMP Proxy Interface Statistics

Field

Proxy Interface

Version

Queries Received

Report Received

Reports Sent

Leaves Received

Leaves Sent

Description

The interface on which IGMP packets are received.

The version of IGMP packets received.

The number of IGMP queries received.

The number of IGMP reports received.

The number of IGMP reports sent.

The number of IGMP leaves received.

The number of IGMP leaves sent.

View the IGMP Proxy Membership

 To view the IGMP proxy membership:














> Multicast > IGMP > Proxy Membership .


474




Table 181. Multicast IGMP Proxy Membership

Field

Proxy Interface

Group IP

Source Hosts

Last Reporter

Up Time

Expiry Time

State

Filter Mode

Number of Sources

Description

The interface on which IGMP proxy is enabled.

The IP multicast group address.

This parameter shows source addresses that are members of this multicast address.

The IP address of the source of the last membership report received for the IP multicast group address on the IGMP proxy interface.

The time elapsed since this entry was created.

This parameter shows expiry time interval against each source address that is a member of this multicast group. This is the amount of time after which the specified source entry is aged out.

The state of the host entry. A host can be in one of the state.

Non-member state - does not belong to the group on the interface.

Delaying member state - host belongs to the group on the interface and report timer running. The report timer is used to send out the reports.

Idle member state - host belongs to the group on the interface and no report timer running.

The group filter mode (Include/Exclude/None) for the specified group on the IGMP proxy interface.

The number of source hosts present in the selected multicast group.

Configure PIM Settings

You can configure PIM settings and view PIM statistics.


475


Configure the Multicast PIM Global Settings

Protocol-Independent Multicast (PIM) is a standard multicast routing protocol that provides scalable interdomain multicast routing across the Internet, independent of the mechanisms provided by any particular unicast routing protocol.

 To configure the PIM global settings:












 > Multicast > PIM > Global Configuration .

8. In the Admin Mode field, select the protocol of PIM in the router.

Possible values are Disable , PIM-SM , or PIM-DM . The default is Disable .



Configure PIM SSM Settings

While PIM employs a specially configured rendezvous point (RP) router that serves as a meeting junction for multicast senders and listeners, Protocol-Independent Multicast

Single-Source Multicast (PIM-SSM) does not use an RP. It supports only source route delivery trees. It is used between routers so that they can track which multicast packets to forward to each other and to their directly connected LANs. The SSM service model can be


476

M6100, M5300, and M7100 Series Managed Switches implemented with a strict subset of the PIM protocol mechanisms. Both regular IP multicast and SSM semantics can coexist on a single router, and both can be implemented using the

PIM protocol. A range of multicast addresses, currently 232.0.0.0/8 in IPv4 and FF3x::/32 in

IPv6, is reserved for SSM.

 To configure PIM SSM settings:


2.



4.









7.

Select

Routing

 >

Multicast

>

PIM

>

SSM Configuration

.

8. In the SSM Group Address field, enter the source-specific multicast group IP address.

9. In the SSM Group Mask field, enter the source-specific multicast group IP address mask.


The source-specific group is added.

11. To delete the selected source-specific group., click the Delete button.

Configure PIM Interface

 To configure the multicast PIM interface:



477












 > Multicast > PIM > Interface Configuration .

8.

Select the check box beside the interface.

9. In the Admin Mode field, select the Enable or Disable option to set the administrative status of PIM in the router.


10.

In the

Hello Interval

field, enter the time in seconds between the transmission of PIM hello messages on this interface.

The valid values are from 0 to 18000. The default value is 30.

11. In the Join/Prune Interval , enter the time in seconds at which PIM Join/Prune messages are transmitted on this PIM interface. The valid values are from 0 to 18000. The default value is 60.

12.

In the

BSR Border

field, select the

Enable

or

Disable

option to set the bootstrap router

(BSR) border status on the selected interface.

13. Enter the DR Priority for the selected interface.

The valid values are from 0 to 2147483647. The default value is 1.

14.

Click the

Apply

button.


478




Table 182. Multicast PIM Interface Configuration

Field

Protocol State

IP Address

Designated Router

Neighbor Count

Description

The state of PIM in the router. either Operational or Non-Operational.

The IP address of the selected PIM interface. If you enter an IPv6 address, the format is prefix/prefix length.

The designated router on the selected PIM interface.

The number of PIM neighbors on the selected interface.

View the PIM Neighbor

 To view the PIM neighbor:

1.



3.





5.



6.

Click the

Login

button.



 > Multicast > PIM > PIM Neighbor .



479



Table 183. Multicast PIM Neighbor

Field

Interface

Neighbor IP

Up Time (hh:mm:ss)


Description

The interface on which the neighbor is displayed.

The IP address of the PIM neighbor for this entry.

The time since this PIM neighbor (last) became a neighbor of the local router.

The minimum time remaining before this PIM neighbor is aged out.

View the PIM Candidate Rendezvous Point

 To view the multicast PIM candidate rendezvous point (RP):












 > Multicast > PIM > Candidate RP Configuration .


480




Field

Field

Interface

Neighbor IP

Up Time (hh:mm:ss)


Description

Description





View the PIM Neighbor

 To view the multicast PIM neighbor:


2.



4.









7.

Select

Routing

 >

Multicast

>

PIM

>

PIM Neighbor

.


481




Field

Interface

Neighbor IP

Up Time (hh:mm:ss)


Description





Configure the PIM Candidate Rendezvous Point

 To configure the PIM candidate rendezvous point (RP):












 > Multicast > PIM > Candidate RP Configuration .


482


8. From the list of interfaces, select the Interface .

9.

Enter the

Group Address

transmitted in candidate-RP-advertisements.

If you enter an IPv6 address, the format is prefix/prefix length.

10. In the Group Mask field, enter the group address mask transmitted in candidate-RP-advertisements

11.

In the

C-RP Advertisement Interval

field, specify the duration in seconds at which the

C-RP messages are unicast to the bootstrap router (BSR).

The range is from 1 to 16383 seconds. The default value is 60 seconds. If this field is submitted without any value, the default value is used.

12.

Click the

Add

button.

The candidate-RP address is added for the PIM router.

13. To delete the selected candidate-RP address for the PIM router, click the Delete button.

Configure the PIM Bootstrap Router Candidate

 To configure the multicast PIM bootstrap router (BSR) candidate:


2.



4.









7.

Select

Routing

 >

Multicast

>

PIM

>

BSR Candidate Configuration

.


483


8. From the list of interfaces, select the Interface .

9. Enter the C-BSR Hash Mask Length to be advertised in bootstrap messages.

This hash mask length is used in the hash algorithm for selecting the RP for a particular group. The valid values are from 0 to 32. The default value is 30.

10. In the Priority field, enter the priority of C-BSR.

11. Enter the Advertisement Interval value of the C-BSR in seconds.




13. Click the Delete button to remove the configured Hash Mask Length and Priority values and restore them to the default values.



Table 186. Multicast BSR Candidate Configuration

Field

BSR Expiry Time (hh:mm:ss)

Description

Time (in hours, minutes and seconds) in which the learned elected bootstrap router (BSR) expires.

IP Address

Next bootstrap Message

(hh:mm:ss)

The IP address of the elected BSR.

Time (in hours, minutes, and seconds) in which the next bootstrap message is due from this BSR.

Next Candidate RP Advertisement

(hh:mm:ss)

Time (in hours, minutes, and seconds) in which the next candidate RP advertisement is sent.


484


Configure the PIM Static Rendezvous Point

You can statically configure the rendezvous point (RP) address for one or more multicast groups.

 To configure the PIM static RP:


2.



4.









7.

Select

Routing

 >

Multicast

>

PIM

>

Static RP Configuration

.

8. In the RP Address field, enter the IP address for one or more multicast groups.

9. In the Group Address field, enter the group address of the RP.

10. Enter the Group Mask of the RP to be created or deleted.

11. In the Override field, select Enable or Disable .

Enable indicates that, if there is a conflict, the RP configured with this option prevails over the RP learned by BSR.


The static RP address is added for one or more multicast groups

13. To remove the selected RP address, click the Delete button.




485


Configure Multicast Static Routes

 To configure multicast static routes:












 > Multicast > Static Routes Configuration .

8. In the Source IP field, enter the IP address that identifies the multicast packet source for the entry you are creating.

9.

In the

Source Mask

field, enter the subnet mask to be applied to the source IP address.

10. In RPF Neighbor field, enter the IP address of the neighbor router on the path to the source.

11.

In the

Metric

field, enter the link state cost of the path to the multicast source.

The range is 0 to 255, the default is 1. You can change the metric for a configured route by selecting the static route and editing this field.

12.

Click the

Add

button.


13. To delete the selected multicast static route, click the Delete button.

14.

Click the

Apply

button.



486


Configure the Multicast Admin Boundary

The definition of an administratively scoped boundary is a mechanism to stop the ingress and egress of multicast traffic for a given range of multicast addresses on a given routing interface.

 To configure the multicast admin boundary:

1.



3.





5.


The default admin user name is admin and the default adm